You are on page 1of 428

Title:

HEALTH AND SAFETY


POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
MANUAL

Revision Status:
Level: L1A
Classification: Policy and Procedure
Manual Number: HQS-HSE-PP-01
Issue Number: 03
Revision Number: 01
Revision Date: January 14, 2008

Transocean NONCONTROLLED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: TOC
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 ........................................................................................................... GENERAL

SUBSECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
SUBSECTION 2 ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
SUBSECTION 3 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION
SUBSECTION 4 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

SECTION 2 ........................................ RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION

SUBSECTION 1 MANUAL STRUCTURE


SUBSECTION 2 QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
SUBSECTION 3 HSE MENTORING
SUBSECTION 4 ISM CODE

SECTION 3 ........................HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION

SUBSECTION 1 RISK MANAGEMENT


1 MEDICAL PREPAREDNESS OF OVERSEAS
ASSIGNMENT
2 PATHOGENS

SUBSECTION 2 IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING


1 INSTALLATION CLINICS, MEDICAL
DOCUMENTATION AND WORLDWIDE ONSHORE
CARE
2 POTABLE WATER

SUBSECTION 3 EVALUATING AND IMPROVING


1 SANITATION, HYGIENE AND SMOKING
LIMITATIONS

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: TOC
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 4.........................SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION

SUBSECTION 1 ORIENTATION AND TRAINING


1 HSE ORIENTATION
2 DRUGS, ALCOHOL AND WEAPONS IN THE
WORKPLACE
3 TRAINING

SUBSECTION 2 RISK MANAGEMENT


1 THINK PLANNING PROCESS
2 PERMIT TO WORK
3 CLIENT AND SUBCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL AND
EQUIPMENT
4 DRESS REQUIREMENTS AND PERSONAL
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

SUBSECTION 3 PLANNING
1 HYDROGEN SULFIDE
2 EMERGENCY RESPONSE

SUBSECTION 4 COMMUNICATION
1 HSE INFORMATION
2 HSE MEETINGS

SUBSECTION 5 IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING


1 START PROCESS
2 TRAVEL
3 GENERAL SAFE WORK PRACTICES
4 ENERGY SOURCES AND ISOLATION
5 FALL PROTECTION
6 MECHANICAL LIFTING
7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
8 PERSONAL IMPAIRMENT
9 ELECTRICAL SAFETY

SUBSECTION 6 EVALUATING AND IMPROVING


1 HSE RECOGNITION
2 FOCUS IMPROVEMENT PROCESS
3 INCIDENT REPORTING

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: TOC
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5 ................................................................................................................ ANNEX

SUBSECTION 1 ACRONYMS/ABBREVIATIONS
SUBSECTION 2 DEFINITIONS
SUBSECTION 3 INDEX OF DOCUMENTATION
SUBSECTION 4 FILING OF DOCUMENTATION
SUBSECTION 5 INDEX OF KEYWORDS

SECTION 6 ................................. DOCUMENT CONTROL PAGE / TABLE OF REVISIONS

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: N/A
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
PREFACE

The Health and Safety Management System described in this manual was compiled to
improve HSE performance while attempting to capture the hard-learned lessons
experienced in the past.

The policies and procedures in this manual are intended to address the hazards associated
with our operations. The system is designed to enable individuals and teams to carry out a
suitable and sufficient risk assessment for each task performed and maintain control to
prevent incidents.

To achieve our safety vision of an incident-free workplace, it is vital that we know our
people and enable them to contribute to their maximum potential while respecting the
diversity of cultures and personality traits of individuals.

Mentoring is important at all levels within the organization to ensure that the wealth of
knowledge of more experienced people is shared with less experienced people, to help
them achieve their full potential.

It is not through rules alone that we will achieve our vision of an incident-free work place. It
is through people actively caring and participating in our processes and by proactively
taking responsibility for the well being of themselves and their co-workers.

It is important that all personnel understand their obligation to interrupt the operation if they
observe an act or situation that could cause an incident.

The key tools within the system are the THINK Planning Process and the START
Observation and Monitoring Process. Proper planning is the first step to implementing an
incident-free operation. The THINK process reminds personnel to think about everything
they do before actually doing it. The START process of monitoring the operation and
reinforcing safe behavior, while correcting any unsafe acts or conditions, is vital to ensure
that the necessary controls remain in place during implementation.

Personnel must be responsible and held accountable for their actions if an incident-free
workplace is to be achieved.

This manual is a living document and depends on input from the end user to ensure it is
modified or updated as necessary. Please do not hesitate to provide any feedback you
have to Corporate HSE Department.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
N/A
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
PREFACE
MISSION STATEMENT AND CORE VALUES

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
N/A
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
PREFACE
HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY STATEMENT

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 ........................................................................................................... GENERAL

SUBSECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
SUBSECTION 2 ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
SUBSECTION 3 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION
SUBSECTION 4 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HSE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
SECTION: 1
MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION

The purpose of the Company Management System (CMS) is to define and communicate
Company leadership’s values, beliefs and expectations. This provides direction so people
can align their efforts and determine the best methods to achieve the desired results.

The CMS establishes consistent performance standards across the Company’s worldwide
operations; describes processes for monitoring results, improving performance, capturing
and sharing lessons learned; and provides people with the opportunity to align their
understanding of expectations, make personal commitments and apply their efforts to meet
performance standards.

The Company Management System includes performance standards established at all


three levels: Level 1 – Corporate, Level 2 – Business Unit and Division and Level 3 –
Installation.

This manual represents a Level 1A document within the CMS. Its purpose is to
communicate the Corporate HSE group performance standards. The Director of QHSE
Services is the designated owner of this document and is responsible for its content and
implementation.

Recommended changes to the procedures in this manual are submitted to Quality Services
through the SMART (System Management and Review Team) process, (see the CMS
Manual, HQS-CMS-GOV, in Section 5.1). The SMART process enables people at all
levels in the Company to propose and implement changes to the CMS through the
individual Core Management Functions.

The relationship between this manual and the other CMS documents is found in the CMS
Manual, HQS-CMS-GOV, in Section 5.2.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

1 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

HSE management is a line management responsibility. Visible management


commitment and involvement at all levels is essential for successful HSE
performance.

The purpose of this section is to provide an overview of the responsibilities of key


positions within the Company organization with regard to achieving the Company
Safety Vision:

“Our operations will be conducted in an incident-free workplace – all the time,


everywhere.”

All Company personnel at all levels of the organization have the responsibility to
comply with policy and procedures and participate in the achievement of annual
HSE goals. Participation fosters positive, proactive attitudes and behavior to help
meet HSE goals.

1.1 CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER:

The Chief Executive Officer is ultimately responsible for the health, safety and
welfare of all personnel working at Company installations, facilities and offices.
Specific responsibilities include:
• Establishing and supporting the Company Safety Vision: “Our operations will
be conducted in an incident-free workplace – all the time, everywhere.”
• Reviewing and giving approval of the Company Quality, Health and Safety,
and Environmental Policy Statements applicable to worldwide operations.
• Give final approval of the necessary resources to maintain and improve the
HSE performance throughout Company operations.
• Attends Corporate QHSE Steering Committee meetings and participates in
regular reviews of overall HSE Performance to ensure effective HSE plans
are in place to achieve the Company Safety Vision.
• Ensure that the value placed on HSE is never compromised and safety is
placed on at least an equal footing to operations performance.

1.2 CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER:

The Chief Operating Officer is responsible for the day-to-day operations of the
Company.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 1 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

• Review critical incidents with line management to ensure appropriate lessons


are learned and adequate action plans are implemented.
• Review HSE indicators to ensure preventive actions implemented are
providing adequate results.
• Be responsible for safe and efficient operation in worldwide operations.
• Ensure that adequate resources are dedicated to effectively support line
management with regard to HSE issues in worldwide operations.
• Review and give approval of the Company Quality and HSE Policy
Statements applicable to worldwide operations.
• Participate in the annual review of HSE performance to identify gaps and any
needed modification of HSE plans to achieve the Company Safety Vision.
• Issue guidelines to the Business Units regarding their HSE plans and give
final approval of those plans.
• Ensure implementation of Company HSE policies and procedures in
worldwide operations.

1.3 VICE PRESIDENT QHSE:


• Ensure adequate resources are available to support Business Unit Vice
Presidents on HSE issues that are applicable worldwide.
• Participate in the annual review of HSE performance to identify gaps and any
needed modification of HSE plans to achieve the Company Safety Vision.
• Review and give approval of Company QHSE policies applicable to worldwide
operations.
• Review and give approval of the Company Quality, Health and Safety, and
Environmental Policy Statements applicable to worldwide operations.
• Be responsible for the activities of QHSE Department to achieve global QHSE
objectives.

1.4 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT:


• Be responsible for safe and efficient operation in their assigned area of
operations.
• Participate in the annual review of HSE performance to identify gaps and any
needed modification of HSE plans to achieve the Company Safety Vision.
• Ensure that adequate resources are dedicated to effectively support line
management with regard to HSE issues within their Business Unit.
• Assist with the analysis of incidents as required.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 2 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

• Provide authorization to Business Unit, Division, Sector and Branch


department heads for development of respective manuals. (See HQS-CMS-
GOV Section 5, Subsection 2.)
• Establish approval authority limits for policies, procedures and standards
applicable only within their Business Unit. (See HQS-CMS-GOV Section 6.)
• Assure implementation of Company HSE policies and procedures in their
area of operations.
• Support and monitor installation HSE plans to achieve the Company Safety
Vision.
• Recognize effective performance and execution of installation HSE plans.

1.5 OIM OR MASTER:


• Develop installation HSE plans to achieve the Company Safety Vision.
• Monitor execution of installation HSE plans and provide a consistent
approach to achieving the Company Safety Vision.
• Lead by positive example.
• Implement HSE policies and procedures on their assigned installation.
• Develop installation-specific procedures.
• Ensure installation class and statutory documentation is current.
• Assist with incident analysis as required.
• Authorize specific personnel for various circumstances (for example,
responsible person for work permits, authorization for specific equipment
operation, and so on).

1.6 SUPERVISORS:
• Participate in the development of installation HSE plans to achieve the
Company Safety Vision.
• Implement HSE policies and procedures within their departments.
• Ensure crewmembers are properly trained and fully understand plans for
upcoming tasks and their responsibilities within those plans.
• Provide advice and guidance to crewmembers, act as a positive role model.
• Take a leading, participating role in the Performance Monitoring Audit and
Assessment.
• Conduct and facilitate effective HSE meetings.
• Treat people as THEY NEED to be treated, know your people.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 3 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

1.7 ALL COMPANY PERSONNEL:


• Visibly conduct themselves in line with the FIRST core values.
• Be responsible and accountable for their behavior and for their own safety.
• Have the obligation and the responsibility not to participate in an unsafe act
and also the obligation and responsibility to interrupt any operation to prevent
an unsafe act or unsafe condition from causing an incident. Each individual
also has the obligation and responsibility to take action to correct any unsafe
behavior or condition.
• Provide support by removing barriers that prevent achieving the Company
Safety Vision: “Our operations will be conducted in an incident-free
workplace, all the time. Everywhere.”
• Become familiar with and implement all applicable HSE policies and
procedures.
• Actively support and practice the Company THINK, START and FOCUS
processes in order to effectively plan, monitor and improve the HSE aspects
of the operation.
• Immediately report all incidents to a Company supervisor.
• Actively participate in the various Company plans to improve HSE aspects of
the operation (HSE Meetings, QHSE Steering Committees, Emergency Drills,
HSE plan development and implementation, etc.).
• Actively mentor co-workers to help them improve their HSE performance.
• Be aware and understand their responsibilities and authority levels as
documented in their job description and HSE Manual.
• Treat people as THEY NEED to be treated.
• Walk the talk.

2 ORGANIZATION

The C.E.O. is ultimately responsible for the safe and efficient operation of the
Company. The Chief Operating Officer is responsible for the day to day operations
of the Company. The Vice President QHSE is responsible for the activities of QHSE
Department to achieve global QHSE management objectives. The Director of QHSE
is responsible for the overall planning, maintenance and implementation of the HSE
Management System in order to achieve QHSE objectives. Figure A illustrates line
management at the executive level.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 4 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Figure A, HSE Line Management

3 HSE FUNCTION

The HSE Department is independent of line management and provides support and
advice on all matters related to HSE.

The role of the HSE Department includes three main areas: development and
communication of appropriate HSE Policies and Procedures, global HSE strategy
and support to operations, and development and deployment of Corporate
Operations Safety Advisors.

HSE Policies and Procedures


• Communicate clear HSE expectations through the Corporate HSE Policies
and Procedures.
• Review and act upon HSE related feedback to ensure effective understanding
of expectations and capture lessons learned.
• Participate in, evaluate and align with regulatory, client and industry best
practices for continuous improvement when applicable.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 5 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

HSE Support for Global Operations


• Monitor global HSE performance.
• Assign high caliber line staff to HSE support positions.
• Facilitate and manage ISM and ISPS aspects at the corporate level.
• Facilitate and coordinate the follow up of critical incident analysis as
requested.
• Communicate critical safety issues through HSE Alerts and various safety
related reports.
• Communicate appropriate lessons learned across the Company.
• Oversee the operation of the Med-Track Program in conjunction with Human
Resources and Risk Departments.
• Directly support Medical Emergency Response Plans and oversee
management of Medical Topside Support in the Business Units and Divisions.
• Develop HSE related training in conjunction with the Training Department and
specifically deliver Safety Leadership Training (SLT) to key Company
personnel.
• Monitor worldwide health, safety and security risks and, where appropriate,
communicate to affected personnel.
• Monitor environmental legislation and communicate to affected personnel.
• Work with Supply Chain Management to review and evaluate potential HSE
related products.
• Maintain Corporate QHSE website and provide up-to-date information about
health, safety, security and environmental issues.
• Monitor Key Performance Indicators; review and analyze HSE trends; and
communicate recommendations to Corporate and Business Unit
management.
• Provide HSE information and statistics internally and to industry and clients.

Development and Deployment of Corporate Operations Safety Advisors


• Coach Business Unit, Division and Corporate management in the Company’s
HSE processes including Management of Change (THINK, START and
FOCUS); Safety Leadership Training; Performance Monitoring Audit and
Assessment (PMAA); Operation Integrity Case, and so on.
• Coach and mentor individuals on personal commitment (responsibility,
accountability, empowerment and clear agreements).

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 6 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

• Assist in conducting incident analysis as requested by Business Unit and


Division management.
• Evaluate the planning and readiness of Installation Major Emergency
Management (including Security Plans and Emergency Response Plans) and
assist in HSE training as requested.
• As appropriate, participate in Performance Monitoring Audit and Assessments
at Corporate, Business Unit, Division, Sector and installation levels; assist in
development of corrective action plans; and follow up to close out of those
plans.
• Assist in evaluating health and environmental risk assessments at the
installation and facility level.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 7 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HSE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
SECTION: 1
MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
GENERAL
DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION

1 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION

The document structure for HSE is shown below in Figure B. This includes the
departmental Policy and Procedure Manual (this document) and all supporting
manuals and documents. The manual types are identified by the third set of letters in
the manual number using Figure A.

Figure A, Manual Types and Identifiers

Policies & Procedures (PP Series)

Procedures (PR Series)

Handbook (HB Series)

Recommended Practices (RP Series)

User Manual (UM Series)

Standards (Varies)

Alerts, Advisories, Bulletins (Varies)

2 DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION

Each manual and document shown in Figure B is accompanied by a brief


description. The description includes a summary of the content and, in the case of
supporting manuals, a reference to the policy(s) supported.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 2
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HSE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
SECTION: 1
MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
GENERAL
DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION

Figure B, HSE Documentation Organization Chart

In addition to links to the above documentation, other HSE management system


documentation can be found on the Corporate QHSE intranet site. This includes (but
is not limited to) the following:
• HSE Organization Chart and team members
• Incident Statistics
• ISM Information
• Links to Unit/Division/Sector HSE Websites
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 2
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

1 POLICY

Change to plans, situations or unexpected events must be recognized and the


associated risks managed.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that personnel understand what is required to
plan, recognize change and react by interrupting before the change leads to an
incident.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel that work at any Company installation,
facility or office.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 GENERAL

Management of Change is:


• planning, monitoring, recognizing change,
• interrupting to evaluate the effect of change, and
• modifying the plan as necessary.

The requirements and/or complexity of a task determine the level of management


and supervision necessary to ensure appropriate expertise and resources are used
to assess the risk, apply controls and develop the plan.

Change cannot be recognized or managed without an effective plan.

Management of Change is used to effectively recognize and manage risks when


changes, conditions and inactions in a given situation or unexpected events are
experienced.

THINK is used by the Company to formulate and communicate the plan.

START is used by the Company to monitor the plan and recognize when the plan is
no longer suitable.

Managing change while performing your task is simply the effective use of THINK
and START.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Training for Management of Change is available on the Safety Leadership Training


DVD. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3.)

Figure A, Management of Change Process, Simple Approach

FOCUS enhances the execution of THINK and START within the Management of
Change process by providing a consistent means to request, track and receive
additional expertise (knowledge, experience, skills) and approval from within the
organization.

If, while monitoring a plan, a change is recognized, the task must be interrupted to
assess the change and any new risks.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

4.2 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE PROCESS

The following steps represent the Management of Change process:


1. Develop a plan for a task (THINK).
2. Monitor the plan: (START).
3. Recognize changes. (START).
4. Interrupt the task to evaluate the change (assess the risk). (START and
THINK).
5. Revise the current plan or develop a new plan (THINK) and initiate the
(FOCUS) improvement process if required.
6. Continue with the task using the revised Plan.

4.3 CARRYING OUT THE MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE PROCESS

The Management of Change process is carried out using one of three approaches:
• Simple
• Enhanced
• Exemption

The Installation Asset Manager, Performance Manager, and Installation Engineer


are considered part of the installation’s resources and do not require the Enhanced
Approach for utilization.

To determine which approach applies to a given situation, the rules of task planning
must be followed by the person(s) involved in creating the new or revised plan.
• Does the new or revised plan comply with the Company Management System
procedures?
• Do I/we have the knowledge, experience, skills, and approval authority to
assess AND implement the new or revised plan?

If the answer to ALL of these questions is yes, the Simple Approach may be used.

If the new or revised plan complies with the Company Management System
procedures but the knowledge, experience, skills, or approval authority is NOT
available, the Enhanced Approach must be used.

The Enhanced Approach may be used even if the Simple Approach has been
determined to be acceptable, at the discretion of the personnel performing the risk
assessment.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

If the new or revised plan does not comply with the Company Management System
procedures, an Exemption must be requested.

4.3.1 SIMPLE APPROACH

Control of the risks identified is accomplished utilizing an appropriate risk


assessment from the individual THINK plan up to the Task Risk Assessment.

If it is determined at the installation/facility level that a Task Specific THINK


Procedure needs to be developed or an existing one revised, a written THINK plan
is required for the task to proceed until such time as the new or revised Task
Specific THINK Procedure is approved.

4.3.2 ENHANCED APPROACH

The Rig Manager must review the FOCUS proposal and risk assessment to
determine if it is required and adds value, and if further assessment or additional
expertise is required. Examples of additional expertise are:
• Unit and Division management review and feedback of proposed changes.
• Engineering assistance via a Request for Engineering Assistance (REA) (See
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2 subsection 4) (NOTE: Not all REAs will require
the use of FOCUS).
• Class/Flag/Regulatory approval.
• Corporate, Business Unit and Division SMART members.
• Technical field support - equipment specification or performance changes.
• HSE – safety system changes.
• Operations – well construction.
• Departments assisting with implementing proposed change.
• Specialized subcontractor.

If the Management of Change process uses the Enhanced Approach, the FOCUS
tracking software must be used.

The FOCUS tracking software is used with Management of Change to develop


plans, obtain approvals, monitor the progress and track the progress to completion.

NOTE: Approval may be granted verbally or via email in urgent and


exceptional situations but must be followed up with the required
documentation within seven days.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

4.4 EXEMPTIONS

Exemptions from Company Management System policies are not approved.


However, exemptions from Company Management System procedures are reviewed
and approved on a case-by-case basis. Management System procedures are the
Company approved methods for achieving the intent of Company policies.

If a new or revised plan does not comply with the Company Management System
procedures, an exemption from that procedure is required. The exemption is
approved only after the Business Unit Vice President has reviewed, assessed and
confirmed the alternative procedure meets the intent of the policy.

There should never be an occasion when an alternative procedure in an approved


exemption does not achieve the intent of a Corporate or Business Unit policy.

If the change exceeds the authorized operational limits, the exemption is no longer
valid and a new exemption request is required. Operational limits on an exemption
define specific boundaries or criteria for execution of the plan.

A Task Risk Assessment and Request for Exemption form must be completed and
submitted with each exemption request to verify all associated risks are identified
and the control measures to prevent and mitigate those risks are clearly listed.

The Request for Exemption form progresses through line management, (Department
Head, OIM, Rig Manager, Sector Manager, Division Manager, to Business Unit Vice
President). During this progression, should any level not approve the Request for
Exemption form, the exemption request ceases and the Company Management
System procedure is complied with or the operation is not carried out.

The Business Unit Vice President may appoint a designate to approve exemption
requests.

The final approval authority must be satisfied;


• the appropriate knowledge, experience and skills are available to execute the
alternative procedure and,
• the appropriate knowledge, experience and skills were applied during the
review and approval process, at all levels.

The final approval authority must ensure that the alternative procedure effectively
monitors and controls the risks that would normally be addressed by the approved
Company Management System procedure.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

The final approval authority must determine if the risk is within the Company’s
executive leadership expectations, prior to approval.

The exemption approval process may be carried out via email provided all of the
following are met:
• the email title must clearly distinguish the exemption request,
• the email must contain the required documents for an exemption request,
• each approving authority must include the word “approved” in the body of
their email and define any special parameters for the approval, and
• all documents and forwarded emails must be retained on the installation as
per the exemption process.

NOTE: Authorization may be granted verbally in urgent and exceptional


situations but must be followed up with a formal request and receive approval
within seven days.

All approved Request for Exemption forms must define a set period of validity. The
period of validity must include specific start and stop dates. Approved Request for
Exemption forms are not valid outside of the specific task, operation or work scope
described in the request.

All past and current approved Request for Exemption forms must be retained in a
dedicated file and kept in the OIM’s office.

The Business Unit Vice President is responsible to ensure all approved Request for
Exemption forms related to the Business Unit/Division Management system
procedures are reviewed and assessed by the Business Unit/Division System
Management and Review Team (SMART) member(s) to determine if Management
system changes are required.

The Division QHSE Manager is responsible to ensure all approved exemptions


related to Corporate Management System procedures are posted on the Division
intranet site and readily available to the Corporate Director of QHSE. The Business
Unit/Division QHSE Manager may, at his discretion; forward post approved
Exemption Request forms related to the Business Unit/Division Management
system.

The Corporate Director of QHSE is responsible to ensure the Request for Exemption
forms forwarded by the Division QHSE Manager are reviewed and assessed by the
Corporate System Management and Review Team (SMART) member(s) to
determine if Management System changes are required.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Using the FOCUS tracking software for Exemptions is not required but may be used.
The decision to use the FOCUS tracking software is based on:
• the criticality of a QHSE related situation requiring action,
• managers and supervisors requiring a defined process for review and
approval of planned actions,
• ensuring that specific actions related to an activity are effectively executed,
• ensuring important lessons learned are captured and made available, and
• tracking actions that may require an extended period of time to complete.

The FOCUS tracking software is used with Management of Change to develop


plans, obtain approvals and monitor and track the progress to completion.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Figure B, Exemption Flowchart

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Use START to monitor the plan and recognize when the plan is no longer
suitable.
• Use THINK to formulate and communicate the plan.
• Use FOCUS to develop corrective and improvement opportunity plans.
• Use THINK and START together as the simplest form of Management of
Change for an individual.
• Recognize changes to the plan and interrupt the task (stop the job) to assess
the change and any new risks.
• Understand the Simple Approach available to execute the Management of
Change process.

5.2 OIM/SUPERVISORS:
• Review specific procedures (including Task Specific THINK Procedure), give
approval and submit to Rig Manager for final approval.
• Review and approve Task Risk Assessments and submit to Rig Manager for
final approval.
• Complete and approve Request for Exemption form.
• Ensure the Simple Approach is understood and implemented by all
employees.
• Understand the three approaches (Simple, Enhanced, Exemption) available
to develop plans and manage planned or unexpected change and execute
the Management of Change process.

5.3 RIG MANAGER:


• Review action plan and determine if additional expertise is required and/or
other parties are affected prior to approving.
• Communicate requirements to the appropriate expertise (Engineering,
Technical Field Support, Operations, QHSE, and so forth).
• Ensure completion of supporting documentation.
• Inform the OIM/Supervisor of any changes to the plan.
• Review Request for Exemption form and approve; submit to Division/Sector
Manager for further approval.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

5.4 BUSINESS UNIT DIRECTOR OF OPERATIONS AND PERFORMANCE


MANAGER/DIVISION MANAGER:
• Review Request for Exemption and approve; submit to Business Unit Vice
President for final approval.

5.5 BUSINESS UNIT/DIVISION QHSE MANAGER:


• Ensure that there is a system in place so all approved Request for Exemption
forms that relate to the Corporate Management System procedures are
available to the Corporate Director of QHSE.
• Ensure all approved Request for Exemption forms related to the Business
Unit/Division Management system procedures are reviewed by the
Unit/Division SMART member(s).

5.6 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT (OR HIS DESIGNATE)


• Review and approve Request for Exemption forms.

5.7 CORPORATE DIRECTOR OF QHSE:


• Ensure the Request for Exemption forms related to the Corporate
Management System procedures are reviewed by the Corporate SMART
member(s) to determine if changes are required.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The Request for Exemption form is not to be modified from its original format. This
form must be reproduced and made available to all installations/facilities by their
Division/ Business Unit offices. Forward any suggested improvements to this form
using the QHSE Feedback form.
• Request for Exemption (Figure C)
(Must be retained in the OIM’s files for not less than three years.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Figure C, Request for Exemption

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 2 ........................................ RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION

SUBSECTION 1 MANUAL STRUCTURE


SUBSECTION 2 QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
SUBSECTION 3 HSE MENTORING
SUBSECTION 4 ISM CODE

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
MANUAL STRUCTURE

1 GENERAL

The Transocean Health and Safety Policy and Procedures Manual is a


comprehensive organization of policies, procedures and documentation. It is used in
conjunction with HQS-HSE-PP-02 to make up the Health, Safety and Environmental
(HSE) Management System.

The objective of this system is to prevent incidents and eliminate injuries and
illnesses. The system provides a means by which Company HSE goals are
achieved, the needs of customers are met and the requirements of regulatory bodies
are satisfied, while maintaining the health and safety of our employees and
respecting the condition of our environment.

2 THE HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE MANUAL STRUCTURE

2.1 SECTION 0. PREFACE

This section defines our mission and core values as a Company. It also describes
our corporate management’s commitment to health and safety.

2.2 SECTION 1. GENERAL

This section defines the function and organization of HSE Services, provides an
introduction to the Health and Safety Manual and lists Company employee general
responsibilities regarding health and safety issues.

2.3 SECTION 2. RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION

This section describes the structure or flow of the manual, details of QHSE Steering
Committees, mentoring details and ISM Code requirements.

2.4 SECTION 3. HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION

This section is comprised of three subsections of health-related policies, procedures


and their associated documentation.

2.5 SECTION 4. SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION

This section is comprised of six subsections of safety policies, procedures and their
associated documentation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
MANUAL STRUCTURE

2.6 SECTION 5. ANNEX

This section is a glossary of acronyms, abbreviations and definitions; a list of


documentation contained within the manual and how to file it and an index of
keywords.

2.7 SECTION 6. TABLE OF REVISIONS

This section is a table of revisions with document approval.

3 THE POLICY AND PROCEDURE SECTIONS (3 AND 4) ARE FORMATTED AS


FOLLOWS:

3.1 1. POLICY (THE WHAT)

Policy statements represent Corporate management expectations mandated by


senior management.

For more information, see HQS-CMS-GOV Section 6.

3.2 2. PURPOSE (THE WHY)

This section explains the reason for which the policy exists.

3.3 3. SCOPE (THE WHO)

The scope identifies the persons, groups, installations, facilities, offices and
equipment that the policy is intended to cover.

3.4 4. PROCEDURE (THE HOW)

The procedure section contains the supporting procedures and forms to achieve the
intent of Corporate HSE policies described, unless an exemption has been applied
for and approved and adequate controls have been implemented.

For more information, see HQS-CMS-GOV Section 6.

3.5 5. RESPONSIBILITY

The responsibility section defines specific duties for specific personnel, or groups of
personnel, as they pertain to the related policy.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
MANUAL STRUCTURE

3.6 6. DOCUMENTATION (THE VERIFICATION)

The documentation included in this manual may be forms, checklists, graphics, etc.,
and are either required by the policy or given as examples. This documentation
serves multiple purposes (for example, allows verification of compliance, serves as a
communication tool, becomes a form of record keeping, and so on). Some policies
have text instructions for filling out documentation. All documentation (required or
examples) included in this manual are referred to as “Figures” in the documentation
section.

4 BUSINESS UNIT, DIVISION, SECTOR AND INSTALLATION MANAGEMENT


SYSTEMS (LEVELS 2 AND 3)

All Business Unit, Division or Sector specific requirements approved by the


respective Unit Vice President or, Division or Sector Manager must be maintained in
Level 2A or 2B documents.

All installation specific procedures approved by the Rig Manager are Level 3
documents.

For more information, see HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5.

5 DISCLAIMER

The policies, procedures and documentation stated herein are provided as basic
standards that have been developed in accordance with Company HSE
philosophies. Nothing herein is intended to conflict with any governmental laws or
rules or regulations now in effect or hereinafter enacted; such laws, rules and
regulations always take precedence over these standards.

Where a masculine or neutral pronoun is used in this manual, it includes both males
and females.

Where the term “Company” is used, it refers to Transocean Inc. and its subsidiaries.

These policies and procedures are subject to change by the Company at any time
for any reason. Past policies and procedures and the Company's interpretation of
such shall have no bearing on the Company's current policies and procedures
contained herein. Any deviation from current policies is not tolerated and failure to
comply with such policies may be grounds for disciplinary action. Finally, these
policies and procedures are not intended to, and do not, create an employment
contract between the Company and any employee.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

1 QHSE STEERING COMMITTEE OBJECTIVES

The objective of the Company QHSE Steering Committee is to develop and promote
measures to ensure the health and safety of personnel and protection of the
environment through communication and cooperation between all levels of
management and the work force.

1.1 QHSE COMMITTEE SYSTEM

The Company QHSE Steering Committee System provides a forum by which


personnel can be:
• involved in developing and reviewing HSE performance and revising policies
and procedures,
• involved in developing and setting health, safety and environmental goals and
objectives that contribute to the development of annual HSE plans, and
• informed and knowledgeable of the health, safety and environmental efforts
and activities of the Company.

The system empowers all levels of the organization to be responsible for taking
action to prevent injuries, occupational illnesses, environmental incidents and
property damage to achieve an incident free environment.

1.2 CORPORATE QHSE STEERING COMMITTEE

The Corporate QHSE Steering Committee must meet as required, at a minimum of


two times a year.

1.2.1 SUGGESTED COMPOSITION:


• Chief Executive Officer
• President
• Chief Operating Officer
• Vice President QHSE
• Senior Vice President General Counsel and Corporate Secretary
• Vice President Marketing
• Vice President Human Resources
• Vice President Engineering and Technical Services
• Vice President Performance and Technology
• Director QHSE Services
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

• Manager Quality Services


• A minimum of one offshore personnel
• Any relevant invitees

Note: A minimum of six committee members must be present for a quorum to


exist.

1.2.2 RESPONSIBILITY:
• Provide guidance and assistance to Corporate QHSE Services.
• Review and approve Company QHSE policies and procedures.
• Set and review Company QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Review minutes of Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee
meetings, as appropriate.
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company QHSE policies and
procedures.
• Review minutes of Installation QHSE Steering Committee meetings as
deemed appropriate by Business Unit/Division/Sector Steering Committees.
• Forward minutes of the Corporate QHSE Steering Committee meetings to the
Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee, for review and
distribution to Installation QHSE Steering Committees.
• Review QHSE performance.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review Business Unit audit, assessments, compliance, non-conformity
tracking and close out status.
• Conduct any other business relating to QHSE matters.
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.

1.3 BUSINESS UNIT/DIVISION/SECTOR QHSE STEERING COMMITTEE

Business Unit/Division/Sector Steering Committees must meet as required, at least


twice a year.

1.3.1 SUGGESTED COMPOSITION:


• Unit Vice President or Division/Sector Manager
• Operations Manager
• Rig Managers
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

• HSE Manager – Business Unit/Division/Sector


• Other Business Unit/Division/Sector personnel as designated by Business
Unit Vice President or Division/Sector Manager
• A minimum of two offshore personnel
• Any relevant invitees

Note: A minimum of 50% of the Business Unit/Division/Sector management


must be present for a quorum to exist.

1.3.2 RESPONSIBILITY:
• Provide guidance and assistance to the Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Department.
• Review and approve QHSE policies and procedures.
• Set and review Business Unit/Division/Sector HSE goals to support Corporate
QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Forward minutes of the Business Unit/Division QHSE Steering Committee
meeting to the Corporate QHSE Steering Committee for review.
• Review minutes of Corporate QHSE Steering Committee meetings.
• Review minutes of installation QHSE Steering Committee as appropriate.
• Review Unit/Division/Sector QHSE performance. For example, audit reports,
incidents and client feedback.
• Review status of audit follow up/close out of non-conformities for all
installations within that Division.
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company HSE policies and
procedures.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.

1.4 INSTALLATION QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

Installation QHSE Steering Committees must meet as required to allow each crew
the opportunity to attend a minimum of two meetings per year.

1.4.1 SUGGESTED COMPOSITION:


• OIM/Master
• Department Heads
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

• Rig Safety Training Coordinator (where applicable)


• Safety Representative as designated by the OIM/Master
• A minimum of two non-supervisory personnel
• Any relevant invitees

Note: A minimum of one representative from each department on the


installation must be present at the QHSE Steering Committee meeting.

1.4.2 RESPONSIBILITY:
• Review Company QHSE policies and procedures.
• Set and review installation QHSE goals to support the Corporate and
Unit/Division/Sector QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Ensure installation QHSE goals address both incident rates and proactive
measures such as housekeeping, THINK, START and FOCUS processes,
safety meetings, and so on.
• Review minutes of Corporate and Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Steering Committee meetings.
• Forward minutes of the Installation QHSE Steering Committee meeting to the
Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee for review.
• Review and discuss QHSE improvement opportunities for the installation,
Business Unit/Division/Sector and Company.
• Post minutes of the Corporate and Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Steering Committee meetings in an appropriate area suitable for review by all
personnel.
• Review QHSE performance.
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company QHSE polices and
procedures.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.
• Review status of installation’s audit follow up/close out of non-conformities.

1.5 FACILITY QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

Facility QHSE Steering Committees must meet as required, at least twice a year.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

1.5.1 SUGGESTED COMPOSITION:


• Facility Manager
• Fire Wardens
• Department Heads
• Facility personnel as appropriate
• A minimum of two non-supervisory personnel
• Any relevant invitees

Note: A minimum of one representative from each department at the facility


must be present at the QHSE Steering Committee meeting.

Responsibilities:
• Review QHSE Company policies and procedures.
• Set and review facility QHSE goals to support the Corporate and Business
Unit/Division/Sector QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Ensure facility QHSE goals and annual HSE plans address both incident
rates and proactive measures such as: housekeeping, THINK, START and
FOCUS processes, HSE meetings, and so on.
• Review minutes of Corporate and Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Steering Committee meetings.
• Forward minutes of the facility QHSE Steering Committee meeting to the
Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee for review.
• Review and discuss QHSE improvement opportunities for the facility,
Unit/Division/Sector and Company.
• Post minutes of the Corporate and Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering
Committee meetings in an appropriate area suitable for review by all
personnel.
• Review QHSE performance.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company QHSE polices and
procedures.
• Review status of facility’s audit follow up/close out of non-conformities.
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

2 DOCUMENTATION

The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Unit Vice President.
• QHSE Steering Committee Agenda (Figure A)
• QHSE Steering Committee Meeting Minutes (Figure B)
1. Copies of the Corporate QHSE Steering Committee agenda and minutes
must be retained in the Corporate office files for a period of two years, and
distributed to each Business Unit for review.
2. Copies of the Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee
agenda and minutes must be retained in the Business Unit/Division office
files for a period of two years, and distributed to the Corporate office and
each installation for review.
3. Copies of the Installation QHSE Steering Committee agenda and minutes
must be retained in the installation files for a period of two years, and
distributed to the Business Unit/Division office for review.
4. Copies of the Facility QHSE Steering Committee agenda and minutes
must be retained in the facility files for a period of two years, and
distributed to the Business Unit/Division/Sector office for review.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

Figure A, QHSE Steering Committee Agenda

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

Figure B (Page 1), QHSE Steering Committee Meeting Minutes

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES

Figure B (Page 2), QHSE Steering Committee Meeting Minutes

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
HSE MENTORING

1 RECOGNITION AND APPRECIATION

The Company clearly recognizes the benefits associated with providing a working
environment in which people, at all levels of the Company, feel "connected" to the
Company and are given the opportunity to develop to their full potential. The FIRST
core values of the Company are an integral part of our daily lives. Improving human
behavior in all areas of our operation is fundamental to the success of individuals,
groups of individuals and the Company as a whole. One of the key elements in the
successful development of people is a network of mentors, within which people are
offered constructive feedback, advice, guidance and suggestions towards personal
and career development. People are respected and rewarded for helping each other
succeed.

2 WHAT IS A MENTOR?

The dictionary defines mentor as "a friend entrusted with education; a trusted
counselor, coach or guide." In modern terms, a mentor is someone who is a friend
and a role model; an able advisor; a person who lends his support in many different
ways to one pursuing specific goals.

3 WHO IS A MENTOR?

Many people have the potential to be a mentor, and may emerge from any level
within the organization. Generally speaking, supervisors should be the most
appropriate people to act as role models and mentors, simply because they have
more experience of life and work to communicate with less experienced people. In
very broad terms, a mentor is someone who has the positive personal attributes,
valuable knowledge, and the experience in their personal and working lives, which
can only be gained over a period of time. A great number of people are already
mentoring as individuals, husbands, wives, parents, friends, sports team members
and co-workers.

Mentors can be many things to many people; however, they all have similar clearly
recognizable characteristics:
• They often do not realize they are seen as mentors; they are "naturals."
• They enjoy mentoring and provide an atmosphere for learning.
• They don’t hesitate to ask other team members for advice or help when
needed, focusing on what is right, not who is right.
• They make a conscious effort to develop a sense of responsibility and
accountability within the team.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
HSE MENTORING

• They consider the other person's point of view, treat people as they need to
be treated and come to agreements.
• They keep their mentees informed.
• They naturally strive to develop and motivate people.

4 WHY DO WE NEED MENTORS?

It is vital that we as a Company seek and take every opportunity to develop and
motivate people within the organization. People with valuable personal qualities and
talent are in positions around the world, and we understand the value of
communicating their life and work experiences to those less experienced. Our intent
is to provide a forum and structure so people are continually encouraged, motivated
and developed.

5 WHEN DOES MENTORING TAKE PLACE?

There is no set time or place for mentoring to take place. The important thing is that
it is provided regularly, and that it is honest and understood. Remember that
feedback, both supportive and constructive, is best given as soon as possible after
the event requiring it and is best given face to face and one-on-one, but does not
have to be. People can be mentored with a look, a letter, a gift, a conversation or
phone call. The mentor knows what is appropriate.

6 HOW CAN MENTORING BE ESTABLISHED AND EFFECTIVE?

Some mentors are "naturals" in the art of mentoring and others need some advice
and guidance to improve their mentoring skills.

It must be important to establish a relationship between the people involved,


discover each other's colors and understand the characteristics of each color. A
huge motivating factor in any relationship is giving recognition. Make sure people
know their contribution is important to the team's overall success. The recognition
must be genuine; deserved encouragement brings out the best in people. Although a
close mentoring relationship needs to develop, there needs to be just enough
distance so that the mentor remains objective.

When trying to help each other, both people in the relationship must know if the
other has any concerns or worries. Ask broad, open-ended questions that give
people the latitude and permission to speak honestly and without risk. Do not pry;
you are a mentor not an inquisitor. Remember that when you ask a question it is vital
to listen to the answer. Be responsive to people's fears and concerns.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
HSE MENTORING

Communication is the glue that holds all relationships together and communication
must always be open and honest. A mentor should never apologize for providing
corrective feedback.

Mentors know that setbacks sometimes occur at work. Finding solutions for
problems is one of the strengths of a mentor. When searching for solutions, the
mentor always looks beyond personal interest to the "Big Picture."

Above all, mentors should understand that personal and team success is not a
single event but a continuous ongoing process. Mentors must find ways to stay
motivated towards success in endeavors.

As with many things, ACTION makes the difference, and the following steps are the
required actions for an effective mentoring network:

• In its simplest form, mentoring is a "buddy" system providing someone new to


a place of work or in a new position, with a "buddy". The buddy must be an
experienced co-worker and show what is expected, what to do and what not
to do, and provide experienced information and guidance. Remember that
very inexperienced people often do not even know the right questions to ask.
• Once established in a place of work or in a position, a person can be
reasonably expected to have learned the "basics" and mentors can then plan
long-term objectives. This is required to allow people to more fully develop
and start teaching the philosophy of the Company. As previously stated, there
is no standard format to follow, mentoring begins with communication.
• The long-term goal of mentoring is for the original mentor to phase out,
allowing the person being mentored to become a mentor, which is a natural
progression of success. In the early stages of the mentoring process, the
mentor takes the lead - teaching, coaching and explaining. The person being
mentored seeks to profit from the knowledge and skills exemplified by the
mentor's achievements. A gradual transition takes place where the person
being mentored becomes someone else's mentor. This needs to be carefully
transitioned though, and the original mentor should regularly check in with the
person being mentored so they do not feel deserted.

Treat people as THEY NEED to be treated.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

1 ISM CODE

The purpose of the ISM Code is to provide an international standard for the safe
management and operation of ships and to prevent pollution.

The table below lists the 16 elements of the ISM Code and references to where
Transocean Inc. has addressed these elements.

ELEMENT CODE STATEMENT


1. General
1.1 Definitions
International Safety Management (ISM) Code - The international
Management Code for the Safe Operation of Ships and for Pollution
1.1.1
Prevention as adopted by the Assembly, as may be amended by the
Organization.
Company - The owner of the ship or any other organization or person
such as the manager, or the bareboat charterer, who has assumed the
1.1.2 responsibility for operation of the ship from the ship-owner and who, on
assuming such responsibility, has agreed to take over all duties and
responsibility imposed by the Code.
Administration - The Government of the State whose flag the ship is
1.1.3
entitled to fly.
1.1.4 Safety Management System - A structured and documented system
enabling Company personnel to implement effectively the Company
safety and environmental protection policy.
1.1.5 Document of Compliance - A document issued to a Company which
complies with the requirements of this Code.
1.1.6 Safety Management Certificate - A document issued to a ship which
signifies that the Company and its shipboard management operate in
accordance with the approved safety management system.
1.1.7 Objective Evidence – Quantitative or qualitative information, records or
statements of fact pertaining to safety or to the existence and
implementation of a safety management system element, which is based
on observation, measurement or test and which can be verified.
1.1.8 Observation - A statement of fact made during a safety management audit
and substantiated by objective evidence.
1.1.9 Non-conformity - An observed situation where objective evidence
indicates the non-fulfillment of a specified requirement.
1.1.10 Major non-conformity - Identifiable deviation that poses a serious threat to
the safety of personnel or the ship or a serious risk to the environment
that requires immediate corrective action and includes the lack of effective
and systematic implementation of a requirement of this Code.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

1.1.11 Anniversary date - The day and month of each year that corresponds to
the date of expiry of the relevant document or certificate.
1.1.12 Convention - The International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea,
1974, as amended.
1.2 Objectives
The Objectives of the Code are to ensure safety at sea, prevention of
1.2.1 human injury or loss of life and avoidance of damage to the environment,
in particular to the marine environment and to property.
Safety management objectives of the Company should, inter alia:
1. provide for safe practices in ship operation and a safe working
environment;
1.2.2 2. establish safeguards against all identified risks; and
3. continuously improve safety management skills of personnel ashore
and aboard ships, including preparing for emergencies related both to
safety and environmental protection.
The safety and management system should ensure:
1. compliance with mandatory rules and regulations; and
1.2.3 2. that applicable codes, guidelines and standards recommended by the
Organization, Administrations classification societies and maritime
industry organizations are taken into account.
1.3 Application
The requirements of this Code may be applied to all ships.

1.4 Functional requirements for a Safety Management System (SMS)


Every Company should develop, implement and maintain a safety
management system (SMS) which includes the following functional
requirements:
1. a safety and environmental protection policy;
2. instructions and procedures to ensure safe operation of ships and
protection of the environment in compliance with relevant international
and flag state legislation;
3. defined levels of authority and lines of communication between, and
amongst, shore and shipboard personnel;
4. procedures for reporting accidents and non-conformities with the
provisions of this Code;
5. procedures to prepare for and respond to emergency situations; and
6. procedures for internal audits and management reviews.
Reference 1 HQS-CMS-GOV Section 2, Subsection 2.
HQS-HSE-PP02 Section 2, Subsection 1.
2 HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 2
3 HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1, Subsection 3, HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2,
Subsection 1.3
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

Organizational charts on company intranet site, Rig Central Directory


4 HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 6.3, HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section
2, Subsection 2.
5 HQS-HSE-PR-01, HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 3.2.
6 HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5 Subsection 6.
2. Safety and Environmental Protection
The Company should establish a safety and environmental protection
2.1 policy which describes how the objectives, given in paragraph 1.2 will be
achieved.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 2, Subsection 2 & 3.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01, introduction.
HQS-HSE-PP-02. Section 2, Subsection 1
The Company should ensure that the policy is implemented and
2.2 maintained at all levels of the organization, both ship-based as well as
shore-based.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 1, Subsection 2.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1, Subsection 3
HQS-CMS-PR-02
3. Company Responsibility and Authority
If the entity that is responsible for the operation of the ship is other than
3.1 the owner, the owner must report the full name and details of such entity
to the Administration.
Reference:
The Company should define and document the responsibility, authority
3.2 and interrelation of all personnel who manage, perform and verify work
relating to and affecting safety and pollution prevention.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 1 Subsection 3
HQS-HSE-PP-01, Section 1, Subsection 3
Reference:
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3
Organizational charts on Company intranet and Rig Central Directory
The Company is responsible for ensuring that adequate resources and
3.3 shore-based support are provided to enable the designated person or
persons to carry out their functions.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1, Subsection 3.
Reference:
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 3, Subsection 3.

4. Designated Person(s)
To ensure the safe operation of each ship and to provide a link between
the Company and those on board, every company, as appropriate, should
designate a person or persons ashore having direct access to the highest
level of management. The responsibility and authority of the designated
person or persons should include monitoring the safety and pollution
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

prevention aspects of the operation of each ship and to ensure that the
adequate resources and shore-based support are applied, as required.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1 Subsection 2 and 3
5. Master's Responsibility and Authority
The Company should clearly define and document the master's
responsibility with regard to:
1. implementing the safety and environmental protection policy of the
Company;
2. motivating the crew in the observation of that policy;
5.1
3. issuing appropriate orders and instructions in a clear and simple
manner;
4. verifying that specified requirements are observed;
5. reviewing the SMS and reporting its deficiencies to shore-based
management.
1. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1 Subsection 3, HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 3,
Subsection 1.8,HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3
2. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 4.2
3. HQS-CMS-GOV Section 3, Subsection 1,HQS-0PS-PP-01 Section 3
Reference:
Subsection 2.1
4. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1 Subsection 3, Section 4, Subsection 5.1
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3
5. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 2
The Company should ensure that the SMS operating onboard the ship
contains a clear statement emphasizing the master's authority. The
Company should establish in the SMS that the master has the overriding
5.2
authority and the responsibility to make decisions with respect to safety
and pollution prevention and to request the Company's assistance as may
be necessary.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 3, Subsection 1.8
Reference: HQS-OPS-HB-05 Section 3, Subsection 2.6, Appendix, 4
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3, Masters’ Job Description
6. Resources and Personnel
The Company should ensure that the master is:
1. properly qualified for command;
6.1 2. fully conversant with the Company's SMS;
3. given the necessary support so that the master's duties can be safely
performed.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 1.3
Reference: HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3 Masters’ Job Description
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 6, Subsection 1 & 4.
The Company should ensure that each ship is manned with qualified,
6.2
certified and medically fit seafarers in accordance with national and
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

international requirements.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 3 Subsection 1.1
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.4
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 6, Subsection 4
HQS-OPS-HB-03 Section 1, Subsection 1.
The Company should establish procedures to ensure that new personnel
and personnel transferred to new assignments related to safety and
6.3 protection of the environment are given proper familiarization with their
duties. Instructions that are essential prior to sailing should be identified,
documented and issued.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 3, Section 4 Subsection 1.1
Reference:
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Job Descriptions
The Company should ensure that all personnel involved in the Company
6.4 SMS have adequate understanding of relevant rules, regulations, codes
and guidelines.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 3, Section 4 Subsection 1.1
The Company should establish and maintain procedures for identifying
6.5 any training that may be required in support of the SMS, and ensure that
such training is provided for all personnel concerned.
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 6 Subsection 1 & 5
Reference:
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 1.3
The Company should establish procedures by which the ship's personnel
6.6 receive relevant information on the SMS in a working language or
languages understood by them.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 4.1
Reference:
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 3, Subsection 8
The Company should ensure that the ship's personnel are able to
6.7 communicate effectively in the execution of their duties, related to the
SMS.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 2
Reference:
HQS-HRM PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 4.1
7. Development of Plans for Shipboard Operations
The Company should establish procedures for the preparation of plans
and instructions including checklists for key shipboard operations
concerning the safety of the ship and the prevention of pollution. The
various tasks involved should be defined and assigned to qualified
personnel.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 2.1
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 4, Subsection 1
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 3, Subsection 2, Section 5, Subsection 2
8. Emergency Preparedness
8.1 The Company should establish procedures to identify describe and
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

respond to potential emergency shipboard situations.


HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 3.2
HQS-HSE-PR-01
Reference:
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 3, Subsection 2, Section 4, Subsection 6.
Onboard Emergency Response Manual
The Company should establish programs for drills and exercises to
8.2
prepare for emergency actions.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 3.2
Reference: HQS-HSE-PR-01
HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 4, Subsection 6.
The safety management system should provide for measures ensuring
8.3 that the Company organization can respond at any time to hazards,
accidents and emergency situations involving its ships.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 3.2
Reference: HQS-HSE-PR-01
HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 4, Subsection 6.
Reports & Analysis of Non-Conformities, Accidents & Hazardous
9.
Occurrences
The SMS should include procedures ensuring that non-conformities,
accidents and hazardous situations are reported to the Company, and
9.1
investigated and analyzed with the objective of improving safety and
pollution prevention.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 6.2 and 6.3
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 4.
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 3.
HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 5, Subsection 1
Procedures should be established for the implementation of corrective
9.2
action.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 6.2
Reference: HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 4
HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 3, Subsection 3 & 4.
10. Maintenance of the Ship and Equipment
The Company should establish procedures to ensure that the ship is
maintained in conformity with the provisions of the relevant rules and
10.1
regulations and with any additional requirements that may be established
by the Company.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1, Section 4, Subsection 1
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PR-01 Section 2, Subsection 2 .
In meeting these requirements the Company should ensure that:
1. inspections are held at appropriate intervals;
10.2
2. any non-conformity is reported with its possible cause, if known;
3. appropriate corrective action is taken; and records of these activities
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

are maintained.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 1, Section 2, Subsection 3.
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PR-01 Section 2, Subsection 2, Section 2, Subsection 5.
The Company should establish procedures in the SMS to identify
equipment and technical systems, the sudden operational failure of which
may result in hazardous situations. The SMS should provide for specific
10.3 measures aimed at promoting the reliability of such equipment or
systems. These measures should include the regular testing of stand-by
arrangements and equipment or technical systems that are not in
continuous use.
HQS-OPS-PR-01 Section 3, Subsection 8.
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 2.
The inspections mentioned in 10.2 as well as the measures referred to in
10.4
10.3 should be integrated into the ship's operational maintenance routine.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 1.
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PR-01 Section 2, Subsection 2.
11. Documentation
The Company should establish and maintain procedures to control all
11.1
documents and data that are relevant to the SMS.
Reference: HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 2 & 3.
The Company should ensure that:
1. valid documents are available at all relevant locations;
11.2
2. changes to documents are reviewed and approved by authorized
personnel; and obsolete documents are promptly removed.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1
Reference: HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 1, 2 & 3.
HQS-OPS-HB-03 Section 1, Subsection 2.
The documents used to describe and implement the SMS may be referred
to as the Safety Management Manual. Documentation should be kept in a
11.3
format that the Company considers most effective. Each ship should carry
onboard all documentation relevant to that ship.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 2 & 3.
Reference: HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.
E-docs
12. Company Verification, Review and Evaluation
The Company should carry out internal audits to verify whether safety and
12.1
pollution prevention activities comply with the SMS.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 6.
Reference: HQS-CMS-PR-02
HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 5, Subsection 1
The Company should periodically evaluate the efficiency of and review
12.2
the safety management system in accordance with procedures
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

established by the Company.


HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsections 1 & 6.
Reference: HQS-CMS-PR-02
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 2.
The audits and possible corrective actions should be carried out in
12.3
accordance with documented procedures.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 2, Section 4, Subsection 6.2.
Reference: HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 4, Section 5, Subsection 6.
HQS-CMS-PR-02
Personnel carrying out audits should be independent of the areas being
12.4 audited unless this is impracticable due to the size and the nature of the
Company.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 6
Reference:
HQS-CMS-PR-02
The results of the audits and reviews should be brought to the attention of
12.5
all personnel having responsibility in the area involved.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 2, Section 4, Subsection 6.2
The management personnel responsible for the area involved should take
12.6
timely corrective action on deficiencies found.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 2, Section 4, Subsection 6.2.
Reference:
HQS-CMS-PR-02
13. Certification, Verification and Control
The ship should be operated by a Company that is issued a document of
13.1
compliance relevant to that ship.
A document of compliance should be issued for every Company
complying with the requirements of the ISM Code by the Administration,
by an organization recognized by the Administration or by the
13.2 Government of the country, at the request of the Administration, in which
the Company has chosen to conduct its business. This document should
be accepted as evidence that the Company is capable of complying with
the requirements of the Code.
A copy of such a document should be placed onboard in order that the
13.3 master, if so asked, may produce it for the verification of the
Administration or organizations recognized by it.
A Safety Management Certificate should be issued to a ship by the
administration or organization recognized by the Administration. The
13.4 Administration should, when issuing a certificate, verify that the Company
and its shipboard management operate in accordance with the approved
SMS.
The Administration or an organization recognized by the Administration
13.5 should periodically verify the proper functioning of the ship's SMS as
approved.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

A copy of the Document of Compliance should be placed on board in


order that the master of the ship, if so requested, may produce it for
verification by the Administration or by an organization recognized by the
13.6
Administration or for the purposes of the control referred to in regulation
IX/6.2 of the Convention. The copy of the Document is not required to be
authenticated or certified.
The Safety Management Certificate should be issued to a ship for a
period which should not exceed five years by the Administration or an
organization recognized by the Administration or, at the request of the
Administration, by another Contracting Government. The Safety
13.7 Management Certificate should be issued after verifying that the
Company and its shipboard management operate in accordance with the
approved safety management system. Such a Certificate should be
accepted as evidence that the ship is complying with the requirements of
this Code.
The validity of the Safety Management Certificate should be subject to at
least one intermediate verification by the Administration or an organization
recognized by the Administration or, at the request of the Administration,
13.8 by another Contracting Government. If only one intermediate verification
is to be carried out and the period of validity of the Safety Management
Certificate is five years, it should take place between the second and third
anniversary dates of the Safety Management Certificate.
In addition to the requirements of paragraph 13.5.1, the Safety
Management Certificate should be withdrawn by the Administration or, at
the request of the Administration, by the Contracting Government which
13.9
has issued it when the intermediate verification required in paragraph 13.8
is not requested or if there is evidence of major non-conformity with this
Code.
Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraphs 13.2 and 13.7, when the
renewal verification is completed within three months before the expiry
date of the existing Document of Compliance or Safety Management
Certificate, the new Document of Compliance or the new Safety
13.10
Management Certificate should be valid from the date of completion of the
renewal verification for a period not exceeding five years from the date of
expiry of the existing Document of Compliance or Safety Management
Certificate.
When the renewal verification is completed more than three months
before the expiry date of the existing Document of Compliance or Safety
Management Certificate, the new Document of Compliance or the new
13.11
Safety Management Certificate should be valid from the date of
completion of the renewal verification for a period not exceeding five
years from the date of completion of the renewal verification.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

14. Interim Certification


An Interim Document of Compliance may be issued to facilitate initial
implementation of this Code when:
1. a Company is newly established; or
2. new ship types are to be added to an existing Document of
Compliance, following verification that the Company has a safety
management system that meets the objectives of paragraph 1.2.3 of this
Code, provided the Company demonstrates plans to implement a safety
management system meeting the full requirements of this Code within the
period of validity of the Interim Document of Compliance. Such an Interim
14.1
Document of Compliance should be issued for a period not exceeding 12
months by the Administration or by an organization recognized by the
Administration or, at the request of the Administration, by another
Contracting Government. A copy of the Interim Document of Compliance
should be placed on board in order that the master of the ship, if so
requested, may produce it for verification by the Administration or by an
organization recognized by the Administration or for the purposes of the
control referred to in regulation IX/6.2 of the Convention. The copy of the
Document is not required to be authenticated or certified.
An Interim Safety Management Certificate may be issued:
1. to new ships on delivery;
2. when a Company takes on responsibility for the operation of a ship
which is new to the Company; or
14.2 3. when a ship changes flag.
Such an Interim Safety Management Certificate should be issued for a
period not exceeding 6 months by the Administration or an organization
recognized by the Administration or, at the request of the Administration,
by another Contracting Government.
An Administration or, at the request of the Administration, another
Contracting Government may, in special cases, extend the validity of an
14.3
Interim Safety Management Certificate for a further period which should
not exceed 6 months from the date of expiry.
An Interim Safety Management Certificate may be issued following
verification that:
1. the Document of Compliance, or the Interim Document of Compliance,
is relevant to the ship concerned;
2. the safety management system provided by the Company for the ship
14.4 concerned includes key elements of this Code and has been assessed
during the audit for issuance of the Document of Compliance or
demonstrated for issuance of the Interim Document of Compliance;
3. the Company has planned the audit of the ship within three months;
4. the master and officers are familiar with the safety management
system and the planned arrangements for its implementation;
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE

5. instructions, which have been identified as being essential, are


provided prior to sailing; and
6. relevant information on the safety management system has been given
in a working language or languages understood by the ship's
personnel.
15. Verification
All verifications required by the provisions of this Code should be carried
15.1 out in accordance with procedures acceptable to the Administration,
taking into account the guidelines developed by the Organization.
16. Forms of Certificates
The Document of Compliance, the Safety Management Certificate, the
Interim Document of Compliance and the Interim Safety Management
Certificate should be drawn up in a form corresponding to the models
16.1
given in the appendix to this Code. If the language used is neither English
nor French, the text should include a translation into one of these
languages.
In addition to the requirements of paragraph 13.3, the ship types indicated
on the Document of Compliance and the Interim Document of Compliance
16.2
may be endorsed to reflect any limitations in the operations of the ships
described in the safety management system.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 3 ........................HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION

SUBSECTION 1 RISK MANAGEMENT


1 MEDICAL PREPAREDNESS OF OVERSEAS
ASSIGNMENT
2 PATHOGENS

SUBSECTION 2 IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING


1 INSTALLATION CLINICS, MEDICAL
DOCUMENTATION AND WORLDWIDE ONSHORE
CARE
2 POTABLE WATER

SUBSECTION 3 EVALUATING AND IMPROVING


1 SANITATION, HYGIENE AND SMOKING
LIMITATIONS

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Medical Preparedness of Overseas Assignment

1 POLICY

The Company must make available to employees information regarding known


health hazards and recommended precautions prior to their commencing an
overseas visit or assignment.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to:


• Minimize the risk of exposure to health hazards associated with countries
identified as medium-risk and high-risk.
• Reduce the risk, through use of available vaccines, of Company employees
and their dependents contracting diseases associated with the country of
intended visit or posting.
• Reduce the risk of Company employees and their dependents contracting
malaria, using preventive measures, and identify the symptoms in the event
of exposure.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company employees and their accompanying dependents.

4 PROCEDURE

The receiving Unit management is responsible for ensuring implementation.

Personnel must be briefed on potential health hazards, advised of and encouraged


to receive the required immunizations, and informed of the necessary precautions
against malaria in endemic areas.

4.1 MEDICAL BRIEFING

Certain countries pose a higher medical risk to personnel, beyond the Company's
control. A listing of specific higher risk countries can be accessed on the Corporate
QHSE website.

The Corporate Medical Advisor is responsible for the content of the Overseas
Medical Briefing.

Prior to traveling, the Overseas Medical Briefing must be provided to personnel


visiting or assigned to specific higher risk countries. If personnel are installation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Medical Preparedness of Overseas Assignment

based, this briefing must be recorded in their installation Personal Medical Record
upon arrival.

Personnel with known, serious, existing health conditions, which may be difficult to
adequately treat in local medical facilities, must be pre-screened and their
assignment re-assessed.

4.2 IMMUNIZATION

Prior to traveling, personnel must be made aware of the required and recommended
immunizations for the area to which they are assigned. A list of required and
recommended immunizations can be found on the Corporate QHSE website and the
Med-Track website at www.internationalsos.com/medtrack. (Employees should use
their Company employee number as the member number required at login.)

Consideration must be given to administer immunizations during the following


medical opportunities:
• Pre-employment medical examination
• Periodic medical examinations
• Special arrangement

All Company personnel present on a Company installation outside their home


country for more than 24 hours must be in possession of their international certificate
of vaccination.

The installation Personal Medical Record must be marked to indicate the


immunization status.

4.3 MALARIA AWARENESS

The Corporate Medical Advisor is responsible for the content of the Malaria Briefing.

The briefing must include both preventive measures and information on procedures
to follow if symptoms develop after returning from a malaria-endemic area.

Division management must ensure that personnel who have been assigned to a
malaria-endemic area are provided with the Malaria Briefing before traveling. If
personnel are installation based, receipt of this briefing must be recorded in their
installation Personal Medical Record upon arrival.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Medical Preparedness of Overseas Assignment

The procedure for malaria prevention and prevention medications is available to


employees at installations, facilities and offices. See HQS-HSE-PR-02 (Medical
Protocols). Personnel are encouraged to use malaria preventive medications.

The Malaria Briefing is available on the Corporate QHSE website; the Medical
Protocols contain the specific procedures related to malaria.

4.4 MEDTRACK

Internationally assigned and employees who travel internationally for business must
follow the periodic Medtrack medical examination program.
• A Company authorized physician must conduct all Medtrack examinations.
• On completion of the medical examination, the authorized physician must
issue a temporary certificate indicating the employee's fitness to work.
• The Medtrack Medical Director will liaise as necessary with the Corporate
Medical Advisor to make final determination on employee fitness to work. The
final fitness certificate will be available on the Medtrack website after
approximately 15 working days.
• All Company employees present on a Company installation or facility outside
of their home country for more than 24 hours must be in possession of a
fitness certificate indicating the employee is fit for work.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL COMPANY PERSONNEL:


• Must comply with the requirements of the Medtrack Program if traveling
internationally for business, or
• If present on a Company installation or facility outside their home country for
more than 24 hours must be in possession of their international certificate of
vaccination and fitness certificate.
• Mark their installation Personal Medical Record to indicate their immunization
status.
• Make a proactive effort to be aware of recommended/required immunizations
and medical briefing for the area(s) they are about to visit.

5.2 RIG MANAGER:


• Ensure employees are in compliance with the requirements of the Medtrack
Program.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Medical Preparedness of Overseas Assignment

5.3 BUSINESS UNIT HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGER:


• Ensure Company approved Medtrack providers are available to employees
within their Unit.

5.4 RECEIVING BUSINESS UNIT MANAGEMENT:


• Ensure implementation of this procedure.
• Ensure the Malaria Briefing, immunizations and medical briefing are available
for personnel to review prior to traveling. Receipt of these must be confirmed
upon arrival.
• Ensure the Malaria Briefing, immunizations and medical briefing are provided
to assigned personnel prior to traveling.
• For installation based personnel, ensure the Malaria Briefing is noted in their
installation Personal Medical Record.
• Ensure personnel are made aware of required immunizations for that area.
• Ensure personnel transferred internationally into their Unit are compliant with
the requirements of Medtrack.
• Receive confirmation that international employees within their Unit are fit to
work in the area assigned. Confirmation must be received prior to the
employee arriving in the Unit for assignment.

5.5 CORPORATE MEDICAL ADVISOR:


• Maintain the content of the Overseas Medical and Malaria Briefings.
• Oversee the Medtrack Program to ensure required information is forwarded to
Business Unit management.

6 DOCUMENTATION

Country-specific Medical Briefing information, immunization requirements and the


Malaria Briefing are available on the Corporate QHSE website.

See HQS-HSE-PR-02 (Medical Protocols)


See HQS-HRM-HB-03 & 04 (Employee Handbooks)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens

1 POLICY

All Company personnel, whose duties include providing medical attention or


maintaining systems where pathogens may be present, must be made aware
of the potential for bloodborne and body fluid pathogen exposure and the
universal precautions that should be followed.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to effectively control exposure to pathogens in the work
place.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all installations and facilities.

This policy also covers relevant Company-subcontracted personnel.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 PATHOGENS

As a result of providing medical assistance, carrying out maintenance on sanitary


systems, emergency response, and so on, personnel may become exposed to blood
or other body fluids.

Pathogens can be transferred by contact with blood or other bodily fluids. These
fluids include:
• Semen
• Vaginal fluid
• Cerebrospinal fluid
• Synovial fluid
• Amniotic fluid
• Saliva

While intact skin offers some protection against blood and other bodily fluid
transmission of pathogens, transmission may take place via accidental injection with
needles, scalpels, shards of glass and other sharp objects. Pathogen transmission
may also take place through open cuts, nicks and skin abrasions. There is also

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens

evidence that transmission can take place by infected splashes to the eyes and
mucous membranes.

4.2 TRAINING

Persons with certain job responsibilities, whose duties may bring them into contact
with blood or bodily fluids, are deemed to have a potential for occupational exposure
to pathogens.

All personnel deemed to have a potential for occupational exposure to pathogens


must receive bloodborne pathogen awareness training. (See HQS-HSE-PP-01,
Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

The above training must be fully documented and available for review.

Each installation and facility must maintain a list of those personnel with a potential
for occupational exposure to pathogens. These include but are not limited to:
• Installation Medical Person
• First aid providers
• Fire and rescue teams
• Maintenance staff (maintenance on Sanitary Systems)
• Catering staff

4.3 PATHOGEN PROTECTION KITS

When there is risk of occupational pathogen exposure, personal protective


equipment must be donned before first aid treatment is provided.

Pathogen protection kits must be readily available for use by first-aid providers and
others that may assist.

The kits must include:


• Disposable rubber gloves
• Disposable face cover
• Eye protection
• Disposable barrier for use in artificial respiration
• Disinfectant

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens

4.4 INSTALLATION CLINIC/TREATMENT ROOM

The following personal protective equipment must be available at the installation


clinic and donned before any treatment is administered when pathogen exposure is
probable.
• Personal protection gown (fluid impervious)
• Disposable rubber gloves
• Disposable face mask
• Goggles
• Disposable Bag Valve Mask

All used or exposed “sharps,” including but not limited to needles, scalpels, glass,
and so on, must be disposed of in a leak-proof, puncture-resistant container.

Whenever possible, single-use medical equipment (for example, suture kits) must be
used.

Depending on the availability of equipment and facilities, blood or other body-fluid


soiled linen must be treated in one of the following ways:
• Place in a double-layered plastic bag or purpose-made biohazard bag, label
correctly and send ashore for cleaning or disposal.
• Launder using the autoclave sterilization process or wash separately with
10% chlorine solution, either of which must be supervised by the person with
medical responsibility.
• Properly dispose of via burning or chemical destruction.

NOTE: All contaminated disposable items must be properly disposed of in a


similar way to soiled linen.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 REQUIRED PERSONNEL (MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL, EMERGENCY


RESPONSE TEAM, CATERING STAFF):
• Be aware of the potential for bloodborne and body fluid pathogen exposure
and the universal precautions that should be followed.
• Don appropriate personal protection equipment before offering or assisting in
first aid treatment.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens

5.2 OIM:
• Ensure pathogen awareness training is available and documented for
required personnel.
• Identify personnel deemed to have a potential for occupational exposure to
pathogens and ensure a list of those personnel is maintained.
• Ensure pathogen protection kits and necessary personal protection
equipment are available for use by personnel.

5.3 INSTALLATION MEDICAL PERSON:


• Ensure the clinic/treatment room and pathogen protection kits contain the
required personal protection equipment.
• Ensure contaminated disposable items and blood or other bodily fluid soiled
linen is properly disposed of.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as it is included, the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Statement of Understanding (Pathogens) (Figure A)
(Completed form to Division office and a copy in the individual’s personnel file
for duration of assignment)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens

Figure A, Statement of Understanding (Pathogens)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

1 POLICY

All installations must maintain a dedicated clinic, adequately equipped and


staffed by a qualified Medical Person to effectively attend to all trauma and
medical cases.

Systems must be in place whereby both personal medical information and


information surrounding all treatment provided is accurately recorded,
maintained and confidential.

Company authorized physicians and onshore clinics must be contracted for


topside support in each Unit of operation.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure:


• A qualified Medical Person, with suitable equipment, in appropriate
surroundings, effectively attends to all trauma and medical cases.
• Adequate and relevant information is readily available when medical attention
has been provided or is required.
• All trauma and medical incidents receive the appropriate medical attention
and follow up once initial treatment has been provided on board the
installation or at a facility. Verification will take place by Medical Audits.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel and installations and all Units, Divisions,
Sectors and Branches.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 INSTALLATION TRANSIT AND RE-LOCATION

Prior to an installation commencing a major change in geographical location or


initiating an ocean going voyage:
• The Corporate Medical Advisor must be consulted to determine the necessity
for additional medical equipment or personnel.
• The receiving Division/Sector QHSE Manager must ensure that a valid
Medical Emergency Response Plan is communicated to the installation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

4.2 INSTALLATION CLINIC STANDARD REQUIREMENTS

4.2.1 MEDICINE AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

Business Unit management must ensure a standard is determined for the type and
quantity of clinic equipment, medications and disposable items utilized within the
Unit.

A standard list of Company approved medicines is available in the Medical Protocols


Manual, Section 8 Subsection 4, Table 3 (see HQS-HSE-PR-02). If Business Unit
management elects to allow use of medicines other than those detailed on the
Company approved list, the following must occur:
• Each Division is responsible to forward the list of medications utilized in that
Division/Sector to the Corporate Medical Advisor (CMA).
• The CMA, with support from Corporate HSE Services, must review and
approve the list then advise Business Unit and Division management which
medications are considered prescription (Rx) or over the counter (OTC) within
the Company, and identify duplication of medications within the list.
• The CMA must communicate the classification of the Division approved
medicines as either prescription (Rx) or over the counter (OTC) to Topside
Support in each Division.

If a medicine considered prescription by the Company is substituted for a local


equivalent, the local equivalent will be considered prescription by the Company
regardless of whether the local purchase requires a prescription or not.

The determination whether medicines are prescription or over the counter will be
based on the United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA). For Company
purposes any medicine, or dosage of medicine, identified as prescription by the FDA
is considered a prescription medication in every area of operation.

Controlled drugs must be stored and locked in a specific locker at all times. The OIM
must ensure that a system is in place for the issuance of these controlled drugs. The
OIM must countersign the controlled drugs register at each crew change of the
Installation Medical Person (IMP), and after each administration of a controlled drug.

The OIM must ensure there is an effective system in place for the disposal of out of
date controlled and prescription drugs.

Clinic equipment must be available, properly functioning and effectively maintained.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

4.2.2 CLINIC REQUIREMENTS

Clinic furnishings must be constructed of non-porous materials.

The clinic must be equipped with a “hands-free” system, which allows the IMP to
speak directly to Topside Support.

The clinic must not be used for accommodation purposes other than during
circumstances when the IMP needs to monitor or attend to a patient.

4.3 INSTALLATION MEDICAL PERSON

The Installation Medical Person (IMP) must be a qualified medical professional


(paramedic, registered nurse, MD, etc.), holding current certification or license.

The IMP must attend periodic theoretical and practical refresher training as per the
Company training matrix.

The IMP must maintain a current certification or license in Advanced Cardiac Life
Support (including CPR and use of a manual Defibrillator) or equivalent course
approved by the CMA.

At each crew change of the IMP, the oncoming must function test all major clinic
equipment as per manufacturer's recommendation. This includes, but is not limited
to, all cardiac equipment (AEDs/manual defibrillators, laryngoscopes, resuscitators,
oxygen levels, and so on). Any malfunctioning equipment must be immediately
reported to the OIM.

The IMP must inventory all medicines and disposable items on a monthly basis. All
deficiencies must be immediately reported to the OIM.

The IMP must obtain authorization from Topside Support prior to the administration
of any controlled or prescription drug, including non-prescription drugs at
prescription strength, unless managing an emergency situation and following
Company approved medical protocol.

The IMP must follow medical protocols for emergency situations where authorization
is not timely or possible. The Medical Protocols followed must be the Company
approved (see HQS-HSE-PR-02) unless local (Unit/Division) medical protocols have
been adopted and approved by Business Unit management as well as the Corporate
Medical Advisor.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

The Medical Protocols followed should be available on the Unit or Division QHSE
website. A hard copy must be current and maintained in the installation clinic.

The IMP must maintain the overall cleanliness and housekeeping of the clinic.

The IMP must brief and maintain people’s awareness of health issues (malaria,
typhoid, and so on).

The IMP must maintain the appropriate level of confidentiality of medical


documentation.

4.4 MEDICAL DOCUMENTATION

More detailed instructions can be found in the Medical Protocols, see HQS-HSE-PR-
02.

4.4.1 MEDICAL ACTIVITY LOG

General information relating to all treatment provided must be recorded using the
Medical Activity Log.

At each crew change of the IMP, the oncoming IMP must create a new Medical
Activity Log for the duration of that hitch.

The Medical Activity Log is "public domain" and may be distributed as such.

Copies of the Medical Activity Log must be reviewed at least quarterly by the OIM
and initialed for confirmation.

4.4.2 PATIENT CONTACT REPORT (PCR)

The Patient Contact Report is a "privileged document" and must be treated as such.
Only authorized Company personnel may view Patient Contact Reports.

A copy of the Patient Contact Report generated must be included in the individual's
personal medical record each time medical attention is rendered to that individual.

For completion of the PCR see HQS-HSE-PR-02.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

4.4.3 INDIVIDUAL PERSONAL MEDICAL RECORDS

Individual Personal Medical Records must be updated upon arrival on the installation
and as necessary thereafter to indicate the following personal and pertinent past
medical information:
• Name and address
• Blood type (if known)
• Any known allergies
• Significant past medical history (example; major surgery, any hospital
treatment)
• Long term prescribed medication
• Emergency contact name (first and last names) and telephone number(s)
• Signed permission for accepting or declining blood transfusions in life
threatening situations administered at clinics within the assigned Unit
• Signature affirming receipt of Malaria and Medical briefings (if appropriate)
(See Section 3 Subsection 1.1)

The personnel of Company subcontractors, Clients and Client subcontractors must


complete/update the Personal Medical Record with the following exceptions:
• Confirmation of Malaria briefing
• Confirmation of country specific medical briefing
• Immunization status

The Personal Medical Record is a "privileged document" and must be treated as


such. Only authorized Company personnel may view Personal Medical Records.

4.5 TOPSIDE SUPPORT AND LOCAL MEDICAL PROVIDER

4.5.1 TOPSIDE SUPPORT

Topside Support is required in each Unit of operation. It is the responsibility of


Business Unit management to retain a Topside Support provider and may elect to
retain Topside Support locally. This may be done provided the infrastructure and
local medical ability are capable of fulfilling the responsibilities defined for Topside
Support. The selection of Topside Support by Business Unit management must be
assessed and evaluated by the Corporate Medical Advisor prior to implementing.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

The Corporate Medical Advisor will evaluate key aspects of the chosen Topside
Support provider to ensure the most appropriate and effective medical care possible
can be provided. The key aspects evaluated are, as a minimum:
• Medical competency of personnel
• Capabilities of the medical infrastructure
• Effective proximity of the medical support to the operation

For specific duties of the Topside Support provider, see HQS-HSE-PR-02 (Medical
Protocols).

4.5.2 LOCAL MEDICAL PROVIDER (LMP)

Local medical provider(s) must be identified in all areas of operation. The selection
of a Local Medical provider by Unit or Division management must be assessed and
evaluated by the Corporate Medical Advisor prior to implementing.

The LMP should advise and provide support to management on health related
matters, including health promotion campaigns (when applicable).

The LMP may be required to organize pre-employment and periodic medical


examinations of local personnel (when applicable).

The Corporate Medical Advisor will evaluate key aspects of the Local Medical
Provider to ensure the most appropriate and effective medical care possible can be
provided. The key aspects evaluated are, as a minimum:
• Medical competency of personnel
• Capabilities of the medical infrastructure
• Effective proximity of the medical support to the operation
• Access to and level of client’s medical facilities

The Local Medical Provider is responsible for providing local medical treatment
onshore. The local medical provider may, at the request of Topside Support or local
management, provide logistical coordination and support of local medical care.

Where local medical infrastructure and resources are readily available, Topside
Support and Local Medical Provider responsibilities may be combined as a single
provider.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

4.6 MEDICAL AUDITS

A system of area/country medical risk ranking must be maintained to establish the


frequency of audits.

Medical audits must be used to evaluate the physical condition of installation clinics
and treatment facilities as well as the physical condition of Company retained, or
potentially retained, onshore hospitals, clinics and treatment facilities.

Medical audits must be used to evaluate the professional abilities of installation


based and Company retained, or potentially retained, onshore medical staff.

Medical audits must be conducted using the Company standard medical audit.

Medical audits must include audit of compliance with the Sanitation and Hygiene
policy and procedure. (See Section 3 Subsection 3.1)

Medical audits must be conducted by Company approved physicians authorized as


auditors or specific authorized Company personnel.

Audit reports must be documented and distributed to the following personnel:


• OIM (installation medical audits only)
• Rig Manager (installation medical audits only)
• Division and Sector or Branch Manager
• Business Unit and Division/Sector HSE Manager
• Director QHSE Services
• Corporate Medical Advisor

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Ensure Individual Personal Medical Records are updated upon arrival on the
installation (and as necessary thereafter) to indicate personal and pertinent
past medical information.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

5.2 INSTALLATION MEDICAL PERSON:


• Be thoroughly knowledgeable with, and follow, Medical Protocols approved
for use on the installation.
• Ensure controlled drugs are stored and secured in a specific locker.
• Attend periodic theoretical and practical refresher training as per the
Company training matrix.
• At each crew change, the oncoming must function test all major clinic
equipment as per manufacturer's recommendation and immediately report
any deficiencies to the OIM.
• Inventory all medicines and disposable items on a monthly basis and
immediately report any deficiencies to the OIM.
• Obtain authorization from a Company authorized physician prior to the
administration of any controlled or prescription drug, or non-prescription drug
at prescription strength.
• Receive authorization for specific medical treatment as specified in the
Medical Protocols
• Discuss potential injury/illness based upon mechanism or index of suspicion
even if the patient does not present with significant clinical signs or
symptoms.
• Consult with Topside Support prior to disembarking of personnel for medical
reasons.
• Maintain the overall cleanliness and housekeeping within the clinic.
• Maintain the appropriate level of confidentiality of medical documentation.
• Ensure patients sign the PCR form (when possible).

5.3 OIM:
• Ensure that a system is in place for the issuance of controlled drugs.
• Countersign the controlled drugs register at each crew change of the
Installation Medical Person and after each administration of a controlled drug.
• Ensure that there is an effective system is in place for the disposal of out of
date controlled and prescription drugs.
• Review and initial copies of the Medical Activity Log at least quarterly

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

5.4 DIVISION MANAGER:


• Ensure emergency response plans and procedures for relevant site-specific
and area or location (installations, facilities and offices) emergencies are
developed within their area of responsibility.
• Select onshore physicians and clinics based upon review of credentials.
• Ensure a list of authorized physicians and clinics, relevant to the area of
operation, is available on the Division/Sector QHSE website.
• Submit Medical Protocols to be used in the Division or Sector to the Business
Unit Vice President and Corporate Medical Advisor for approval.
• Ensure Medical Protocols are available for use on installations.
• Ensure a system is in place for Division management to monitor the
effectiveness of Topside Support and establish clear communications with
Topside Support (for example, monthly meetings).
• Ensure all installations in the Division have updated Medical Emergency
Response Plans readily available.
• Ensure the Medical Emergency Response Plan is communicated to and
available on the installation prior to that installation arriving in that Division.

5.5 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT


• Ensure a standard is determined for the type and quantity of clinic equipment,
medications and disposable items and submit it to the Corporate Medical
Advisor for approval.
• Approve and ensure Medical Protocols are available for use on installations.
• Approve selection onshore physicians and clinics based upon review of
credentials.

5.6 CORPORATE QHSE SERVICES:


• Ensure the system of area/country medical risk ranking establishing the
frequency of medical audits is available on the Corporate QHSE website.
• Consult with the Corporate Medical Advisor and approve personnel as
authorized medical auditors.

5.7 CORPORATE MEDICAL ADVISOR:


• Approve the standards for the type and quantity of clinic equipment,
medications and disposable items set forth by Business Unit Management.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

• Review medications list in use for each area of operation to determine which
medications are classified as prescription only.
• Advise Business Unit management which medications must be classified as
prescription only based on the U.S. FDA.
• Approve the selection of physicians and clinics proposed by Business Unit
Management.
• Approve Medical Protocols proposed by Business Unit management for use
on installations.
• Maintain a system of area/country medical risk ranking to establish the
frequency of medical audits.

5.8 MEDICAL AUDITORS:


• Use medical audits to evaluate the physical condition of installation clinics
and treatment facilities as well as the physical condition of Company retained,
or potentially retained, onshore hospitals, clinics and treatment facilities.
• Use medical audits to evaluate the professional abilities of installation based
and Company retained, or potentially retained, onshore medical staff.
• Conduct medical audits using the Company standard medical audit.
• Distribute audit reports to required personnel.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• The Function Check-list of Major Equipment (Figure A)
(Must be retained in the installation files for not less than one year)
• Monthly Inventory (of Drugs, Consumables and Perishables) (Figure B)
(Must be retained in the installation files for not less than one year)
• Controlled Drugs Register (Figure C)
(Must be retained in the installation files for not less than one year)
• Individual Personal Medical Record (Figure D)
(Must be kept in the individual's confidential personal medical file)
• Medical Activity Log (Figure E)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

(Copies must be retained in the installation files for not less than 3 years)
• Patient Contact Report (Figures F1 – F4)
(One copy must be retained in the installation clinic files for at least 3 years)
(One copy must be maintained in the person's Personal Medical Record)

The medical documentation described in this procedure is available on the HQS


HSE intranet site.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure A, The Function Check-list of Major Equipment

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure B, Monthly Inventory (of Drugs, Consumables and Perishables)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure C, Controlled Drugs Register

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure D, Individual Personal Medical Record (Strictly Confidential)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure E, Medical Activity Log

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure F1, Patient Contact Report

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure F2, Patient Contact Report (page 2)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure F3, Patient Contact Report (ECG Form)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care

Figure F4, Patient Contact Report (Progress Notes)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 20 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Potable Water

1 POLICY

Potable water produced and/or stored onboard installations must be suitable


for human consumption.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all water intended for human use (for
example, drinking, showering, cooking, and so on.) is free from bacteria and other
harmful impurities.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company installations.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 SAMPLING AREAS

Water samples must be taken from various locations, including:


• Water maker
• Bulk loading station
• Galley
• Shower rooms
• Drinking fountains

4.2 POTABLE WATER QUALITY/TESTING

Potable water must be tested weekly for:


• Coliform presence/absence
• pH
• Nitrates
• Taste, odor and turbidity
• Residual bromine (if brominator installed)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Potable Water

1 Bacteriological Total Coliform count Absent


Indicators
2 Chemical Indicators pH 6.5 to 8.0
Nitrate expressed as Nitrogen < 10 mg/L
Ammonia < 1.5 mg/L
3 Aesthetic Taste Palatable
Characteristics Odor Absent
Turbidity (clarity and evidence of < 5 NTU
solids in suspension)
4 Residual Monitor bromine levels to ensure 0.2 to 0.4 mg/L or 0.2 to 0.4 ppm
Bromine ** that adequate bromination of (0.5 max allowed at injection point)
potable water is taking place.
**This test is not mandatory if a silver ionizing system is in place in lieu of a brominator.

Potable water testing equipment must be available onboard the installation.

An annual test must be conducted to establish if any heavy metal or other


contamination is present. The table below lists the minimum tests to be conducted
and the maximum acceptable parameters.

Aluminum 0.2 mg/L Lead 0.01 mg/L


Antimony 0.005 mg/L Mercury 0.001 mg/L
Arsenic 0.01 mg/L Nickel 0.02 mg/L
Barium 2 mg/L Nitrate as N 10 mg/L
Cadmium 0.003 mg/L pH 6.5 - 8.0
Chloride 250 mg/L Selenium 0.05 mg/L
Chromium, Total 0.1 mg/L Silver** 0.1 mg/L
Coliform, Total 0 Sodium 100 mg/L
Copper 1 mg/L Sulfate 250 mg/L
Cyanides 0.07 mg/L Total Dissolved Solids 500 mg/L
Fluoride 4 mg/L Turbidity 5 BTU
Iron 0.3 mg/L **When silver salts are used for disinfecting

The results of all weekly and annual potable water tests must be entered into the
planned maintenance system. A copy of the results must also be stored in the files
of the installation clinic.

Dedicated hoses used for transferring potable water from supply vessels to the
installation must be suitable for potable water and clearly identifiable at both ends of
the hose.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Potable Water

All potable water from supply vessels must be tested for residual chlorine, pH, taste,
odor and turbidity before transferring to onboard holding tanks. (Allowable
parameters for residual chlorine are: 0.2 – 0.4 mg/L or 0.2 – 0.4 ppm.) Water that
does not meet the requirements must not be taken onboard.

Maintenance of the potable water systems must include cleaning of the potable
water tanks at least every three years to remove bio-films and sediment.

All potable water must pass through a brominator or silver ionizer followed by an
ultraviolet system to ensure microorganisms are eliminated. An ultraviolet system
alone does not provide residual effect after treatment. Use of a brominator or a silver
ionizer system provides the residual effect after treatment.

The use of a brominator or silver ionizer in conjunction with an ultraviolet system


represents primary and secondary treatment for water sterilization. Both primary and
secondary water sterilization are required.

Use of Calcium Hypochlorite (70% active Chlorine) or Sodium Hypochlorite (15%


active Chlorine) for potable water treatment or sterilization is not permitted.

All drinking fountains and ice machines must be equipped with a filtering device to
further purify water before being ingested. The filtering device must be cleaned
and/or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All drinking fountains, ice machines and coffee/tea makers that have fixed fill lines
must be entered into the planned maintenance system.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 INSTALLATION MEDICAL PERSON:


• Test potable water in accordance with this procedure.
• Maintain a file of potable water test results in the installation clinic.

5.2 OIM:
• Ensure testing of potable water in accordance with this procedure.

5.3 RIG MANAGER


• Ensure annual heavy metals test is conducted and testing facility is capable
of performing required tests.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Potable Water

6 DOCUMENTATION

There is currently no documentation associated with this policy or procedure.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

1 POLICY

Accommodation, food preparation and services areas must be maintained to


high standards of sanitation and hygiene.

Smoking is permitted in designated areas only.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel are adequately protected
from the harmful effects of unsuitable sanitation/hygiene practices and second hand
smoke.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers any Client, subcontractor or outside agency that work at any
Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 INSPECTIONS

The accommodation, offices, galley, mess hall, food storage and recreation areas
must be inspected weekly.

The following personnel must conduct the weekly inspection:


• OIM or designee
• Installation Medical Person
• Camp Boss

4.2 TRAINING

Prior to arrival on an installation, all catering personnel must have documentation to


confirm they have received instruction in the following:
• Transmission of communicable diseases
• Personal hygiene
• First aid for choking
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

Prior to arrival on an installation, all food handlers must have documentation to


confirm they have received instruction in the prevention of food-borne illness.

It is the responsibility of the catering contractor to provide the training required for
catering personnel prior to arrival on the installation.

In exceptional circumstances training requirements for catering personnel may be


met on the installation, provided the IMP is qualified to carry out this training and has
the approval of the Rig Manager.

Prior to commencing work at any installation or facility, all catering personnel must
be instructed, and refreshed annually, in the following:
• Emergency drills and duties
• Fire fighting, fire prevention and fire fighting equipment associated with the
galley, mess hall, accommodation and laundry areas

For further information on training see Section 4 Subsection 1.3.

4.3 FOOD SELECTION

Each catering services provider must offer a “heart healthy” diet option at meal
times.

Fresh fruits and vegetables must be offered at snack times and as an alternative
side dish during meal times.

4.4 FOOD TRANSPORTATION

The OIM or designee must periodically inspect the containers used for the
transportation of food products from onshore to Installations paying specific attention
to the general physical condition of doors, seals and closing devices. The principal
objective is to ensure the overall cleanliness and to establish the container's ability to
maintain temperatures within the required limits.

The Installation Medical Person must be present during all food deliveries and must
inspect all food items to ensure food quality. Questionable food items which appear
to be contaminated or spoiled must be discarded. Meats that are partially thawed
must be discarded. Results from this inspection must be documented with the
weekly inspection and the catering company must be informed of the inspection
findings.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

4.5 FOOD STORAGE

When removed from the original container, all food, whether raw or prepared, must
be stored in a clean covered container to protect against possible contamination.

All food must be given an arrival date and rotated so that foods are used on a first-in,
first-out basis. The “use by” date takes precedence over the arrival date.

All refrigerators and freezers must have a functioning thermometer.

All “walk-in” refrigerators and freezers must have a functioning lock-in alarm system
to sound in a permanently manned area. The alarm system must be included in the
planned maintenance system.

A calibrated, portable thermometer must be available to confirm the temperature of


food arriving onboard and the core temperatures of hot food.

All foods stored in refrigerators must either be in a suitable food storage container or
covered by disposable wraps, such as foil, wax paper, plastic wrap, and so forth.
Cloth towels may not be used to cover food.

Frozen food must be wrapped in freezer paper or left in its original container to
prevent freezer burns.

Foods must be stored on racks and not placed directly on the floor. Use of wood
pallets for floor racks is not permitted.

Cooked and uncooked foods must be stored separately to prevent any cross-
contamination.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

The following temperatures must be maintained:

Type Lower limit Upper limit


Milk products (not UHT) + 1 degree Centigrade + 4 degrees Centigrade
Dairy products, Cheeses + 34 degrees Fahrenheit + 39 degrees Fahrenheit
and so on
Refrigerated foods, + 1 degree Centigrade + 4 degrees Centigrade
salads, and so on + 34 degrees Fahrenheit + 41 degrees Fahrenheit
Deep frozen foods Not applicable -18 degrees Centigrade
Zero degrees Fahrenheit
Core temperature of >75 degrees Centigrade Not applicable
cooked food >167 degrees Fahrenheit
Ice cream conservator Not applicable < - 2.2 degrees Centigrade
Display of hot food, for >63 degrees Centigrade Not applicable
example, Bain Marie >145 degrees Fahrenheit
Display of cold food, for Not applicable + 4 degrees Centigrade
example, Cold buffet + 41 degrees Fahrenheit
Dry goods store + 10 degrees Centigrade + 27degrees Centigrade
+ 50 degrees Fahrenheit + 80 degrees Fahrenheit

Foods and food dressings must be kept refrigerated and left out only during meal
times.

Dry goods stores must be located in climate-controlled spaces.

4.6 FOOD PREPARATION

Meats, poultry and seafood must be thawed in a refrigerator or defroster if available.

Poultry, meats and stuffing containing meat products must be cooked until all parts
of the food are heated to a temperature of 75 degrees Centigrade/167 degrees
Fahrenheit.

Pork must be cooked until "well done" and no pink meat is visible.

All vegetables and fruits intended to be consumed raw must be thoroughly washed.

Physical contact with food must be kept to an absolute minimum. Personal hygiene
must be strictly maintained during food preparation and service to eliminate
contamination.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

Only personnel trained and designated as food handlers may prepare and serve
foods (Cooks, Cook's Helpers and Bakers).

Cutting gloves must be worn by personnel performing food preparation or serving


activities requiring the use of a knife.

Foods must be prepared on clean, non-porous work surfaces.

Wooden cutting boards are not allowed.

A system should be in place for identification and designation of cutting boards to


help prevent cross contamination of food types (For example, separate cutting
boards designated for beef, chicken, vegetables, and so on).

4.7 FOOD PROTECTION

Raw eggs with cracked shells must not be used.

Packaged foods marked with a manufacturer's expiration date must be discarded


when date is passed.

Packaged foods marked with a "sell by" or "use by" date, must be discarded when
date is passed.

Seafood that is discolored (pinkish), soft to the touch, or has a foul odor must be
disposed of immediately.

Red meats and poultry that are discolored (greenish) or produce a foul odor must be
disposed of.

Leaking or 'bulging' canned products must be considered contaminated and must be


disposed of immediately.

4.8 FOOD LEFTOVERS

Food retained as leftovers must be:


• Protected against contamination and maintained at the correct temperature at
all times, especially during serving.
• Removed from the serving line immediately after first serving is completed
(For example, not left on the serving line between initial meal service and
second service).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

Foods retained as leftovers must not be:


• Frozen.
• Retained for longer than 48 hours.
• Served as a leftover more than once

Leftovers served hot must be served at temperatures of at least 63 °C or 145 °F.

Leftovers, such as chicken and seafood, must not be placed in the break rooms for
consumption.

Processed meats may be used for snacks provided they are not left out longer than
90 minutes.

Foods that are highly perishable (such as minced/ground meats, gravies, dressings,
egg salad and tuna salad) may not be retained or reused.

4.9 CLEANING AND SANITIZING UTENSILS/EQUIPMENT

Food preparation tables must be washed and sanitized after each use.

Food preparation areas must have one sink equipped for washing hands with hot
and cold running water, filled soap dispenser and material for drying hands using a
sanitary technique. (For example, air dryer or disposable towels).

All kitchenware, food contact surfaces, equipment and utensils must be thoroughly
washed and sanitized after each use. Special attention must be given to meat slicing
machines, food mixers, can openers, grinders and cutting boards.

Where a dishwasher is used, the temperature of the wash and rinse water must be
as per the manufacturer's instructions.

When a dishwasher is unavailable, dishes and eating utensils must be washed and
rinsed in an approved solution and must be air-dried.

Dishes or eating utensils must not be wiped with towels or rags.

Deep fat fryers must be drained and strained daily and covered with a lid made of a
non-absorbent material.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

Grills, stovetops and drip pans must be cleaned at least once per shift, If foil is used
as inserts in the drip pans, it must be changed daily.

Ovens must be cleaned at least weekly.

Soft ice cream machines must be cleaned once every 24 hours.

Cold drink dispensers must be cleaned once every 24 hours.

Milk dispensing machines must be defrosted and cleaned weekly.

Exhaust vents and filters must be cleaned weekly.

All "reach in" refrigerators must be emptied of their contents and cleaned weekly.

The grating in the walk-in refrigerator must be removed and the floor cleaned
weekly.

The grating in the walk-in freezer must be removed and the floor cleaned monthly.

Cups and glasses must be stored inverted.

Eating utensils must be stored with the handles up.

Pots and pans must be stored inverted or by hanging.

Each installation must have a procedure in place for disinfecting all utensils,
equipment and food contact surfaces. This procedure must include, as a minimum,
the use of 20% bleach solution.

4.10 GENERAL ACCOMMODATIONS

Dirty work clothes must be laundered after each working shift. Personal clothing
must be laundered on a regular basis.

Dirty work clothing, shoes or boots are not allowed within the accommodation.
Maintenance staff must give full consideration to hygiene when performing
maintenance within the accommodation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

4.10.1 MESS HALL

All personnel using the mess hall must comply with the following:
• Wash hands, forearms and face (when needed) prior to using the mess hall.
• Wear reasonable footwear (footwear that provides suitable protection in the
event of an emergency), trousers/short pants and at least a 'T' shirt.
• Sleeveless vests/shirts may not be worn.

4.10.2 ROOMS

All beds must be made daily.

All rooms must be swept and mopped daily. Grease and oil marks must be removed.

Hallways must be swept and mopped at least daily and as often as needed to
maintain a high standard of cleanliness.

Trashcans must be emptied daily and washed when needed.

Washbasins, toilets, urinals, and shower stalls must be used as designed and
cleaned and disinfected daily.

The hallway air vent louvers must be cleaned weekly.

Grease and finger marks must be removed from doors and walls daily.

All beds must be changed (fresh linen) at least every seven days.

Beds must be changed immediately after notification by the OIM, or designee, that
the occupant has departed the installation.

4.10.3 CHANGE/BREAK ROOMS

Change/break rooms must be cleaned twice daily or more frequently as needed.

Each individual who uses the break/change room must be responsible to maintain
the room in a clean and orderly condition.

The OIM must ensure that personnel who use these rooms maintain them in a clean
and orderly condition.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

4.10.4 RECREATION AREAS

Movie rooms, cinemas, recreation rooms, reading rooms, gymnasiums and any
designated leisure area must be cleaned daily or more frequently as needed.

4.10.5 OFFICE SPACES

All spaces inside the living accommodation used to conduct business and meetings
must be cleaned at least daily. Cleaning must include:
• Floors swept and mopped
• Trash cans emptied
• Window ledges and furniture dusted
• Grease and finger marks removed from doors, walls and furniture

4.11 PERSONAL HYGIENE

All personnel must seek early treatment for superficial skin infections and
inflammations.

All personnel must seek early treatment for transmittable diseases, such as colds
and flu.

All community sink areas used by personnel to wash hands (For example, change
rooms and community shower or toilet areas) must be equipped with a disposable
paper towel dispenser or air dryer.

4.12 SMOKING LIMITATIONS

The Company is concerned with the health of all its employees. To allow both
smokers and non-smokers to live and work in confining conditions with a minimum of
health risks and inconvenience, the following must be adhered to:
• Smoking may only be allowed in areas designated by the installation or facility
QHSE Steering Committee and approved by the Division Manager.
• Any area outside or inside the accommodations where smoking is permitted
must be clearly marked.
• Smoking must be prohibited in all other areas.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

• Cigarette lighters are prohibited on Company installations. If a cigarette lighter


is inadvertently brought to the Installation it must be turned over to a
designated person for safekeeping until the owner departs.
• Each installation must provide appropriate electric cigarette lighters and/or
safety matches at each designated smoking area.

Smoking areas must be located in areas devoid of operating equipment and/or


flammable substances (for example,, vapors, fuel storage, and so on) and where
personnel are not forced to breathe second hand smoke.

Cabins, offices, control rooms, radio rooms, kitchens, dry stores, cold stores,
lockers, freezers, food preparation areas and laundries may not be designated as
smoking areas.

Designated smoking areas outside the accommodation must have a clearly visible
means of warning personnel (for example, a flashing or rotating light) when smoking
is not permitted for any reason, such as gas being detected.

All meetings must be non-smoking.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Seek early treatment for superficial skin infections and inflammations.
• Seek early treatment for transmittable diseases, such as colds and flu.
• Do not wear dirty work clothing, shoes or boots within the accommodation.
• Wash hands, forearms and face (when needed) prior to using the mess hall.
• Wear reasonable footwear, trousers/short pants and at least a 'T' shirt while in
the mess hall.
• Do not wear sleeveless vests/shirts in the mess hall.

5.2 INSTALLATION MEDICAL PERSON:


• Jointly conduct the weekly sanitation and hygiene inspection with the Camp
Boss and OIM (or designee).
• Be present during all food deliveries and inspect all food items to ensure food
quality.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

5.3 CAMP BOSS:


• Jointly conduct the weekly sanitation and hygiene inspection with the
Installation Medical Person and OIM (or designee).
• Ensure all food handlers are instructed in the prevention of food-borne illness
prior to handling food.
• Ensure, prior to arrival on an installation, all catering personnel are instructed
in the following:
1. Transmission of communicable diseases
2. Personal hygiene
3. First aid for choking
• Ensure, prior to commencing work at any installation or facility, all catering
personnel are instructed in the following:
1. Emergency drills and duties
2. Fire fighting, fire prevention and fire fighting equipment associated with
the galley, mess hall, accommodation and laundry areas
• Conduct and document required training for catering personnel and maintain
the updated records aboard the installation, using appropriate personnel from
the installation and resources from management of the catering contractor.
• Ensure a system is in place to meet the requirements of the procedure
regarding food handling and sanitation of the installation or facility.
• Ensure beds are changed immediately after notification by the OIM, or
designee, that an occupant has departed the installation.

5.4 OIM:
• Jointly conduct, or appoint a designee to jointly conduct, the weekly sanitation
and hygiene inspection with the Camp Boss and Installation Medical Person.
• Conduct, or appoint a designee to conduct, a periodic inspection of the
containers used for the transportation of food products from onshore to
installations paying specific attention to the general physical condition of
doors, seals and closing devices.
• Ensure notification to the Camp Boss that an occupant has departed the
installation.
• Ensure that personnel who use Change/Break rooms maintain them in a
clean and orderly condition

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

5.5 RIG MANAGER:


• Approve requests, due to unusual circumstances, to complete catering
training requirements aboard the installation.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The form indicated below is included in the manual and is intended to provide
operations with a minimum list of areas to be inspected. It is expected that each
installation must modify the form to add relevant areas.
• Weekly Sanitation and Hygiene Checklist (Figure A)
(Copies must be retained in the Installation/facility files for a period of one
year)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL SECTION: 3
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations

Figure A, Weekly Sanitation and Hygiene Checklist

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 4 ........................ SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION

SUBSECTION 1 ORIENTATION AND TRAINING


1 HSE ORIENTATION
2 DRUGS, ALCOHOL AND WEAPONS IN THE
WORKPLACE
3 TRAINING

SUBSECTION 2 RISK MANAGEMENT


1 THINK PLANNING PROCESS
2 PERMIT TO WORK
3 CLIENT, SUBCONTRACTORS PERSONNEL AND
EQUIPMENT
4 DRESS REQUIREMENTS AND PERSONAL
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

SUBSECTION 3 PLANNING
1 HYDROGEN SULFIDE
2 EMERGENCY RESPONSE

SUBSECTION 4 COMMUNICATION
1 HSE INFORMATION
2 HSE MEETINGS

SUBSECTION 5 IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING


1 START PROCESS
2 TRAVEL
3 GENERAL SAFE WORK PRACTICES
4 ENERGY SOURCES AND ISOLATION
5 FALL PROTECTION
6 MECHANICAL LIFTING
7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
8 PERSONAL IMPAIRMENT
9 ELECTRICAL SAFETY

SUBSECTION 6 EVALUATING AND IMPROVING


1 HSE RECOGNITION
2 FOCUS IMPROVEMENT PROCESS
3 INCIDENT REPORTING

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

1 POLICY

All personnel must receive a HSE Orientation suitable for their work
environment prior to commencing work or during a visit.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel receive critical safety
information and understand site specific hazards prior to having access to the work
site.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel who work at or visit any Company installation, facility
or office.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 SECURITY

Division management is responsible for site-specific security arrangements for new


personnel and communicating it to those personnel prior to arriving in an area.

4.2 INSTALLATION HSE ORIENTATION

All installations must have a system in place to ensure all first-time arrivals are met
by the OIM or designee.

All personnel arriving on an installation for the first time or any person who has not
been on the installation within 6 months must attend an HSE Orientation and sign a
form to verify their understanding.

Unless receiving a Short-Term Visitor Orientation, all personnel must receive:


• An overview of the Core Values, Mission Statement and HSE Policy
Statements to ensure understanding the importance of these documents and
what they represent.
• Information on current operations and the individual’s obligation to interrupt
the operation or raise justifiable personal HSE concerns.
• A written, installation-specific “Welcome Onboard Card.”

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

• Information on emergency signals, muster stations and station bills, including


roles and responsibilities.
• Explanation of emergency preparedness, which must include reference to
donning instructions for life jackets, personnel escape equipment, smoke
hoods and PPE.
• Introduction to THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.
• Explanation of the Colors process.
• Information on HSE meetings – weekly, pre-tour, pre-task.
• Explanation of how and where to receive QHSE and ISM information (Bulletin
Boards, training material, SOLAS Training Manual).
• Instruction on reporting of incidents – all injuries and incidents to be reported
and who to report them to.
• Explanation of the requirements to report any known allergies or current
medication.
• Explanation of the requirements to report possession of any mobile phones.
• General HSE information, including designated smoking areas, high noise
areas, housekeeping, jewelry and PTW.
• Installation-specific safety information, procedures and hazards (H2S,
asbestos, and so forth).
• Information on hazards associated with, and the safe operation of, power-
operated and/or remote-controlled equipment, such as watertight doors,
hatches and winches.
• Information on restricted or controlled access areas, such as columns, lower
hulls and transformer rooms.
• Explanation of drugs, alcohol and weapons policy. (They are not allowed.)
• Explanation of the personal impairment policy.
• Information on environmental awareness and waste management
procedures.
• Information on the safety representative (if applicable) and QHSE Steering
Committee.
• Explanation of current lifting gear color code.
• Introduction to the OIM and review the organization chart for the installation.

The Company approved system must be in place to easily identify individuals who
are visiting or new to the installation (See Section 4 Subsection 2.4, paragraph
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

4.3). The OIM or designee must determine how long an individual is identified as
new or visiting and any further training requirements that are required to ensure
effective understanding of HSE procedures (for example, Permit To Work, Fall
Protection, and Emergency Response Duties).

4.2.1 SHORT TERM VISITOR ORIENTATION

A short-term visitor is someone who will be departing the installation on the same
day as arrival.

Short-term visitors may be given a condensed orientation.

All personnel who will not be performing any actual work and who must be
accompanied by a Company employee at all times must receive the following:
• An overview of the Core Values, Mission Statement and HSE Policy
Statements to ensure understanding the importance of these documents and
what they represent.
• Information on current operations and the individual’s obligation to interrupt
the operation or raise justifiable personal HSE concerns.
• A written installation-specific “Welcome Onboard Card.”
• Explanation of emergency signals, muster stations and station bills, including
roles and responsibilities.
• Information on emergency preparedness, which must include reference to
donning instructions for life jackets, personnel escape equipment and smoke
hoods.
• General HSE information, including PPE, high noise areas, jewelry and
mobile phones.
• Explanation of the requirements to report any known allergies or current
medication.
• Explanation of the drugs, alcohol and weapons policy. (They are not allowed.)

All personnel performing work or not being accompanied at all times must receive
the following, in addition to the above:
• Introduction to the THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.
• Instruction on reporting of incidents – all injuries and incidents to be reported
and who to report them to.
• General HSE information, including designated smoking areas,
housekeeping, and PTW.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

• Information on hazards associated with, and the safe operation of, power-
operated and/or remote-controlled equipment such as watertight doors,
hatches and winches.
• Information on restricted or controlled access areas such as columns, lower
hulls and transformer rooms.
• Instruction on environmental awareness and waste management procedures.
• Information about the safety representative (if applicable).

4.2.2 CREW CHANGE REVIEW BRIEFING

All returning crew members to the installation must undergo a HSE review briefing
with the OIM or his designated representative within 6 hours of arriving on board.
The following, but not limited to, must be included in the review:
• Installation’s current HSE performance, inclusive of progress and status of
Installation Specific HSE Plans.
• All HSE incidents which have occurred on the installation since personnel last
departed the installation on field break, inclusive of corrective actions.
• Each returning individuals training compliance status, inclusive of planned
schedule to achieve or maintain compliance.

4.2.3 JOB SPECIFIC ORIENTATION

All personnel must be introduced to their supervisor and are responsible to


familiarize themselves with their work area, emergency equipment layout and
emergency exits.

Key personnel with specific HSE duties (for example, Installation Medical Person,
emergency response teams, and so on) must receive additional specific instruction
on their duties.

4.2.4 BUDDY SYSTEM

All new Company personnel, Company personnel transferred between installations


and newly promoted Company personnel must participate in the “buddy system” for
a sufficient period of time to become familiar with specific aspects of the installation.

Company personnel in the “buddy system” must spend sufficient time together
before, during or after tour to familiarize the newcomer with the installation, policy
and procedure manuals; and instruction manuals specific to the position.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

The OIM or designee must determine the content and the duration of the “buddy
system” for personnel transferred between installations and newly promoted
personnel, taking into account the individual’s knowledge and experience.

4.3 FACILITY HSE ORIENTATION.

All personnel arriving at a Company facility (for the purpose of performing work) for
the first time or who have not been at the facility within 6 months must be given an
HSE Orientation unique to that facility. This orientation must be given before
personnel can begin to work. As a minimum, all personnel must receive the
following:
• An overview of the Core Values, Mission Statement and location of HSE
Policy Statements to ensure understanding the importance of these
documents and what they represent.
• Information on tasks in progress and the individual’s obligation to interrupt the
operation or raise justifiable personal HSE concerns.
• A written facility specific HSE Information Card.
• Explanation of emergency signals, muster stations, and roles and
responsibilities.
• Introduction to THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.
• Explanation of the Colors process.
• Information on HSE meetings – weekly, pre-tour, pre-task.
• Explanation of how and where to receive QHSE and ISM information (Bulletin
Boards, training material).
• Instruction on reporting of incidents – All injuries and incidents to be reported
and who to report them to.
• General HSE information, including designated smoking areas, high noise
areas, housekeeping, jewelry, PTW and PPE.
• Facility-specific safety information, procedures and hazards (asbestos, and so
on).
• Explanation of the drug, alcohol and weapons policy. (They are not allowed.)
• Explanation of personal impairment policy.
• Information on environmental awareness and waste management
procedures.
• Information about the safety representative (if applicable) and QHSE Steering
Committee.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

• Explanation of the current lifting gear color code.


• Introduced to the Facility/Base Manager and review the organizational chart
for the Facility/Base.

All personnel must be introduced to their supervisor to ensure they understand their
responsibilities and are familiarized with their work area, emergency equipment
layout and emergency exits. Clients visiting or inspecting the facility must be
escorted and supervised.

4.4 OFFICE HSE ORIENTATION

All personnel visiting any Company office must be verbally provided with alarm and
emergency evacuation procedures.

All personnel working at a Company office must be provided with an HSE


Orientation unique to that office. This orientation must be given as soon as possible
after initial arrival at that office by the department head or designee. Additionally, any
person who has not been at that office for the purpose of conducting work within six
months must be given the HSE Orientation unique to that office. As a minimum, the
orientation must contain the following:
• Core Values, Mission Statement and location of HSE Policy Statement.
• Obligation to interrupt the operation or raise justifiable personal HSE
concerns.
• Explanation of emergency signals, muster stations and roles and
responsibilities.
• Introduction to THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.
• Explanation of the Colors process
• Explanation of how and where to receive QHSE and ISM information.
(Bulletin Boards, training material).
• Instruction on reporting of incidents - all injuries and incidents to be reported
and who to report them to.
• General HSE information, including designated smoking areas.
• Explanation of the drug, alcohol and weapons policy. (They are not allowed).
• Explanation of personal impairment policy.
• Information on environmental awareness and waste management
procedures.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

All personnel must be introduced to their supervisor to ensure they understand their
responsibilities and are familiarized with their work area, emergency equipment
layout and emergency exits. Clients visiting or inspecting the office must be escorted
and supervised.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Familiarize themselves with their work area, emergency equipment layout and
emergency exits.
• Undergo orientation as required, dependent upon assignment.

5.2 OIM OR DESIGNEE AND FACILITY/BASE MANAGER:


• Ensure all personnel receive an HSE Orientation prior to conducting any
work.
• Ensure a system is in place to meet all first time arrivals
• Determine the content and the duration of the “buddy system” for personnel
transferred between installations and newly promoted personnel.
• Ensure the Company approved system is in place to easily identify, and
determine the identification time frame for, individuals who are visiting or new
to the installation.

5.3 DIVISION/SECTOR MANAGER:


• Make site-specific security arrangements for new personnel and
communicate them to the employee prior to arriving in an area.

5.4 OFFICE DEPARTMENT HEAD:


• Ensure personnel newly assigned to the office receive an orientation specific
to that office.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

Completed HSE Orientation verification forms for individuals who do not have
personnel files, such as visitors or service personnel, must be retained in the
installation/facility or office files for a period of one year.
• HSE Orientation Verification (Installations & Facilities) (Figure A)
(Retain in the individual’s personnel file for a minimum of three years)
• HSE Orientation Verification (Short Term Visitor) (Figure B)
(Retain in the individual’s personnel file for a minimum of three years)
• HSE Orientation Verification (Office Orientation) (Figure C)
(Retain in the individual’s personnel file for a minimum of three years)
• Welcome Onboard Card-Front (Figure D1)
• Welcome Onboard Card-Back (Figure D2)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

Figure A, HSE Orientation Verification (Installations & Facilities)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

Figure B, HSE Orientation Verification (Short Term Visitor)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

Figure C, HSE Orientation Verification (Office Orientation)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

Figure D1, Welcome Onboard Card

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation

Figure D2, Welcome Onboard Card

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace

1 POLICY

The unauthorized use, possession, sale, purchase, or distribution of weapons,


alcohol, illegal drugs, or the improper/abusive use of legally prescribed drugs,
or other intoxicating substances, or being under the influence, while working
or while on Company premises, other working locations or while conducting
Company business is strictly prohibited. The Company will utilize every
reasonable measure to maintain a drug, alcohol and weapon free work
environment and expects employees to abide by any and all applicable
governmental regulations on this subject.

Those who refuse to participate in, cooperate with, or abide by the rules of this
policy or the terms of this policy are subject to disciplinary action up to and
including termination. In some cases of drug, alcohol and weapon possession,
because of safety considerations an employee may be terminated
immediately.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to advise all employees of the Company’s position on
drugs, alcohol and weapons in the workplace.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all persons employed by the Company on a full-time, part-time or
temporary basis, and all installations and facilities. Lease or contract personnel
performing work for the Company, on or off the premises, or other third parties on
Company premises, are subject to this policy to the maximum extent practicable.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 INVESTIGATIONS/SEARCHES

The Company reserves the right, to have authorized personnel conduct


unannounced investigations which may include searches or inspections on
Company property of employees and their personal effects for illegal or unauthorized
items.

All personal items such as pockets, packages, bags, briefcases, lunchboxes, purses,
toolboxes or other belongings or items including motor vehicles, being brought onto,
on or being removed from Company premises are subject to inspection by the
Company or its authorized agents at any time. Likewise, all Company-assigned
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace

property such as, but not limited to, motor vehicles, lockers, desks, quarters of all
employees and other personnel are subject to inspection.

Any Company employee who refuses to submit to a search or who is found in


possession of any illegal or unauthorized items without an explanation satisfactory to
the Company will be subject to disciplinary action up to and including immediate
termination. Unauthorized items include, but are not limited to, firearms of any type.
The Company or its authorized agents has the right to confiscate prohibited items
and substances and, where appropriate, deliver such items to law enforcement
authorities.

While on Company installations, prescription medication must be submitted to the


person in charge of medical matters. The term valid prescription used in this policy
includes, but is not limited to medications prescribed by a physician licensed to do
so.

4.2 TESTING

All candidates for employment must complete a drug-screening test prior to


employment with the Company with the outcome of a negative result. Prospective
employees will be asked to read and sign a Drug and Narcotics Release Notice and
a Drug Screening Release Form.

All employees are subject to clinically accepted tests (urinalysis, blood tests, hair,
etc.) that may be deemed appropriate by the Company, to detect the use or
presence of alcohol, illegal drugs, unreported medication or prescription drugs, or
other prohibited substances.

The Company reserves the right to require clinically accepted tests (urinalysis, blood
tests, breathalyzer, hair, etc.) of employee at any time for the following reasons:
• Reasonable Cause – Where good cause or reasonable suspicion exists to
believe that the employee’s job performance is or could be adversely affected
as a result of being or having been under the influence of drugs or alcohol.
• Random Testing – As part of an established program 100% of all employees
are eligible. Employees tested at random may be subject to more than one
test annually.
• Post-Accident Testing – Immediately after a job-related accident, regardless
of injury to person or damage to property or degree of involvement, to confirm
or refute drug or alcohol use as a contributing cause.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace

• Contractual Requirement - Clients may require the Company to demonstrate


employees have received a negative drug and alcohol test result within 12
months preceding access to their premises and periodically thereafter as well.

4.3 CONFIRMATION TESTING

When deemed necessary by the Company, a second drug/alcohol confirmation test


will be conducted on the initial sample with every “non-negative” test result prior to
the testing laboratory formally notifying the Company of the positive test result. A
Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometry confirmation test is made of the same
sample originally provided by the employee or candidate.

4.4 RELEASE OF INFORMATION

As a condition of employment with the Company, all employees must agree to have
released to the Company the results of all substance screens and examinations,
including all documents generated.

4.5 PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES

Any persons working for or employed by the Company are prohibited from:
• Reporting to work or working while under the influence of or while impaired by
alcohol or any other drug or substance (whether or not legally “intoxicated”).
• Chemical dependence on alcohol or other drugs where job performance or
safety of employees is adversely affected.
• The use of illegal drugs. The term “illegal drugs” as used in this policy
includes, but is not limited to marijuana, cocaine, heroin and similar drugs
whose possession and use are prohibited by law, as well as prescription
drugs unless validly prescribed to the employee by their physician.
• The abuse of other substances whether available legally (such as cough
syrup, over-the-counter medication or drugs for which an employee has a
valid prescription) or never intended for human consumption (such as glue).
• The unauthorized possession, use, transfer, or sale of alcohol, illegal drugs,
narcotics and weapons on Company property or job sites whether located on
Company property or not.
• The use of legal drugs without a valid prescription, unauthorized possession,
transfer, or sale of legal drugs on Company property or job sites whether
located on Company property or not.
• Adulterating or switching of any blood, urine or any other sample submitted
for testing.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace

4.6 EMPLOYEES/CONTRACTORS

Company employees who, as a result of testing, are found to have positive levels of
illegal or unreported drugs, alcohol or other prohibited substances in his/her system,
regardless of when or where these substances entered his/her system, will be
considered in violation of this policy and subject to disciplinary action up to and
including termination.

Lease or contract personnel performing work for the Company, on or off the
premises, found in violation of this policy will be subject to removal from the
Company’s premises or other work sites. Furthermore, violation of this policy by
outside contractor employees may cause the cancellation of the contract between
the Company and the contractor.

4.7 NON-EMPLOYEES

Non-employees, including visitors, vendors, temporaries and/or candidates for


employment, found to be in violation of this Company policy will be subject to
removal from Company premises.

5 DISCIPLINARY ACTION

Disciplinary action for violation of this policy may include warning letters, periodic
drug screening and suspension of employment or termination of employment.

Employees shall not be terminated without a review by the Human Resources


Department, however, supervisors can remove an employee from the work site
pending an investigation.

6 TREATMENT FOR DRUG/ALCOHOL ADDICTION

Employees who use illegal drugs or who believe they may have a substance abuse
problem are encouraged to contact the Benefits Department. An employee, if not
otherwise subject to disciplinary actions, will not be disciplined if he/she voluntarily
asks for assistance before being requested to submit to testing. The Company may,
at its sole discretion, limit the number of occasions that treatment will be offered. Any
employee who has been permitted to return to work after obtaining treatment may be
required to submit to additional testing at regular intervals as a condition of
employment.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace

The Company intends, in appropriate circumstances, to help employees with


problems associated with the abuse of drugs and alcohol and to encourage their
rehabilitation. No part of this policy nor any of the related procedures is intended to
(a) affect the Company’s right to manage its workplace and discipline any of its
employees or (b) to guarantee employment, continued employment, or terms or
conditions of employment.

Employees undergoing rehabilitation or who have completed rehabilitation will be


required to abide by all other Company rules and regulations including expected
levels of job performance.

For information concerning the coverage under the Group Medical Plan Coverage
for Substance Abuse Services contact the Benefits Department.

7 EXCLUSION

The use or possession of firearms or alcohol beverages may be allowed in special


instances at land locations when approved in advance by management.

8 RESPONSIBILITY

8.1 EMPLOYEE (FULL-TIME, PART-TIME OR TEMPORARY BASIS):


• Upon new hire or rehire the employee will be required to acknowledge the
Company’s Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace policy by signing
the Drugs and Narcotics Release Notice, HQS-CDV-FM 1.03 and the Drug
Screening Release, HQS-CDV-FM 1.06.
• Upon offer of employment, a new hire or rehire the employee will be required
to submit to a drug-screening test prior to employment with the outcome of a
negative result.
• When requested, all employees will submit to a clinically accepted test that
may be deemed appropriate by the Company to detect the use or presence of
alcohol, illegal drugs, unreported medication or prescription drugs, or other
prohibited substances.
• When requested, all employees will submit to a search of personal items that
may be deemed appropriate by the Company to locate illegal or unauthorized
items.
• Employees who use illegal drugs or who believe they may have a substance
abuse problem are encouraged to contact the Benefits Department to seek
treatment for drug or alcohol addiction.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace

• While on a Company installation, all prescription medication must be


submitted to the person in charge of medical matters.
• As a condition of employment with the Company, all employees must agree
have released to the Company the results of all substance screens and
examinations, including all documents generated.

8.2 COMPANY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL:


• Conduct random testing as part of an established program.
• When necessary to locate illegal or unauthorized items, authorized personnel
should conduct searches or inspections on Company property of employees
and their personal effects.
• While on a Company installation, collect and make note of prescription
medication submitted by employees.

8.3 LEASE OR CONTRACT PERSONNEL AND THIRD PARTY:


• Lease or Contract personnel and third party will be subject to this policy to the
maximum extent practicable.

8.4 AUTHORIZED CLINICS:


• Conduct clinically accepted testing as instructed by Company Authorized
Personnel.
• When deemed necessary, conduct second drug/alcohol confirmation test on
the initial sample with every “non-negative” test result.

8.5 UNIT HUMAN RESOURCES DIRECTORS OR MANAGERS AND


MANAGER OF HUMAN RESOURCES – HEADQUARTERS
• Establish and maintain a program for random testing and a procedure to
ensure the minimum criteria are being met.
• Ensure the program implemented includes testing for cause, post incident
and random.
• Liaise with Global People Development and Legal to ensure facilities used for
testing meet required regulatory requirements.

8.6 GLOBAL BENEFITS DEPARTMENT:


• Provide assistance and information when requested by employee on the
Company’s Substance Abuse Service.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace

9 DOCUMENTATION
• Drugs and Narcotics Release Notice, HQS-CDV-FM 1.03
• Drug Screening Release, HQS-CDV-FM 1.06

10 REFERENCES

This Policy and Procedure are cited from HQS-HRM-PP-01. All questions and
feedback should be directed as such.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training

1 POLICY

Company personnel who perform work on installations or at facilities must be


provided with HSE training in accordance with the worldwide training matrix.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure all Company personnel are adequately
trained to perform their duties in the safest manner possible and to prevent incidents
or injuries.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel as defined by referenced Policies and Procedures
and office-based personnel who travel to facilities and installations to conduct work.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

The HSE training requirements are detailed in the company's Worldwide and
Business Unit Training Matrices.

Training, beyond the minimum required to assist personnel in complying with the
specific HSE Policies and Procedures, is also detailed in the Company Training
Matrix.

For the purposes of this manual, Company approved training includes Unit approved
training, unless specifically stated otherwise.

Figure A, Table of HSE Training


Location of
Subject Affected Personnel Training
Persons whose duties may
Section 3
Pathogens Awareness bring them into contact with RSTC Toolbox
Subsection 1.2
blood or bodily fluids
Advanced Medical
Periodic theoretical and
Section 3 Care Course –
practical refresher Installation Medical Person
Subsection 2.1 Worldwide Training
training.
Matrix

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training

Location of
Subject Affected Personnel Training
Principles of food-borne
All Food Handlers
illness.
Transmission of
All Catering Personnel Catering Contractor
communicable diseases
Personal hygiene All Catering Personnel
First aid for choking All Catering Personnel
Refresher training for Kitchen Hygiene
Section 3 above (At the discretion All Catering Personnel and Safety - RSTC
Subsection 3.1 of Rig Manager) Toolbox
Emergency drills/duties
Fire prevention
Fire fighting equipment
associated with the All Catering Personnel Installation Specific
galley, mess hall,
accommodation and
laundry areas
Safety Leadership
Section 4 THINK planning
All Company Personnel Training DVD –
Subsection 2.1 Process
Module 6**
Anyone prior to being Firewatcher CD-
Firewatcher Training
assigned as a Firewatcher ROM
Anyone person performing RSTC Toolbox –
Permit to Work
work that requires a PTW Permit to Work
All personnel entering confined Confined space
spaces awareness - RSTC
Confined Space
Section 4 Toolbox/Practical
Awareness
Subsection 2.2 Confined space stand-by skills – installation
person specific equipment
Proper use of the
installation or facility Responsible persons and all
specific confined space the members of the Installation Specific
rescue and retrieval Emergency Response Teams
equipment
Manufacturer
Section 4 recommendations/
Use of PPE All Company Personnel
Subsection 2.4 instructions and
Safety OJT Module
Section 4
H2S Awareness Training All Company Personnel Safety OJT Module
Subsection 3.1

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training

Location of
Subject Affected Personnel Training
Safety Leadership
Section 4
START All Company personnel Training DVD –
Subsection 5.1
Module 7**
All Company personnel who
travel to or from Company Helicopter Safety
Helicopter Safety
offshore installations by DVD-ROM
Section 4 helicopter
Subsection 5.2 All personnel driving Company
Defensive Driver vehicles and/or personal Division/Sector-
Training vehicles used for Company specific training
business
Safe working practices
Hands on training
Section 4 associated with hand All Company Personnel
provided on the rig
Subsection 5.3 tools.
Ladder Safety All Company Personnel RSTC Toolbox
Electrical OJT
Section 4 All Company personnel who
Energy Isolation Worldwide Training
Subsection 5.4 perform maintenance or repairs
Matrix
Awareness
Training - RSTC
Fall Protection Toolbox/Practical
All Company Personnel
Awareness. skills with
installation specific
equipment
Fall Protection Anyone so that one trained Unit approved
Section 4
Competent Person person is onboard at all times training
Subsection 5.5
Confined Space
Anyone so that one trained Unit approved
Rescue Competent
person is onboard at all times training
Person
Rescue From Heights Anyone so that one trained Unit approved
Competent Person person is onboard at all times training
All Company personnel that Division approved
Scaffold Training
erect scaffolding training

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training

Location of
Subject Affected Personnel Training
All Company personnel that Installation specific
Operation of winches
operate winches equipment
Any person using lifting Unit approved
Rigger Training
equipment training
All Company personnel involved
Section 4 Manriding Awareness RSTC Toolbox
in manriding activities
Subsection 5.6
Awareness - RSTC
Toolbox/Practical
All Company personnel that
Forklift Training skills-based training
operate forklifts
with installation
specific equipment
Hazardous Materials
All Company Personnel RSTC Toolbox
Awareness
Anyone so there is at least one
Section 4 Handling/Shipping of Unit approved
trained Materialsman on board
Subsection 5.7 Hazardous Materials training
at all times
Unit approved
Asbestos Awareness All Company Personnel
training
Personnel authorized by the
Electrical Safety electrical responsible person Worldwide Training
Training who perform any work on Matrix
Section 4 electrical equipment
Subsection 5.9 Manufacturer
Use of insulated tool
Instructions for
for removing persons All relevant personnel
installation specific
from live conductors
equipment
Unit approved
training that
Section 4 Training for Incident Personnel with responsibilities
supports Unit
Subsection 6.3 Analysis for incident analysis
Incident Analysis
Procedure
**The Safety Leadership Training DVD is available to personnel and supervisors as a tool
to ensure understanding of the Company’s expectations. The preferred method to utilize
this tool is supervisory led discussions and/or hands on training at the job site. It is not
intended as a computer based training module.

4.2 TRAINING MATERIALS

Company approved training materials must be available to meet the requirements of


the Health and Safety Manual.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL COMPANY PERSONNEL:


• Complete HSE training as required by the Worldwide Training Matrix.

5.2 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT:


• Ensure Company approved training materials are available to meet the
requirements of the Health and Safety Manual.

6 DOCUMENTATION

See HQS-HRM-PP-01 Human Resources Policies and Procedures.

Refer to the Transocean Intranet Training Website for further documentation


associated with this policy.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

1 POLICY

A suitable plan with a risk assessment and appropriate controls must be


confirmed in place, prior to all tasks.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that hazards are identified and risks are
effectively managed and controlled at all times.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel that work at any Company installation or facility.

All Company personnel must incorporate the THINK Planning Process into all tasks
performed, whether working individually or in teams.

4 PROCEDURE

The THINK Planning Process is utilized for Risk Management of all activities and
tasks carried out throughout the Company.

The THINK Planning Process for Risk Management consists of the following steps:
• Correctly identifying the hazards (What If?) and associated risks
(consequences and likelihood) involved in an activity or task through risk
assessment.
• Utilizing knowledge and experience to demonstrate risks are as low as
reasonably practicable (ALARP) by applying the appropriate level of risk
assessment (THINK planning level).
• Determining the controls (policies, procedures, standards and work practices)
required to ensure the risk to people, the environment and property is as low
as reasonably practicable throughout the task or activity:
1. Preventive controls – prevent an incident by reducing the likelihood an
incident will occur.
2. Mitigating controls – reduce the consequences of an incident if
preventive controls fail or are not effective.
• Communicating the risks and controls to personnel who may be affected.
• Anticipating possible deviations from the THINK plan by identifying changes,
conditions and inactions (What If?).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

It is essential for managers, supervisors and individuals to demonstrate risks are


ALARP prior to performing activities or tasks. Verifying controls (preventive and
mitigating) are in place and effective helps ensure identified risks are maintained as
low as reasonably practicable.

Personnel must have the necessary knowledge, skills, and experience to perform
the activities or tasks assigned to them, including any activities to control risks. This
cannot be determined without a correctly developed THINK plan.

All Company personnel must be trained in the THINK Planning Process. Supervisors
must take an active role in the training to ensure effective understanding. Tools are
available to assist supervisors with training and implementation of the THINK
process on the “Transocean Safety Leadership Training” DVD Module 6. Effective
understanding of the process cannot be accomplished from employee-computer
interface. Supervisors must utilize the information from the DVD to coach, mentor
and monitor the effectiveness of their employees’ THINK plans. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)

4.1 DEMONSTRATING RISKS ARE ALARP

Company personnel reduce risks to as low as reasonably practicable by completing


a qualitative risk assessment at the appropriate THINK planning level and applying
appropriate controls available in the Company management system (policies
procedures and standards), site specific work practices, and regulatory
requirements.

All THINK plans include the requirement to reduce risks to as low as reasonably
practicable. Reducing risks to as low as reasonably practicable requires personnel to
consider the various additional risk reduction measures (additional controls) and
determine if the effort and cost of those measures justify the additional amount of
risk reduction obtained.

4.2 LEVELS OF RISK MANAGEMENT

Figure A visibly represents the levels of the THINK Planning Process available for
identifying, assessing and controlling risk through effective planning:
• THINK Planning Process - Individual
• THINK Planning Process - Verbal
• THINK Planning Process - Written
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

• Task Specific THINK Procedure


• Task Risk Assessment (TRA)
• HAZOP / HAZID (Hazard Operability Study/Hazard Identification)
• Major Accident Hazard Risk Assessment (MAHRA)
• Safety Case
• Operations Integrity Case (OIC)

The THINK Planning Process includes hazard identification and provides various
levels of risk assessment to demonstrate risks are as low as reasonably practicable.
The level of risk assessment applied is dependent upon the:
• number of people involved in the assessment
• knowledge, experience, and skill of the people participating in the assessment
and developing the plan
• criticality and complexity of the task or activity
• potential negative consequences that may occur during the task or activity.

Higher levels of THINK planning used within the Company include Task Risk
Assessments (TRAs), HAZOPs/HAZIDs, Major Accident Hazard Risk Assessments
(MAHRAs), Safety Cases, and Operations Integrity Cases (OICs). These levels of
THINK planning provide a higher level of detail to ensure risks are demonstrated to
be as low as reasonably practicable. Demonstrating risks are as low as reasonably
practicable for tasks, activities and hazardous operations is accomplished through
risk assessment and effective application of controls represented by the Company
Management system and site specific work practices.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Figure A, LEVELS OF RISK MANAGEMENT

OIC

Safety
Case

MAHRA

Increasing complexity and severity of risk


HAZOP/ SHORE
HAZID BASED
RESOURCES
Task Risk
Assessment Offshore

START Task Specific THINK START


Procedure
THINK
Planning Process
(written)
THINK
Planning Process
(verbal)
THINK
Planning Process
(individual)

START

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

4.3 THINK PLANNING PROCESS

The steps of the THINK Planning Process are:

• PLAN What is the desired/required result? How will the


activity and task be performed, in what order and
steps? Who has the necessary skills and experience
to safely perform the tasks and steps? When are the
tasks and steps required to be performed?

• INSPECT What tools, equipment or work areas require


inspection? Who will do the onsite inspection? What
were the results of the onsite inspection?

• IDENTIFY (What If?) What hazards are people, environment or


equipment exposed to? What are the potential
causes and consequences related to these hazards?
How likely are they to happen? What are the risks
involved and are you able to clearly demonstrate
they are as low as reasonably practicable?

• COMMUNICATE What is required to be communicated regarding the


hazards identified? With whom do we need to
communicate? Have the risks been communicated to
the appropriate level of authority and supervision?

• CONTROL What controls (procedures, work practices or


resources) are required to reduce the identified risks
to as low as reasonably practicable? Have appropriate
controls to reduce the likelihood of an incident
occurring (Preventive) and reduce the consequences
(Mitigating) of an incident occurring been effectively
implemented? Have the appropriate controls from
the Company Management System been clearly
identified and applied? Are personnel involved
constantly aware?

Creation of an effective THINK plans requires individuals or groups to be competent


to perform the task and ask themselves:
• Have I identified the changes, conditions, and inactions (What If?) that could
lead to possible negative consequences?
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

• Did I consider the likelihood that the negative consequences may occur?
• Even though the risk in my plan is within my risk tolerance, have I
demonstrated it to be as low as reasonably practicable?
• Do I understand what I need to do to recognize and manage change?

The START observation card can be used at the work site as a prompt to assist in
developing effective THINK plans.

4.3.1 RULES OF TASK PLANNING

When developing your THINK plan, you must follow the rules for task planning. By
following the rules of task planning, you ensure that you and your team have the
knowledge, personal experience, skill, and authority necessary to develop an
effective THINK Plan, manage change, and successfully complete your task without
incident and injury. You also determine which approach for managing change will be
applied while carrying out the THINK Plan.

The rules of task planning are:


• The plan, and all its steps, must comply with the Company’s Management
System procedures. You must meet the expectations communicated by your
supervisors and described in the procedures.
• You must have the knowledge of the steps needed to perform the task safely
and correctly. You must understand the steps needed to complete the task.
• You must have the personal experience to anticipate what should happen
next and what could go wrong.
• You must have the skills to be able to perform the steps of the task safely and
correctly.
• You must have the approval authority to plan and perform the task before
proceeding.

4.3.2 THINK PLANNING PROCESS – INDIVIDUAL

The THINK Planning Process will be most widely applied at the individual THINK
plan level to assist individuals in planning what they are about to do. Individuals
must use the THINK Planning Process to Plan, Inspect, Identify, Communicate and
Control all tasks and associated hazards and risks. Individuals must apply START
monitoring during execution of the planned task in order to recognize any deviation
from the THINK plan, which may create new hazards and risks.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

4.3.3 THINK PLANNING PROCESS – VERBAL

The verbal THINK Planning Process is used when more than one person is involved
in a task. Joint participation in developing the THINK plan is required. Adequate
communication between the personnel involved must ensure all aspects of the
activities, tasks, risks and controls in the THINK plan are reviewed and understood.

When each person involved fully understands and agrees on the THINK plan and
the necessary controls are implemented, the task may proceed.

4.3.4 THINK PLANNING PROCESS – WRITTEN

The written THINK plan is provided for supervisors to manage risk associated with
tasks carried out by their crew using the Rules of Task Planning and by:
• Creating experiences that provide learning opportunities.
• Ensuring their people practice effective individual and verbal THINK planning
skills on the job.
• Reinforcing the practice of hazard identification (What If?) and assessment on
the job.
• Satisfying themselves people have learned and developed necessary skills to
carry out their job in a safe and responsible manner.
• Understanding and implementing available preventive and mitigating controls.
• Identifying the hazards and assessing the risks (What If?).
• Understanding what is needed to anticipate, recognize, and manage change,

The supervisor is responsible for the quality and completion of the written THINK
plan.

The THINK Process Checklist must be utilized and completed to ensure effective
written THINK plans are created. See Figure E2.

The START observation card can be used at the work site as an additional tool to
prompt and assist in the development of written THINK plans.

If appropriate, the planning stage for development of a written THINK plan may take
place in an area other than the work site. The work site must be visited for the
Inspect, Identify, Communicate and Control stages. Visitation of the work site allows
the personnel assessing the risks and developing the plan to:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

• Get a clear understanding of the environment including the layout of and safe
and possible unsafe conditions in the area.
• Identify hazards, actual and potential, and their consequences.
• Inspect tools and equipment in the area and those that will be or may be
required for the task.
• Communicate with people directly and indirectly involved with the planned
task who may be affected by the task.
• Make an initial plan of control measures required to be implemented for the
task, people and work area.

4.3.5 TASK SPECIFIC THINK PROCEDURE

Task Specific THINK Procedures are utilized to execute tasks that have been
identified to have a higher level of criticality, complexity, or risk, based on the
hazards identified for the tasks within the activity. Task Specific THINK Procedures
document the safest and most effective way to perform a task, incorporating the
experience of personnel involved.

The Task Specific THINK Procedure is comprised of task steps, critical task steps or
both.

A critical task step is a task step that, if not performed correctly, can cause
significant loss (severity rating of 15 or higher, see Section 4 Subsection 6.3) and a
likelihood probability of Conceivable, Possible, or Likely. See Figure B, Risk
Classification Matrix, for results marked with “†”.

Task Specific THINK Procedures represent Level 3 Installation Specific Procedures


that are the basis for establishing effective and reliable preventive and mitigating
controls for all task steps. The personnel at each installation or facility must
determine the necessary controls (including ones in the Company Management
System) for each task step in a Task Specific THINK Procedure. See Figure F for
Task Specific THINK Procedure format options.

Task Specific THINK Procedures are required for all hazardous operations as
determined by the installation’s Operation Integrity Case.

All crew members involved in or affected by the task must participate in the
development of the Task Specific THINK Procedure. This assists them in identifying
hazards and incorporating controls to reduce the risk of injury or incident.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Application of a Task Specific THINK Procedure requires individuals or groups to:


• Review and discuss the Task Specific THINK Procedure prior to commencing
the task.
• Confirm the control measures for all task steps within the procedure.
• Ensure personnel understand their responsibilities to carry out the task steps.
• Understand the hazards and the consequences of those hazards.
• Ensure the expected results are understood prior to commencing the activity.
• Determine individual requirements through their own individual THINK plans
after understanding the Task Specific THINK Procedure.

If it is determined at the installation/facility level that a Task Specific THINK


Procedure needs to be developed or an existing one revised, a written THINK plan
is required for the task to proceed until such time as the new or revised Task
Specific THINK Procedure is approved.

Task Specific THINK Procedures require initial review and approval from the OIM
and final approval of the Rig Manager. This approval process is required prior to the
Task Specific THINK Procedures being included in the company management
system at the installation level (Level 3 Installation Specific Procedures),

4.4 TASK RISK ASSESSMENT

The Task Risk Assessment provides a more detailed risk assessment to


demonstrate that risks related to specific task steps are as low as reasonably
practicable. The potential consequences for all critical task steps must be clearly
identified in the assessment so existing control measures can be verified and/or new
control measures implemented to reduce the identified risks to as low as reasonably
practicable.

A Task Risk Assessment is required for all exemption requests and to assess critical
task steps in Task Specific THINK Procedures. (See Section 1.5)

The Task Risk Assessment is available to provide a higher level risk assessment of
the critical task steps listed in Task Specific THINK Procedures or written THINK
plans.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Figure B, Risk Matrix

Severity (consequence) Rating


Personnel Loss of Containment Property Damage
A First Aid Case Contained Onboard < $1000
B Medical Treatment Case < 0.5 bbl $1000 >< $20,000
C Restricted Work Case 0.5 bbl >< 1 bbl $20,000 >< $50,000
D Serious Injury Case – 1 bbl >< 5 bbl OR < 1 ton $50,000 >< $500,000
duration < 6 months
E Serious Injury Case – 5 bbl >< 100 bbl OR 1 ton >< $500,000 >< $1M
duration > 6 months 20 tons
F Fatality > 100 bbl OR > 20 tons > $1M

Probability (likelihood) Rating


5 Likely - The team has knowledge of a similar event in a similar situation.
4 Possible - Not certain to happen but an additional change may result in an incident.
3 Conceivable - Would require failures of multiple systems and controls.
2 Rare - A combination of unanticipated changes would be required.
1 Not credible - The team has no knowledge of the event occurring in similar situations.

NOTE: To rank Probabilities and Severities, assume existing


controls/safeguards (policies, procedures, work practices, supervision) are in
place and functioning effectively.
RISK CLASSIFICATION MATRIX

5 L M M H H† H†
PROBABILITY

4 L M M M H† H†
3 L L M M M† H†
2 L L L M M M
1 L L L L L M
A B C D E F
SEVERITY

L LOW RISK
Task may proceed and should be monitored. If possible, implement measures
to reduce the risk even further.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

M MEDIUM RISK - OIM must be notified.


Task may proceed but should be carefully monitored and re-assessed at
regular intervals to establish if additional measures or controls are required.

H HIGH RISK
Task must not proceed. Implement and risk-assess alternative methods for
performing the task.

† TSTP Task steps with this risk require a Task Risk Assessment.

See Figure G in the documentation section of this procedure for an example of a


completed Task Risk Assessment worksheet.

4.5 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (HAZID)

A HAZID study is the structured, systematic risk assessment of an activity in order to


identify the hazards associated with it. For example, the activity of drilling a high
pressure/high temperature well would normally be split into a number of smaller
tasks. Each task should be reviewed in turn, asking, "What could go wrong?" or
"What if this happened?"

4.6 HAZARD AND OPERABILITY (HAZOP)

A HAZOP study is used to identify HSE hazards and operability issues for
equipment or systems to reduce risks to ALARP. HAZOPs are primarily used during
the design stage.

A HAZOP team should consist of personnel familiar with the equipment and systems
and be lead by a facilitator trained and competent in the HAZOP process.

4.7 MAJOR AND OTHER WORKPLACE HAZARDS

Transocean has three processes to provide assurance that Major Hazards are
effectively managed: the Major Accident Hazard Risk Assessment (MAHRA), the
HSE (or Safety) Case, and the Operation Integrity Case (OIC). Every vessel in the
Transocean fleet must have a current version of a MAHRA, Safety Case, or OIC. As
MAHRAs and Safety/HSE Cases require review and updating, the OIC process
should be used.

A Major Accident Hazard Risk Assessment (MAHRA) shows that major hazards
have been identified, the risk associated with those hazards has been qualitatively
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

assesses and that the preventive and mitigating controls necessary to reduce the
risk to ALARP have been identified. The MAHRA identifies risks from three
perspectives: by compartment, by system, and the installation as a whole. The
MAHRA relies upon the knowledge and experience of the installation’s personnel.

A Safety Case is a document that contains a summary of the details of the


installation, installation management and Company safety management system.
Additionally, it shows the Company has identified, evaluated and analyzed all major
accident hazards that may affect the installation and has in place appropriate means
for controlling risks associated with those hazards including the procedures and in-
place systems for evacuation, escape and rescue from the installation.

A Quantitative Risk Assessment may be used as part of the Safety Case risk
assessment. Its use must be suitable and sufficient depending on the level of risk
and local requirements.

The Safety Case is used to demonstrate major HSE risks are as low as reasonably
practicable to meet regulatory requirements in the United Kingdom, Norway,
Denmark, Netherlands and Australia.

The Operation Integrity Case provides assurance that major and other workplace
hazards are identified, the risks associated with these hazards are assessed, and
that the necessary controls are in place to reduce the risk to as low as reasonably
practicable. Each identified control is assigned a responsible person. The OIC
process is based upon (and referenced to) the Company Management System, so
does not rely solely on the knowledge and experience of the personnel involved. For
further information on the OIC process see HQS-HSE-ST-01.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL COMPANY PERSONNEL:


• Participate and incorporate the THINK Planning Process into all tasks
performed, whether working individually or in teams.
• Participate in development and review of Task Specific THINK Procedures.
• Ensure appropriate preventive and mitigating controls are in place to address
the risks which are present in all tasks.

5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Ensure their crews are trained in the use of the THINK Planning Process.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

• Be responsible for the quality and use of the THINK plans created by their
crews.
• Lead the THINK Planning Process daily.
• Participate in the development and continuous review of Task Specific THINK
Procedures.
• Participate in development and review of Task Risk Assessments (TRAs).
• Ensure appropriate Company Management System Procedures are correctly
implemented and applied (preventive and mitigating controls) in THINK plans.

5.3 OIM:
• Review Task Specific THINK Procedures to identify critical tasks and
determine if a Task Risk Assessment is required to demonstrate the risks are
as low as reasonably practicable.
• Review Task Specific THINK Procedures, offer initial approval and submit to
Rig Manager for final approval.
• Review and approve THINK Task Risk Assessments and those related to
Exemption and forward to the Rig Manager for approval.
• Monitor the participation and use of THINK planning on the installation.
• Ensure appropriate Company Management System Procedures are correctly
implemented and applied (preventive and mitigating controls) in THINK plans.
• Ensure that a list detailing personnel responsible for HSE critical activities is
documented, maintained and communicated.

5.4 RIG MANAGER:


• Review Task Specific THINK Procedures to identify critical tasks and
determine if a Task Risk Assessment is required to demonstrate the risks are
ALARP.
• Review specific Task Specific THINK Procedures and provide final approval.
• Review and approve THINK Task Risk Assessments as required and those
related to Exemption requests.
• Ensure that an applicable MAHRA, OIC, or Safety Case has been completed.
• Ensure that an approved procedure for the review of the installation’s
MAHRA, OIC, or Safety Case is established.
• Ensure adequate resources are provided so preventive and mitigating
controls which have been identified on the installation can be put in place.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

• Ensure Company Management System Procedures are correctly applied as


preventive and mitigating controls in THINK plans.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The forms indicated below are included in the manual and are not to be modified
from their original format. These forms have been developed by Corporate HSE
Services and are a requirement of this policy. These forms must be reproduced and
made available to all installations/facilities by their Division/Unit offices. Forward any
suggested improvements to these forms using the HSE Feedback form.
• Written THINK Plan (Figure E1)
(Must be filed in the installation/facility files for at least 90 days.)
• THINK Process Checklist (Figure E2)
(Must be filed in the installation/facility files for at least 90 days.)

The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples
are not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of
the examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Task Specific THINK Procedure (Figure F)
(Copies must be made available to personnel and retained until newer
procedures or assessments supercede them.)
• Task Risk Assessment Worksheet - Front (Figure G1)
(Copies must be made available to personnel and retained until newer
procedures or assessments supercede them.)
• Task Risk Assessment Worksheet – Back (Figure G2)
(Copies must be made available to personnel and retained until newer
procedures or assessments supercede them.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Figure E1, Written THINK Plan

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Figure E2, THINK Process Checklist

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Figure F, Example Task Specific THINK Procedure

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Figure G1, Example Task Risk Assessment Worksheet – Front

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process

Figure G2, Example Task Risk Assessment Worksheet – Back

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

1 POLICY

All installations and facilities must have a Permit to Work system in place that
safely controls hazardous operations.

All personnel must be trained prior to using the Permit to Work system.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that authorized personnel, who are
knowledgeable of the hazardous operation to be performed, have planned the work,
inspected the work site, identified the hazards and communicated the suitable
control measures to be taken to prevent the occurrence of an incident using the
Permit to Work System.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel who work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

A Permit to Work is not required for every job. Consider other forms of control
measures, such as the THINK Planning Process, Energy Isolations, and so on
before generating a permit.

4.1 GENERAL

Responsible persons have designated areas of the installation/facility and relevant


equipment in their spheres of responsibility. A list of the responsible people (by
position), their designated areas of responsibility and equipment must be posted at
the administration site. They are responsible for ensuring all control measures and
procedures are in place, prior to signing the Permit to Work.

4.2 OBJECTIVES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM


• Ensure that proper authorization is given to carry out specific work at a certain
time and place.
• Ensure that personnel carrying out the work clearly understand the nature of
the job, the hazards involved and the limitations on the work and time.
• Specify the control measures to be taken before starting the work, during the
work and after completing the work.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

• Ensure the OIM or designee is fully aware of and approves the work to be
done.
• Provide a record showing the type of work and indicate that a responsible
person is assigned.
• Provide a procedure for determining times when work must be suspended.
• Provide procedures for other activities that may interact.
• Provide a formal hand-over procedure if work overlaps a shift change.
• Provide a formal hand-back procedure to ensure that any part of the
installation affected by the work is returned to a safe condition and ready for
reinstatement.
• Provide a central display of open or suspended permits.

4.3 VALIDITY

The maximum validity of any Permit to Work is 24 hours. If the work is not complete
within 24 hours, close the existing Permit to Work and initiate a new one following all
steps listed in this procedure.

4.4 HAZARDOUS OPERATIONS

Hazardous operations that require a permit include, but are not limited to, the
following situations:

4.4.1 HOT WORK

Hot work includes welding and oxygen/acetylene cutting, electrical work, grinding
(fixed or portable), needle gunning and all work using other types of ignition sources.

With regards to hot work, hazardous operations that require a permit include but are
not limited to:
• Welding and oxygen/acetylene cutting anywhere on the installation except in
the approved designated safe welding area.
• All hot work in any designated hazardous area or in any area where an
explosive gas mixture is likely to occur in normal operations.
• Any time an electrical apparatus cannot be made dead (for any reason) and is
considered hazardous to life.
• All use of open flames such as burning garbage or use of an outdoor cooking
grill.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

As a minimum, the THINK planning process must be used for all other hot work to
determine if a Permit to Work is required or what other controls need to be put in
place.

Due to the risk of fires or explosions during hot work, ALL alternative methods of
accomplishing the job must be considered prior to hot work being authorized.

Aspects that must be considered during any hot work include at least the following:
• Well operations or situations, well testing, and simultaneous operations.
• Back sides of walls, bulkheads, decks, floors, deck heads, and ceilings.
• Areas adjacent to the work, such as fuel tanks or paint lockers.
• Combustible materials stored in the area (must be removed or protected).
• Vapors present or generated by the hot work.

A system must be in place so that all hot work is suspended and relevant ignition
sources confirmed shut down when circumstances dictate.

Hot work must not be performed on any drum or other container that previously
contained hazardous materials.

A. WELDING AND OXYGEN/ACETYLENE CUTTING

Only personnel authorized by the OIM are permitted to use welding or


oxygen/acetylene cutting equipment.

Welding performed on structural members, high-pressure lines and lifting appliances


must be performed only by an appropriately certified (coded) welder.

A designated safe welding area must be established by conducting a risk


assessment. Whenever possible, welding and oxygen/acetylene cutting operations
must be performed within the designated safe welding area. A Permit to Work may
not be required in the designated safe welding area.

All designated safe welding areas must be approved by the Division Manager.

Adequate ventilation must be provided for fumes and dust generated by welding and
cutting operations. If adequate ventilation cannot be accomplished, suitable
respiratory protection must be worn.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

When welding or cutting, the welder must wear appropriate clothing/PPE, including:
• Welding shield and hardhat combined, or a hand-held shield and a hard hat
with suitably shaded transparent eyepiece approved for welding.
• Shaded eye protection when cutting.
• Dry leather welding gloves.
• Leather aprons (where appropriate).
• A long sleeve garment approved by the manufacturer as suitable for welding.
• Heat resistant, Kevlar or similar material Company approved full-body
harness, when required. Shock absorbing lanyards must be protected from
sparks and slag while in use during welding or cutting operations.

Clothing, particularly gloves, must be kept as dry as possible to assure some


protection against an electric shock.

Screens or other effective means must be used to protect persons who may be
exposed to harmful radiation or sparks from electric arc welding.

Welder's assistants and fire watchers must take adequate precautions to protect
against welding flash.

All welding cables must be fully insulated and maintained.

All grounding connections must be secured to eliminate sparking.

Welding machines must be switched off when not in use.

B. FIREWATCHER

A firewatcher must be assigned and clearly identifiable (for example wearing an


orange vest) for any welding or cutting operation performed outside the designated
safe welding area, and have no other duties while so assigned.

Only personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company Firewatcher OJT in
the Safety OJT Module can be authorized by the OIM to be assigned as a
firewatcher. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

The firewatcher must wear long sleeves made of a flame-retardant material.

The firewatcher is responsible for carrying out the following duties:

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

• Assist the welder in inspecting and preparing the work site before beginning
work.
• Ensure that adequate fire-fighting equipment is readily available and
familiarize themselves with its operation and what to do in the event of a fire.
• Sign the Permit to Work before beginning the work.
• Continually monitor the work site and adjacent areas for hazards that may
affect the welder or that are created by the hot work.
• Remain at the site for a suitable length of time after the welder has completed
his assignment, watching for any indication of burning or smoldering.
• Inspect and re-inspect the site where possible smoldering may occur for a
minimum of 30 minutes after completion of any welding or cutting operation.
• Notify the welder of intention to leave the work area so that a hand-over of
responsibility to a suitable replacement can be carried out.
• Take adequate precautions to protect against welding flash.

4.4.2 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

Confined spaces are defined as a tank, mud pit, tunnel or similar spaces where
there is a danger of explosion, lack of oxygen or the presence of toxic gases. All
spaces that are not normally lit, not normally ventilated and not normally manned are
also considered confined spaces.

All reasonable and practicable options to perform the task that do not require
confined space entry must be ruled out and controls must be in place before
proceeding.

A Permit to Work must be completed for any confined space or tank entry and a
copy must be posted outside the area to be entered.

A. TRAINING

Any personnel entering confined spaces must be trained in the hazards of confined
space entry and use of the equipment that must be utilized. This training (See
Section 4 Subsection 1.3) and practical demonstration must be given in a formal
manner and fully documented.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

Responsible persons and the Emergency Response Teams must be trained and
exercised in the proper use of the installation or facility specific confined space
rescue and retrieval equipment. The training and drills must be documented. (See
Section 4 Subsection 3.2)

B. EQUIPMENT

The following equipment must be available for confined space entries:


• For work within confined space:
1. A portable gas detector capable of continuously monitoring the oxygen
content, H2S content and Lower Explosive Limit (L.E.L.) complete with
accessories to allow remote detection.
2. An explosion-proof air exhaust fan.
3. A minimum of two explosion-proof portable lights.
4. Explosion-proof radio communication set.
5. Appropriate warning signs and barricades.
• For vertical confined space entry over 6 feet 7 inches (2 meters):
1. A portable tripod with a combined fall arrestor/retrieving winch or
similar system.
2. One Company approved full body harness per person.
• For rescue within confined space:
1. One 30-minute Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) per
rescue team member.
2. A stretcher that allows rescue of an injured person.

C. VENTILATION OF CONFINED SPACE

Before completely removing the fastening devices on a confined space, the internal
pressure must be checked and vented if necessary.

The atmosphere must be sampled for oxygen levels and combustible gas using a
portable gas detector. If levels of toxic, inert, or combustible gases or oxygen are
detected that present dangerous and hazardous conditions, the area must not be
entered until measures have been taken that render the space safe.

All equipment used for testing purposes must be maintained and calibrated.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

Persons who are competent should carry out testing. Those carrying out the testing
should also be capable of interpreting the results and taking any necessary action.
Testing must be conducted for each re-entry.

There are substantial risks if the concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere varies
significantly from normal, 20.9%. For example, oxygen enrichment increases
flammability of clothing and other combustible materials. Oxygen deficiency induces
impairment to personnel.

Atmosphere below 19.5% or above 22% oxygen by volume must not be entered
except for emergency rescue purposes and then only when personnel are equipped
with positive pressure respirators.

D. CONFINED SPACE STAND-BY PERSON

A stand-by person must be assigned and clearly identified for any confined space
entry. A stand-by person must have no other duties while so assigned.

Only personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company's confined space
awareness training can be authorized by the OIM to be assigned as a stand-by
person. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

The stand-by person is responsible for carrying out the following duties:
• Assist the competent person to sample the atmosphere for oxygen and
combustible gas levels.
• Ensure adequate rescue equipment is readily available and familiarize
themselves with its operation and what to do in the event of an emergency.
• Sign the Permit to Work before beginning work.
• Remain at the confined space entry site while any personnel are inside.
• Continually monitor the confined space entrance and adjacent areas for
hazards that may affect the personnel working in the confined space.
• Prevent unauthorized entry.
• Maintain contact with a manned control point (control room, radio room, and
so on) and with the personnel in the confined space.
• Maintain a tally of the persons inside the confined space.
• Notify the person in charge of carrying out the work of their intention to leave
the work area, so that a hand over of responsibility to a suitable replacement
can be carried out.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

• Immediately raise the alarm if there are indications (through the agreed
system of communication or otherwise) of the personnel within the confined
space being negatively affected by the atmosphere. After raising the alarm,
under no circumstances should the stand-by person stationed at the entrance
attempt to enter the confined space before additional help has arrived.

E. CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

For all confined space entries, sounding must be done before entering. In case of a
doubtful sounding or suspected presence of fluid that presents a drowning hazard,
personnel must wear a floatation device.

An adequate system of communication must be agreed upon and tested by all


involved to ensure that those entering the space can keep in touch with the stand-by
person stationed at the entrance.

The time of opening or closing a confined space and entry or exit of personnel must
be recorded at the manned control point (control room, radio room, and so on.).

The atmosphere must be continuously monitored with a portable gas detector to


verify that the atmosphere remains gas free and that an acceptable oxygen level is
maintained.

Air movers or blowers must be used for venting and to provide a continuous supply
of fresh air while the work is in progress, unless sufficient airflow is obtained through
a free flow process. Air movers or blowers must be installed in such a position that
the fresh air intakes do not draw in fumes or vapors.

Provisions must be made for ready exits and entrances. Tanks, vessels or other
confined spaces having openings or manholes in the side as well as in the top must
be entered from the side when practicable. The use of a safety line to indicate the
direct route to and from the work site must be considered.

Fuel tanks and crude oil tanks must not be entered without Rig Manager approval.

No source of ignition may be introduced into a confined space where flammable


vapors or gases may be present.

When working in confined spaces, all pipelines discharging into that space must be
closed with blind flanges, plugs or valves and energy isolation signs and tags
posted. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.4)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

There must be at least two rescue team personnel in the confined space and one
rescue team person outside the confined space equipped with approved respiratory
equipment for all rescue situations in a confined space requiring respiratory
equipment.

F. HOT WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

In addition to the above and the hot work procedures, (See 4.4.1) personnel must
adhere to the following procedures.

If a high level of combustible gases or oxygen enriched atmosphere (above 20.9%)


is detected, the area must be naturally aired or ventilated and a new test conducted.
Repeat the airing/ventilation and testing procedure until the test indicates the area is
safe for hot work.

If torch cutting or welding is carried out on pipelines passing through confined


spaces, they must be isolated, purged if necessary, and energy isolation signs and
tags posted prior to the hot work starting. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.4)

One of the highest risks from using gas within a confined space is the accumulation
of gas due to leakage from the cylinders or hoses. To reduce this risk, gas cylinders
should not be taken into confined spaces. Where it is necessary to take gas
cylinders into confined spaces, periodic gas checks must be made in the vicinity of
the cylinders and always prior to recommencing work after a break. The cylinders
must be removed immediately on completion of the task.

When hoses are run into a confined space from gas cylinders outside the confined
space, all hoses and fittings must be disconnected from the gas cylinders or
removed from the confined space during extended breaks.

4.4.3 WORK ABOVE OPEN WATER

All work carried out over open water, outside the handrails and anywhere there is a
danger of falling into the sea.

4.4.4 TRANSFERS TO/FROM SUPPLY AND CREW BOATS (SEE SECTION 4


SUBSECTION 5.2, BOAT OPERATIONS)

A Permit to Work is required whenever personnel are transferred to or from a supply


or crew boat by a personnel transfer system, such as a personnel basket or Frog.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

A Task Specific THINK Procedure must be developed and utilized when performing
this task.

4.4.5 WORK ON SUPPLY BOATS

The Company strongly discourages allowing any Company personnel to work


on supply or crew boats. If, in an exceptional circumstance, personnel work
on supply or crew boats, only experienced and competent people (as
determined by the OIM) are permitted to perform the task and controls must
include the use of a written THINK plan.

4.4.6 WORK WITH EXPLOSIVES (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION 5.7)

Any time explosives are removed from their certified shipping containers.

4.4.7 WORK WITH RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION


5.7)

Any time radioactive materials are removed from their certified shipping containers.

4.4.8 DIVING

All manned diving operations carried out from the installation or where there is an
interface between manned diving operations and the installation.

4.4.9 ENERGY SOURCES (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION 5.4)

The OIM or designee must determine if a Permit to Work is an additional


requirement when an isolation certificate is issued for maintenance or repair of a
system or component containing energy. In some cases, the work is only hazardous
because of the energy. When effective isolation is achieved, the work may no longer
be hazardous because the energy source (such as electrical energy, hydraulic
pressure or air pressure) has been removed.

4.4.10 MAINTENANCE OF CRITICAL SAFETY SYSTEMS

Work that affects the state of readiness of the installation's critical safety systems.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

4.4.11 ASBESTOS WORK (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION 5.7)

Work involving the cutting, drilling or other disturbance of material that contains
asbestos.

4.4.12 SPECIAL STRAPS (WEBBING SLINGS) (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION


5.6)

Work involving the use of slings made of synthetic fiber may be carried out in special
cases (for example, lifting of chromium pipes, special drill pipe, engine cylinder
heads, and so on).

4.4.13 DANGEROUS LIQUIDS (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION 5.7)

All work involved in the mixing and/or pumping of concentrated acid and other such
dangerous liquids.

4.4.14 MANRIDING (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION 5.6, PARAGRAPH 4.4)

At the discretion of the OIM a Permit to Work may be required for certain complex
operations.

4.4.15 PRESSURE TESTING (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION 5.4)

Pressure testing or maintenance on equipment that contains or may contain residual


pressure.

4.4.16 OVERBOARD DUMP VALVES

All work requiring the opening or potential opening of any overboard dump valve.

4.4.17 OTHER

Other work not covered by the previously mentioned situations where the OIM, a
supervisor or any risk assessment identifies the requirement of a Permit to Work to
control risks.

Any work where equipment that is not intrinsically safe is used in a hazardous area.
For example: PDA, flash light, camera and so on.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

4.5 DISPLAY OF PERMITS

A copy of the Permit to Work form must be displayed at the work site.

4.6 SUSPENSION OF PERMITS

A permit must be suspended for any of the following reasons:


• Activation of the general alarm or instructions on the PA system. The permit
administrator must be notified immediately of the cessation of work. As soon
as it is safe and practicable, return all copies of suspended permits to the
Permit System Administrator to keep until reactivation is allowed.
• At any time when any person feels that the circumstances have or may
change, such as when the control measures in place are not adequate or
other activities going on could cause additional hazards.
• If the control measures in place are not adequate.

4.7 REACTIVATION OF PERMITS

Reactivation of the work must take place only after the responsible person confirms
that all the control measures are in place.

4.8 HANDOVER PROCESS

When a permit is to be carried over to another shift, both the responsible person and
the person in charge of the work must ensure that the work is understood and the
control measures are in place. The OIM and OIM Designee must ensure they are
aware of all open permits at commencement of their daily tour.

If the responsible person or the person in charge of the work change, both must sign
the permit confirming that the work is understood and the controls are in place.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

Two different signatures must always be on the Permit to Work. The same person
must not sign as both the Responsible Person and the Person in Charge of the
Work. This does not exclude the OIM or designee from acting as the Responsible
Person.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

5.1 PERSON IN CHARGE OF THE WORK (WORK DETAILED ON PERMIT TO


WORK):
• Request the Permit.
• Ensure that specified control measures are complied with throughout the
Permit to Work operation.
• Provide onsite supervision or carry out the work personally.
• Complete all relevant sections of the Permit to Work form.
• Route completed form to those in the approval chain of responsibility.
• Upon activation of the general alarm, immediately notify the permit
administrator of the cessation of work and, as soon as safe and practicable,
return the original copy of the Permit to Work to the permit administration site.

5.2 RESPONSIBLE PERSON (RESPONSIBLE PERSON AND PERSON IN


CHARGE OF THE WORK MUST NOT BE THE SAME PERSON):
• Ensure hazards associated with the proposed work have been identified.
• Identify the necessary steps to ensure the safety of the site or installation.
• Examine the work site with the person in charge of the work.
• Ensure the person in charge of the work is made aware of the control
measures to be taken, particular equipment to be used, and procedures to be
followed during the Permit to Work period.
• Ensure the control measures are implemented before work commences and
that they remain effective while the Permit to Work is in force.
• Ensure activities requiring a Permit to Work that may interact or affect one
another are clearly cross-referenced.
• Ensure the Permit to Work specifies actions to be taken if the work has to be
suspended.
• Ensure the work site is re-examined before work is restarted after having
been suspended.
• Examine the work site when the work is completed to ensure that the area is
in a safe condition.
• Ensure the hand-over procedures are properly followed if the work lasts more
than one shift.
• Authorize work and isolations in their area or system of authority. (The OIM
must define these areas.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

5.3 CONFINED SPACE STAND-BY PERSON:


• Complete the Company's confined space training.
• Assist the competent person to sample the atmosphere for oxygen and
combustible gas levels.
• Ensure adequate rescue equipment is readily available and familiarize
themselves with its operation and what to do in the event of an emergency.
• Sign the Permit to Work before beginning work.
• Remain at the confined space entry site while any personnel are inside.
• Continually monitor the confined space entrance and adjacent areas for
hazards that may affect the personnel working in the confined space.
• Maintain contact with a manned control point (control room, radio room, etc.)
and with the personnel in the confined space.
• Maintain a tally of the persons inside the confined space.
• Notify the person in charge of carrying out the work of their intention to leave
the work area, so that a hand over of responsibility to a suitable replacement
can be carried out.
• Perform no other duties while assigned as Confined Space Stand-by person.
• Immediately raise the alarm if there are indications (through the agreed
system of communication or otherwise) of the personnel within the confined
space being affected by the atmosphere. After raising the alarm, in no
circumstances should the stand-by person stationed at the entrance attempt
to enter the confined space before additional help has arrived.

5.4 FIREWATCHER:
• Satisfactorily complete the Company fire watch training before being
authorized by the OIM to be assigned as a firewatcher.
• Perform no other duties while assigned as Firewatcher.
• Wear long sleeves made of a flame retardant material.
• Assist the welder in inspecting and preparing the work site before beginning
work.
• Ensure that adequate fire-fighting equipment is readily available and
familiarize themselves with its operation and what to do in the event of a fire.
• Sign the Permit to Work before beginning the work.
• Continually monitor the work site and adjacent areas for hazards that may
affect the welder or that are created by the hot work.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

• Remain at the site for a suitable length of time after the welder has completed
his assignment, observing for any indication of burning or smoldering.
• Inspect and re-inspect the site where possible smoldering may occur for a
minimum of 30 minutes after completion of any welding or cutting operations.
• Notify the welder of intention to leave the work area so that a hand-over of
responsibility to a suitable replacement can be carried out.
• Take adequate precautions to protect against welding flash.

5.5 PERMIT SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR:


• Keep copies of the permits in a central location (for example, a command or
control center).
• Ensure that all copies of active permits are returned to the administration site
any time permits are suspended.

5.6 OIM:
• Determine if a Permit to Work is an additional requirement when an isolation
certificate is issued for maintenance or repair of a system or component
containing energy.
• Ensure all other reasonable and practicable options not requiring confined
space entry, have been ruled out and controls which reduce the risks to as
low as reasonably practicable are in place before signing the Permit to Work
and approving the confined space entry.
• Ensure all reasonable control measures have been or will be carried out
before signing the Permit to Work and approving the work to be carried out.
• Ensure permits for work activities that may interact or affect one another are
clearly cross-referenced.
• Ensure a copy of the permit is displayed at the work site until work has been
completed.
• Ensure a system is in place to monitor the effectiveness of this procedure by
selected auditing, inspection and testing of in-force work permits.
• Sign the permit to indicate satisfaction with the condition in which the
operation was completed or not completed and confirming the permit is no
longer in effect. The OIM must record on the permit the time and date the
permit was closed out. NOTE: This responsibility may not be delegated to
a designee.
• Assign a permit system administrator and inform the work force who was
selected.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

• Ensure personnel are trained prior to using the Permit to Work system.
• Authorize personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company's
confined space training to be assigned as a stand-by person.
• Authorize personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company's fire
watch training to be assigned as a firewatcher.
• Authorize personnel to use welding or oxygen/acetylene cutting equipment.
• Ensure all welding performed on structural members, high-pressure lines and
lifting appliances is performed only by an appropriately certified (coded)
welder.

5.7 RIG MANAGER:


• Approve entry into fuel and crude oil tanks.

5.8 DIVISION MANAGER:


• Approve designated safe welding areas.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The form (Figure A) is included in the manual as an example only and is intended to
allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to create their
own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not used exactly
as it is included; the form used must include the key elements of the example and
must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Permit to Work form (Figure A)
(The original copy of all permits must be retained on the installation for at
least 12 months.)

NOTE: Each Permit to Work system must have the ability to assign a unique
number to each Permit to Work form for cross-referencing.
• Confined Space Entry Checklist (Figure B)
(Must be retained in installation/facility files for a period of one year.)
• Firewatcher's THINK Checklist (Figure C)
(Completed checklist must be retained in installation or facility files for 90
days.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

Figure A, Permit to Work

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

Figure B, Confined Space Entry Checklist

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work

Figure C, Firewatcher's THINK Checklist

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment

1 POLICY

Company subcontractor personnel must be assessed, monitored and


recognized for working to a system equivalent to the HSE system of the
Company.

Clients and their subcontractor personnel must be encouraged to participate


in the Company's HSE system.

Only equipment authorized by the OIM or the OIM's designee may be installed
or operated on the installation or facility.

2 PURPOSE

To ensure that the HSE interface of all Company operations involving clients, any
subcontractor personnel and equipment are effectively managed to identify hazards
and control risks.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers employees; HSE policies, standards and procedures; and
equipment of any client, contractor or outside agency that work at any Company
installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

Where possible, a proactive approach to assess suitability of client and


subcontractor personnel and equipment is preferred to ensure an acceptable
standard of personnel or equipment arrives at the installation. The OIM or facility
manager must be notified before any client or subcontractor personnel or equipment
is brought onboard an installation or to a facility.

4.1 SUBCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL

Any client, contractor or outside agency personnel that work at any Company
installation or facility must be encouraged to take an active part in the Company
THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment

All permanently assigned subcontractors (catering, cementer, mud engineer, and so


on) must be introduced to the Colors process and encouraged to take an active part
in the process.

Subcontractor personnel must perform a risk assessment appropriate to the task.

Subcontractors performing specialized work on installations or at facilities must be


able to demonstrate completion of an industry recognized training applicable to the
type of work to be performed. The OIM must approve these personnel to perform
work.

Departmental supervisors must monitor subcontractor personnel working in their


area of responsibility to ensure they are working to an HSE system equivalent to that
of the Company and ensure subcontractor personnel perform appropriate risk
assessments and adequate control measures are in place for all tasks.

4.2 SUBCONTRACTOR EQUIPMENT

The placement, installation and operation of any client or subcontractor equipment


must have prior approval from the OIM or designee.

Prior to approval for the placement of subcontractor equipment it must be confirmed


that the gross weight will not exceed the “Maximum Deck Loading” for where it is to
be placed.

Issuance of the approval to install and operate client or subcontractor equipment


does not preclude the application of the Permit to Work policy.

Qualified personnel must inspect the equipment and complete a checklist relevant
for the equipment for the OIM’s or designee’s approval.

Any unsatisfactory items must be reported to the client or subcontractor


representative.

Subcontractors must maintain their equipment to an acceptable standard prior to


and while on board the installation.

Company onshore management must be informed of client or subcontractor


equipment/personnel found to be unsatisfactory.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 SUBCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL:


• Carry out their duties safely.
• Ensure equipment is maintained, prior to and while onboard, to at least an
equivalent Company standard as well as any applicable authority or
regulatory requirement.
• Perform a risk assessment appropriate to the task.

5.2 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL:


• Inspect the equipment and complete a checklist relevant for the equipment for
the OIM’s or designee’s approval.

5.3 DEPARTMENT SUPERVISORS


• Monitor subcontractor personnel working in their area of responsibility to
ensure they are working to an HSE system equivalent to that of the Company
and ensure subcontractor personnel perform appropriate risk assessments
and adequate control measures are in place for all tasks.

5.4 OIM:
• Give prior approval to the placement, installation and operation of any client
or subcontractor equipment.
• Inform Company onshore management of client or subcontractor
equipment/personnel found to be unsatisfactory.
• Report any unsatisfactory items to the client or subcontractor representative.
• Ensure any certification required for personnel or equipment is valid. (For
example: Coded Welding, EX Equipment, Pressure Test, Equipment
inspectors, hazardous materials handling, and so on).

6 DOCUMENTATION

The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as it is included; the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Approval To Install And Operate Client And Subcontractor Equipment
(Figure A)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment

(Must be retained at the installation/facility for a period of 90 days or as long


as the equipment is on/at the installation/facility.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment

Figure A, Approval To Install And Operate Client And Subcontractor Equipment

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

1 POLICY

The Company must provide Company personnel appropriate Personal


Protective Equipment (PPE) and instruction in its use.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel are adequately protected
from environmental elements and relevant workplace hazards where it is not
practical to reduce relevant exposure to acceptable levels by using engineering
control or practices.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel that work at Company installations and facilities.

4 PROCEDURE

Occupational health and safety is devoted to the anticipation, recognition, evaluation


and control of those factors or stresses, arising in and from the workplace, which
may cause illness, impaired health and physical injury. Any health or safety hazard
has, by definition, the potential to cause harm in some way. Safety hazards (cause)
can usually be linked to the harm (effect) directly. For example, a person is struck by
a hand tool dropped from the derrick due to the hand tool not being tied off. In
contrast, health hazards are not always obvious and potential adverse health effects
may not be directly linkable to a single cause. As a result, controls to limit exposure
to health hazards may be inadequate or overlooked. This is a key difference in
identifying between health hazards and safety hazards, and in assessing and
reducing the associated risks.

4.1 COMPANY APPROVED PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

All PPE worn by Company personnel must be Company approved. The


maintenance of critical PPE must be performed by authorized, competent personnel.
Effective protection is only possible when the selected PPE is:
• Suitable for the task
• Suited to the wearer and the environment
• In good condition
• Within the expiration date and worn correctly by someone who has been
trained to use it
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

• Of sufficient quantity to meet the needs of personnel

4.2 TRAINING

Business Unit management must ensure personnel are trained in the use of PPE.
The training must cover both theory and practice on the PPE to be used. The
training must be based on the recommendations and instructions supplied by the
manufacturer. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

4.3 HEAD PROTECTION

Hard hats must be worn by all personnel outside the accommodation at all times
except in designated areas approved by the Division Manager. These areas must be
clearly marked to indicate that a hard hat is not required.

Hard hats must be secured when working two meters or more above the deck, or as
conditions dictate. Hard hats must be:
• Fitted with a means of securing, such as chinstrap or hearing protectors.
• Designed so as not to prevent wearing ear muffs and/or a face shield.
• Made of non-conductive material and worn as recommended by the
manufacturer.
• Discarded if the shell of the hard hat is damaged.

Hard hat suspension must be adjusted to fit the wearer and not modified.

The company hard hat color designation to identify visitors and employees new to
the installation is:
• Bright orange or international orange – visitors and Short Service Employees
• White – all other Company personnel

4.4 HEARING PROTECTION

The appropriate hearing protection must be worn in designated high noise areas,
which exceed 83 dB. These areas must be clearly marked.

Hearing protection must be placed at the entrance of high noise areas to ensure that
all persons who enter have hearing protection available.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

4.5 EYE PROTECTION

All personnel must wear approved safety glasses, complete with approved side
shields, when outside the accommodation, except in designated areas approved by
the Division Manager. These areas must be clearly marked to indicate that safety
glasses are not required.

Prescription safety glasses must have approved side shields securely fitted or
permanently attached.

Safety goggles or a face shield with safety glasses must be worn:


• During any activity, such as chipping, grinding, hammering, changing tong
dies, high pressure wash down, and so on, which may result in a foreign body
in the eye.
• When handling corrosive or harmful products (solid or liquid) or when tasks
deem it necessary.

Eye wash stations must be strategically positioned.

The wearing of contact lenses is permitted except as follows: in areas of dust and
fumes; when wearing breathing apparatus; by people performing or assisting with
welding operations.

All wearers of contact lenses must comply with the following:


• Inform their supervisor that contact lenses are worn.
• Keep available a pair of prescription safety glasses as a backup.

4.6 DRESS REQUIREMENT/CLOTHING

Appropriate clothing that ensures personal safety and protects an individual from the
elements must be worn. All clothing must be Unit approved.

No jewelry may be worn while working. This includes finger rings, pierced or clasp
earrings, studs and rings worn in face or body piercings, tongue piercings, metal
watch straps, necklaces, chains, or medallions. The only exception is for non-
conductive watches and non-conductive medical alert tags.

Certain operations, as determined by the THINK planning process, may require


additional protective clothing. The following are examples of operations and required
additional protective clothing:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

• Slicker suits must be worn when personnel might be exposed to hazards that
coveralls do not give adequate protection from such as oil-based mud,
completion fluids, heavy rain, and so on.
• Sleeveless garments are not permitted in the galley or mess areas.
• Loose clothing that can be caught in machinery must not be worn.
• Safety and health risks associated with long hair must be controlled by use of
hairnets and so on.
• Aprons or protective suits must be worn when handling corrosive or harmful
products.
• Work vests or other floatation devices must be worn when working over
water.

4.6.1 COVERALLS

Coveralls or two-piece work clothing must be made from cotton or flame-resistant


fabric.

Reflective tape must be affixed to coveralls and two-piece work clothing to enhance
visibility in low-light circumstances. Placement is usually across each shoulder, on
the lower arms and on the lower part of the legs.

4.6.2 WORK VESTS

Must be adjusted to the wearer’s size and securely fastened.

Must be returned to labeled stowage containers after use.

Must be inspected weekly.

Work vests used in conjunction with full body harnesses must be compatible to
ensure the “D” ring connection will not be fouled.

4.7 HAND PROTECTION

Gloves (cloth, rubber, leather, and so on) must be worn to protect the hands,
dependent upon the exposure.

Asbestos-free, high-temperature gloves must be worn when handling hot pieces of


equipment.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

Barrier cream must be provided.

4.8 FOOT PROTECTION

All Company personnel must wear lace-up safety toe boots when outside the
accommodation area, except in designated areas approved by the Division
Manager. These areas must be clearly marked to indicate that safety toe boots are
not required in this area.

All other personnel must wear safety toe boots or shoes when outside the
accommodation area unless in designated areas approved by the Division Manager.
For ankle protection, safety boots are preferred to shoes.

4.9 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION

Appropriate respiratory equipment, as specified on the Material Safety Data Sheet,


must be worn for personal protection.

When there is risk of encountering an atmosphere immediately hazardous to health,


or an atmosphere below 19.5% oxygen, a positive-pressure type Self Contained
Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) or air line respirator equipped with an escape bottle
must be worn.

NOTE: Normal oxygen content of air is 20.9% by volume at sea level.

All Company personnel with Emergency Response duties and those whose job
requires the periodic use of a full-face SCBA mask or half mask respirator must take
an annual fit test using the type of respirator to be worn, according to the
manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure an adequate seal is achieved. This test must
be documented.

4.10 SELF CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS

SCBAs and escape packs must be:


• Located in appropriate areas and highly visible.
• Stored to protect against dust, sunlight, heat, extreme conditions, excessive
moisture or damaging chemicals.
• Suitable for toxic and oxygen-deficient atmospheres.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

Each installation must be equipped with:


• 12 30-minute SCBAs (positive-pressure type)
• 6 10-minute escape packs (positive-pressure type)

NOTE: This minimum requirement must be reviewed when working in known


H2S areas (See Section 4 Subsection 3.1)

Only experienced persons will perform replacement or repairs of respirators, using


parts designed for the respirator.

Replacement or repair of regulators is performed only by the regulator’s


manufacturer or their authorized representatives.

Each SCBA bottle must be uniquely identified.

At least two of the Installation’s 30-minute SCBAs must have voice communication
capability.

All Company personnel with Emergency Response duties and those who might use
facial seal respirator for escape purposes in emergencies must maintain facial hair in
such a way that allows a proper facial seal.

Employees are not permitted to wear contact lenses or glasses with temple pieces
when using a pressurized full-face respirator.

A system must be in place to record the entry and expected time of exit of personnel
using SCBAs in hazardous or oxygen deficient areas.

(See OPS-ST-02 Preventative Maintenance Tasks) (High Pressure Vessels)

4.11 AIR-FED VISORS AND HOODS

Air used to supply visors, hoods, etc., must be tested prior to use to ensure
compliance with Grade D air requirements.

Air used to supply visors, hoods, etc., must continuously meet the requirements of
Grade D or higher.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

4.12 BREATHING AIR COMPRESSORS

Grade D air, or higher, must be used for all breathing apparatus (for example,
SCBAs, air line respirators, and so on). The air must be tested monthly and the
results recorded in the planned maintenance system.

All breathing air compressors must be equipped with necessary safety devices and
be able to be run by emergency power. Compressors must be constructed, designed
and located to avoid entry of contaminated air into the system.

Suitable in-line air purifying absorbent beds and filters must be installed to ensure
good breathing air quality.

Grade D air meets the following minimum acceptable quality standards as follows:

Oxygen 19.5% to 23.5%


Carbon dioxide 0.10% maximum allowable
By volume 1000 PPM maximum allowable
Carbon monoxide 10 PPM maximum allowable
Oil vapor 5 mg/m3 maximum allowable
Water Saturated allowable
Odor None
Particles and solids None

4.13 AIR LINE COUPLINGS

Breathing air line couplings must not be compatible with outlets for other gas
systems, to prevent inadvertent attachment of air line respirators with harmful gases
or oxygen.

4.14 DEDICATED PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

PPE must be readily available in required areas of installations and facilities,


appropriate for that area and protected from the elements.

Areas requiring that PPE be available include but are not limited to:
• Work shops
• Chemical mixing areas
• Machinery spaces
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

• Moon pool
• Rig floor

4.15 HAND-ARM VIBRATION (HAV)

HAV is vibration that reaches the hands when working with hand held power tools,
hand guided machinery, or when holding materials being processed by machinery.

Regular exposure to HAV can cause a range of permanent injuries to hands and
arms, known as hand-arm vibration syndrome (HAVS).

Risk factors contributing to HAVS are:


• How high the vibration level is
• Duration of exposure
• How awkward the equipment is to use
• How tight users must grip equipment
• Environmental exposure during use (cold weather and rain)

When planning tasks that utilize equipment with potential to cause HAV, the hazards
must be identified and the risk reduced. The factors that must be considered include:
• Can the task be performed without the use of vibrating tools
• Are there tools available with vibration control built in
• Control length of exposure by rotating personnel during task
• Amount of force exerted on the equipment to complete the task
• Condition and maintenance of equipment used

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Dress in a manner that ensures personal safety on Company installations and
facilities. This includes wearing and taking care of the appropriate personal
protective equipment (PPE).
• Inform their supervisor when contact lenses are worn and have a pair of
prescription safety glasses available as a backup.

5.2 OIM:
• Authorize competent personnel to maintain critical PPE.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment

• Ensure all personnel with Emergency Response duties, and those whose job
requires the periodic use of a full face SCBA mask or half mask respirator
receive an annual fit test using the type of respirator to be worn.
• Ensure a system is in place to record the entry and expected time of exit of
personnel using SCBAs in hazardous or oxygen deficient areas.
• Ensure PPE is available in a sufficient quantity to meet the needs of the
personnel.
• Ensure people are trained in the use of PPE

5.3 DIVISION MANAGER/BUSINESS UNIT OPERATIONS MANAGER:


• Approve designated areas that do not require:
1. Hard hats
2. Safety glasses
3. Steel-toe boots or shoes

5.4 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT


• Ensure adequate resources are made available for Region approved PPE.
• Ensure training is available for people in the use of PPE

6 DOCUMENTATION

There is currently no documentation associated with this Policy or Procedure.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide

1 POLICY

Precautions must be taken to ensure early detection of Hydrogen Sulfide gas


(H2S) and to ensure contingency plans are in place to safeguard all personnel.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to protect all personnel on an installation from the
potentially lethal effects of H2S gas.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel that work on Company installations.

4 PROCEDURE

H2S is a highly toxic, colorless (transparent) gas that can paralyze the respiratory
system and kill within minutes. Being heavier than air, H2S tends to accumulate in
lower areas. Mud pit areas are particularly hazardous. If H2S is heated sufficiently, it
will rise. H2S has an odor of rotten eggs, but it quickly destroys the sense of smell,
leading to a false sense of security. Disappearance of the smell after it has first been
noticed may be due to an increase rather than a decrease in concentration.

4.1 CONTINGENCY PLAN WHEN H2S IS NOT ANTICIPATED

An H2S contingency plan must be in place and provide clear instructions as to what
actions are to be taken in the event of an H2S emergency whether the installation is
working at an open location or in close proximity to a fixed platform that may
potentially release H2S. In the case of a fixed platform, a contingency plan that
outlines the simultaneous operations and associated H2S risks should be developed
between the client and the installation.

Adequate fixed H2S detection devices must be located in key areas on the
installation, and set to alarm at 5-PPM low level and 10-PPM high level.

Each installation must be equipped with a minimum of two portable H2S gas
detectors.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide

4.2 CONTINGENCY PLAN WHEN H2S IS ANTICIPATED IN THE WELL

A H2S contingency plan must be in place and provide clear instructions as to what
actions are to be taken in the event of an H2S emergency whether the installation is
working at an open location or in close proximity to a fixed platform that may
potentially release H2S. In the case of a fixed platform, a contingency plan that
outlines the simultaneous operations and associated H2S risks should be developed
between the client and the installation.

Adequate fixed H2S detection devices must be located in key areas on the
installation, and set to alarm at 5-ppm low level and 10-ppm high level.

Each installation must be equipped with a minimum of two portable H2S gas
detectors.

Every person on the installation must be trained to know the dangers of H2S gas,
and must be instructed on the use, function, and location of safety equipment before
drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

The client is to ensure, prior to drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S, that
H2S equipment is available onboard (installed and tested), and that all personnel are
refresher-trained, know the site specific dangers of H2S related to the well and have
been instructed in the proper use of required PPE.

The client must provide adequate resources (fixed and portable PPE, training on the
use of PPE, appropriate stand-by vessels, and so on) are allocated and in place
before drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S.

All personnel must be fit tested with all H2S PPE onboard while drilling in a zone
suspected to contain H2S.

A HSE Meeting must be held before drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S.

Emergency Response Team members must undergo practical refresher training with
specific focus on the treatment of H2S poisoning.

A sufficient quantity of self-contained breathing apparatuses (SCBAs) must be


available for all personnel on board.

If the well plan includes the possibility of working in an H2S environment of 20-ppm
or higher, a system capable of supplying sufficient breathing air for extended periods

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide

must be supplied. This system must include provisions for disconnection and
escape, such as a cascade system.

Self-contained breathing apparatus or a connection to the cascade system must be


worn in concentrations exceeding 20-ppm.

Movement of personnel must be restricted in areas likely to have H2S contamination.

Wind direction indicators must be strategically located around the installation.

All personnel must successfully complete a full-faced respirator fit test, according to
the manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure an adequate seal is achieved. This test
must be documented.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Know the dangers of H2S gas and understand the use, function, and location
of safety equipment.
• Ensure facial hair is maintained in a way to allow a proper seal of the SCBA
face mask.

5.2 EMERGENCY RESPONSE TEAM MEMBERS:


• Have practical refresher training with specific focus on the treatment of H2S
poisoning.

5.3 OIM:
• Ensure an H2S contingency plan is in place and provides clear instructions as
to what actions are to be taken in the event of an H2S emergency.
• When H2S is anticipated in the well, ensure a sufficient quantity of self-
contained breathing apparatuses (SCBAs) is available for all personnel on
board.
• Ensure inspection and approve client subcontractor equipment prior to
installation. (See Section 4 Subsection 2.3)
• Ensure emergency drills are conducted as required. (See Section 4
Subsection 3.2)
• Assist the client by making accommodation for client subcontractor personnel
to install equipment and conduct initial/refresher training on the installation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide

5.4 RIG MANAGER


• Liaise with the client to assist in selection of subcontractor personnel and
equipment for use on the installation.
• Ensure the plan to be used on the installation is sufficient to provide
necessary and reliable protection for all personnel.
• Ensure PPE (cascade systems and portable SCBAs) is placed in appropriate
areas accessible to personnel and in sufficient quantity to protect the
personnel likely to be working or muster there.

5.5 DIVISION MANAGER/UNIT OPERATIONS MANAGER


• Review the H2S plan to be used on the installation for effectiveness.

6 DOCUMENTATION

Reference the installation specific Emergency Response Manual.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response

1 POLICY

All installations, facilities and offices must have updated procedures,


maintained equipment, and must conduct drills to ensure effective
management of emergency response and security.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to reduce the impact of potential emergencies to human
life, the environment, Company property and the Company reputation.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company installations, facilities and offices.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 EMERGENCY RESPONSE MANUALS

Each installation, facility and office must develop and maintain emergency response
and recovery plans and procedures for relevant site-specific and area or location
emergencies. Emergency Response Manuals must be reviewed annually and
updated as required, or if an installation changes location, or geographical area.

NOTE: See HQS-HSE-PR-01 (Emergency Management Procedures Manual) for


emergency response procedures and creation of onshore or offshore
Emergency Response Manuals.

4.2 SECURITY

Each installation, facility, and office must develop and maintain prevention,
contingency and security response plans for issues involving security. As a
minimum, the Emergency Response manual must include procedures to prevent
and mitigate security hazards associated with the following:
• Environmental activists
• Piracy
• Airport reception / journey management

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response

• Labor Dispute
• Bomb Threat
• Extortion
• Missing / kidnapped person
• Civil disputes
• Country evacuation

4.3 EMERGENCY RESPONSE DRILLS AND EXERCISES

The following emergency response drills must be conducted on installations at the


specified intervals:
• At least weekly:
− Fire and Abandon
− Pit Drill and Blowout Drill for each drill crew (recorded on IADC report)
− H2S Drill (if H2S is anticipated)
• At least every 90 days:
− Man Overboard
− Environmental Spill
− Search, Rescue and Mock Injury Drill
− Helicopter Emergency Drill
− Ballast Control Drill (not applicable to jack-ups)
− H2S Drill (if H2S is not anticipated)
− Blackout Recovery

Additional drills to address specific risks (for example, shallow gas or well test) must
be conducted before beginning the relevant operation.

All drills and exercises must be reviewed on completion to ensure Emergency


Response and Recovery Plans are appropriate and updated as required.

The Onshore Emergency Response Team must hold a drill at least every 6 months
with at least one installation to test the integration of the Onshore and an Offshore
Emergency Response System.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response

4.4 PPE FOR DRILLS AND EXERCISES

All personnel must wear proper clothing for emergency response drills. At minimum,
this must include:
• long trousers
• shirts (long-sleeved recommended)
• substantial shoes

The OIM is responsible to ensure that hard hats, safety boots and safety glasses are
worn where required to reduce the risk of injury to involved personnel.

NOTE: Shorts, vests (sleeveless shirts), and opened-toed sandals are not
allowed.

4.5 PERSONNEL ON BOARD (POB)

All installations must have a system in place detailing personnel on board at all
times. This system must be updated daily or as changes occur and include the
following as a minimum:
• arrivals and departures
• a total count of all personnel on board
• primary and secondary lifeboat assignments for all personnel

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Be aware of their role and the actions to follow in the event of an emergency.
• Wear proper clothing for emergency response drills.
• Actively participate during drills and in their review.

5.2 OIM:
• Ensure effective emergency drills are held within the required time intervals.
• Ensure hard hats, safety boots and safety glasses are worn where required
during drill and exercise procedures to reduce the risk of injury to involved
personnel.
• Ensure a system is in place to detail personnel on board at all times.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response

5.3 RIG MANAGER:


• Offer initial approval to the Installation Emergency Response Manual and any
revision(s) and forward on to the Division Manager and/or Operations
Manager for final approval.

5.4 ONSHORE EMERGENCY RESPONSE TEAM:


• Hold a drill at least every 6 months with at least one installation to test the
integration of the Onshore and an Offshore Emergency Response System.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The Company preferred method for documentation of Emergency Drills is located


within the Global Reporting System (GRS). Use of this form within GRS provides an
avenue for installation/facility management to review drill execution and track
required exercises in a more expedient manner.

The form indicated below is included as an alternate in the event it is not possible to
record Emergency Drills within GRS.
• Emergency Drill Report (Figure A)
(When completed, retain in the installation or facility files for one year.)

The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as included, the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Emergency Response Exercise Sheet (Figure B)
(When completed, retain in the installation or facility files for one year.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response

Figure A, Emergency Drill Report

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response

Figure B, Emergency Response Exercise Sheet

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

1 POLICY

Health, Safety and Environmental (HSE) information must be available to all


personnel and appropriately communicated.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel are adequately informed of
HSE issues, improving awareness and HSE performance.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

HSE information must be distributed to all installations and facilities and made
available to all personnel. Relevant HSE information must be translated and printed
in the predominant local language.

All relevant personnel must discuss HSE information at various departmental or


installation and facility HSE meetings.

4.1 MONTHLY INCIDENT RATE CHART

Corporate HSE Services must provide a Monthly Incident Rate Chart to all Company
installations and facilities.

The Monthly Incident Rate Chart provides a statistical comparison within the
Company.

The incident rate will be a Year-to-Date and 12-month rolling recordable rate.

After receiving the Monthly Incident Rate Chart, crew supervisors must study and
review the chart with their crew during their next Weekly Departmental HSE Meeting.

The Monthly Incident Rate Chart must be posted for personnel to review.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

4.2 SERIOUS INCIDENT BULLETINS

At the discretion of the Unit QHSE department, bulletins are issued to inform all
personnel of serious incidents. All personnel should review the bulletins, which
contain only factual information based on the related incident report. Incidents
resulting in a potential severity of seven or greater should be considered for a
bulletin. (See Section 4 Subsection 6.3 for assignment of severity value) Serious
Incident Bulletins may be followed by an HSE Alert.

4.3 HSE ALERTS

HSE Alerts provide immediate notification of critical information and actions to


address an incident or situation which represents a clear and present hazard to
people, environment or property.

Corporate HSE Alerts are developed and issued to advise all personnel of an
immediate danger. An alert must be immediately distributed to all installations and
facilities and urgently acted upon.

HSE Alerts must be developed from facts gathered during the fact-finding of the
incident.

All HSE Alerts issued by Unit management must be submitted to Corporate HSE
Services for consideration for global application. Only Corporate HSE Services
issues/distributes HSE Alerts globally.

Crewmembers must review the alert and discuss corrective and preventive actions
that might be taken to prevent a similar situation from occurring on their installation
or facility.

The OIM must use the FOCUS Improvement Process to confirm that appropriate
action has been taken to cover the risk identified by the alert. The alert must be
posted on the QHSE bulletin board and files a copy in a permanent reading
file/binder for future reference and review.

HSE Alerts are “Non-Discretionary sources of opportunities” that the Company


has identified as being important and/or critical to performance and require the use
of the FOCUS Planning and Tracking Software to ensure action points which result
from a corrective or improvement opportunity are effectively planned and tracked.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

4.4 HSE BULLETINS

HSE Bulletins provide specific or general information related to a particular subject,


situation or incident deemed of important value to inform and raise people’s
awareness.

4.5 HSE ADVISORIES

HSE Advisories provide specific information to improve the understanding of an


existing requirement or process through further explanation and clarification, or to
communicate a new requirement deemed of critical value to be implemented and
complied with.

HSE Bulletins and Advisories are “Discretionary sources of opportunity” that


require managers and supervisors to decide if the FOCUS Planning and Tracking
Software should be used to ensure action points which result from a corrective or
improvement opportunity are effectively planned and tracked.

Note: See HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5.4 FOCUS for definition of Discretionary


and Non-Discretionary sources of opportunity.

4.6 HSE SIGNS

All installations and facilities must use internationally recognized pictogram signs,
according to the Company safety signs standard (see HQS-OPS-TIB-708-01), to
convey HSE critical information, such as PPE requirements, hazards, escape routes,
emergency equipment, etc.

Where words are required to ensure understanding of a hazard/situation, they must


be in both English and the predominant local language.

Temporary barriers for specific hazards must be erected when needed and clearly
identified, then removed after the area is safe.

4.7 HAZARD MAPPING

Areas where restrictions on access or equipment apply must be mapped and the
map must be available on all installations and facilities. Examples include high noise
areas, ignition source zones (explosion-proof equipment only), lighting, authorized
personnel only, and so on.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

4.8 QHSE BULLETIN BOARD

All installations and facilities must have and maintain an up-to-date QHSE bulletin
board that is accessible to all personnel.

4.9 ORGANIZATION CHART

All installations must have an organizational chart showing the OIM and the
management/supervisory team. The chart must be accessible by all personnel.

4.10 DAILY COMMUNICATIONS

Each installation must have an effective system in place that ensures critical
information is communicated in writing and understood throughout the working day.
This must include reference to Operations Manual, Permit to Work, isolations,
restricted areas, other work on the installation, and so on. These daily
communications must include:
• Standing Instructions for Drillers
• Standing Instructions for Crane Operators
• Formal shift hand-over report/logbook for all supervisors, issued at each shift
change

4.11 FEEDBACK

Personnel are encouraged to provide effective feedback and corrective opportunities


concerning any HSE aspects, using the QHSE Feedback form.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Review Serious Incident Bulletins.
• Review the HSE Alerts and discuss contributing factors and steps that might
be taken to prevent a similar situation from occurring on their installation or
facility.

5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Study and review the Monthly Incident Rate Chart with their crew during the
next Weekly Departmental HSE Meeting.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

5.3 OIM:
• Ensure the Monthly Incident Rate Chart is posted for personnel to review.
• Use the FOCUS Improvement Process to confirm that appropriate action has
been taken to cover the risk identified by HSE Alerts.
• Ensure relevant HSE Alerts are posted on the QHSE bulletin board and a
copy filed in a permanent reading file/binder for future reference and review.
• Ensure an effective system is in place that ensures critical information is
communicated and understood throughout the working day.
• Ensure an organizational chart showing the OIM and the management /
supervisory team is accessible by all personnel.

5.4 DIVISION MANAGER:


• Ensure HSE information is distributed to all installations and facilities, made
available to all personnel translated and printed in the predominant local
language.

5.5 BUSINESS UNIT QHSE MANAGER:


• Issue Unit Serious Incident Bulletins.
• Issue Unit HSE Alerts.
• Ensure safety posters, HSE improvement campaigns, galley readers, videos,
newsletters, and so on, are available to all installations and facilities on a
periodic basis.

5.6 CORPORATE HSE DEPARTMENT:


• Provide a Monthly Incident Rate Chart to all Company installations and
facilities.
• Review HSE Alerts drafted by Unit management for global consideration.
• Issue Corporate HSE Alerts.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

• HSE Alert (Figure A1)


(Must be available to all personnel for their review.)
(A Template for Unit HSE Alerts is available from Corporate HSE Services.)
• HSE Bulletin (Figure A2)
(Must be available to all personnel for their review.)
(A Template for Unit HSE Bulletins is available from Corporate HSE
Services.)
• HSE Advisory (Figure A3)
(Must be available to all personnel for their review.)
(A Template for Unit HSE Advisories is available from Corporate HSE
Services.)
• HSE Pictogram Signs (Figure B)
(Must be available to all personnel for their use.)
• Standing Instructions to Drillers (Figure C)
(File and retain completed forms for 90 days)
• Standing Instructions to Crane Operators (Figure D)
(File and retain completed forms for 90 days.)
• Shift Hand-Over Report (Figure E)
(File and retain completed forms for 90 days.)
• QHSE Feedback (Figure F)
(Must be available to all personnel for their use.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure A1, HSE Alert

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure A2, HSE Bulletin

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure A3,: HSE Advisory

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure B, HSE Pictogram Signs

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure C, Standing Instructions to Drillers

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure D, Standing Instructions to Crane Operators

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure E, Shift Hand-Over Report

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information

Figure F, QHSE Feedback

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings

1 POLICY

Company personnel, client personnel and all subcontractor personnel must


attend and participate in relevant HSE meetings as determined by the OIM.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of holding effective HSE meetings is to:


• Recognize proactive HSE performance.
• Provide an opportunity for crews to discuss, understand and apply Company
HSE processes and procedures for conducting tasks and identifying hazards
and potential risks.
• Increase awareness and motivate crewmembers by reviewing and learning
from incidents and HSE information.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel that work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 MEETINGS

Effective HSE meetings must be conducted in a positive manner to motivate


proactive HSE performance among crewmembers.

Effective HSE meetings:


• Follow a prepared agenda.
• Are of sufficient duration.
• Include clear and thorough discussion so attendees understand the issues.
• Encourage active participation by attendees.

All HSE meetings must be documented and attendance sheets signed by all
personnel attending. The OIM and Rig Manager must review and sign each meeting
report and ensure appropriate action identified in the meeting is addressed using the
FOCUS Improvement Process. Depending on the resources required to implement
the improvement/corrective opportunity, utilization of the FOCUS tracking software
may also be required.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings

The documented meeting report must be available for review by all personnel and a
copy kept on file.

4.2 WEEKLY DEPARTMENTAL HSE MEETINGS

Crew supervisors are responsible for ensuring that effective HSE meetings are
conducted.

Department heads are responsible to ensure that all personnel within their
department attend at least one departmental HSE meeting per week. These
meetings can be conducted with another department. It is both department heads’
responsibility to ensure that the joint meeting is effective for all attending personnel.
Company subcontractors must attend and participate in relevant HSE meetings.

Client and all client subcontractor personnel must be strongly encouraged to


participate in relevant HSE meetings.

The primary purpose of these meetings is to discuss the various planning,


monitoring, corrective and improvement processes (THINK, START and FOCUS)
used throughout the Company, how they apply, and are used. Additional topics
include reviewing and discussing how other HSE information, internal or external,
could apply to the department.

The list below suggests topics that should be discussed during meetings:
• Welcoming new crewmembers.
• Announcing individual HSE performance and recognition.
• Teaching the THINK and START process (individually and together)
(Management of Change) and FOCUS process as well as the complete HSE
system in an organized manner.
• Reviewing THINK plans, START observations and status of FOCUS
improvement and corrective opportunities.
• Reviewing HSE Alerts and Advisories.
• Demonstrating the correct use of tools and equipment.
• Identifying hazards.
• Discussing recent near hits and incidents.
• Reviewing the Monthly Incident Rate Chart.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings

4.3 GENERAL HSE MEETINGS

The OIM must give full consideration to conducting a general HSE meeting on a
periodic basis. General HSE meetings must be used for issues that apply to all
personnel, such as HSE performance recognition, incident status (Unit, Division,
Sector, Branch, installation or facility), and significant change to normal routines.

4.4 PRE-TOUR MEETINGS

Pre-tour meetings must be part of the hand-over process to ensure that all personnel
starting work are aware of the current operation and their particular responsibilities.

4.5 PRE-TASK MEETINGS

Specific meetings must be held prior to certain tasks being conducted. The formality
and content of the meetings depends on the exact nature of the task to be
conducted. The person who has direct operational responsibility for the proposed
operation must ensure that an effective pre-task meeting is conducted.

For more complex or non-routine operations (for example, spud, rig move or well
test), a suitable meeting format must be adopted.

4.6 DAILY OPERATION MEETING

All department heads or their designees, together with the OIM, must attend a joint,
daily operation meeting, to discuss each department’s plans for the next 24 hours.

Specific attention must be paid to the potential impact of interacting departments,


with the intent of reducing any risk involved. Additional topics may include previous
24 hours START observations and action plans for corrective actions (FOCUS), any
incidents in the previous 24 hours and an operational look ahead. The OIM is
responsible for conducting this meeting.

4.7 QHSE STEERING COMMITTEE MEETINGS

Unit, Division, Sector, facility, and Corporate QHSE Steering Committee Meetings
must be conducted at least twice a year. Installation QHSE Steering Committee
Meetings must be conducted at specific times so that each crew has the opportunity
to attend a meeting per year. Annual HSE goals must be reviewed during Corporate,
Unit, Division, Sector, Branch installation and facility QHSE Steering Committee
Meetings to determine HSE performance gaps and identify improvement/corrective
opportunities (if any) to be addressed.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings

Current QHSE Steering Committee meeting minutes must be posted on the QHSE
bulletin board.

All other aspects of QHSE Steering Committees are addressed in the Organization
and Responsibility section. (See Section 2 Subsection 2)

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Attend and participate in relevant HSE meetings.

5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Ensure effective HSE meetings are conducted.

5.3 DEPARTMENT HEADS:


• Ensure all personnel within their department attend at least one HSE meeting
per week.
• Attend a joint daily operation meeting with the OIM.

5.4 COMPANY SUBCONTRACTORS:


• Attend and participate in relevant HSE meetings.

5.5 OIM:
• Encourage Client and all client subcontractor personnel to participate in
relevant HSE meetings.
• Review and validate (within GRS) each meeting report and ensure
appropriate action identified in the meeting is addressed using the FOCUS
improvement process.
• Give full consideration to conducting a general HSE meeting on a periodic
basis.
• Conduct the Daily Operation meeting.
• Conduct QHSE Steering Committee Meetings at specified intervals.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings

5.6 RIG MANAGER:


• Review and validate (within GRS) each meeting report and ensure
appropriate action identified in the meeting is addressed using the FOCUS
improvement process.

5.7 DIVISION MANAGER:


• Conduct QHSE Steering Committee Meetings at specified intervals.

5.8 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT:


• Conduct QHSE Steering Committee Meetings at specified intervals.

5.9 CORPORATE QHSE DEPARTMENT:


• Conduct QHSE Steering Committee Meetings at specified intervals.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The Company preferred method for documentation of HSE Meetings is located


within the Global Reporting System (GRS). Use of this form within GRS provides an
avenue for installation/facility management to review meeting content and offer
feedback in a more expedient manner. HSE meetings must be forwarded to
installation management for review and feedback.

The form indicated below is included as an alternate in the event it is not possible to
record HSE Meetings within GRS.
• HSE Meeting Report (Figure A)
(Must be retained in installation or facility files for a minimum of three years.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings

Figure A, HSE Meeting Report

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

1 POLICY

The START Process must be used to observe and monitor work practices,
plans and workplace conditions.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to:


• Empower employees to observe tasks and work areas and look for safe and
at-risk/unsafe behaviors and safe and unsafe conditions.
• Empower employees to monitor themselves and others to ensure the safe
execution of a plan by interrupting and correcting at-risk/unsafe behaviors,
unsafe conditions and unplanned changes.
• Increase personnel’s ability to recognize and respond to hazards.
• Reinforce observed or monitored safe behavior through effective feedback.
• Interrupt operations when unplanned change is recognized.
• Promote accountability for maintaining a safe workplace.
• Obtain commitment among co-workers to repeat safe behavior.
• Provide supervisors with feedback on trends in safety behavior.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel, regardless of position.

Any client, subcontractor or client subcontractor that works at any Company


installation, facility or office must be encouraged to take an active part in the
process.

4 PROCEDURE

The START process must be actively led by all supervisors and supported by all
Company personnel.

All Company personnel are responsible for their own safety and behavior. All
Company personnel are obligated to interrupt any unsafe operation and correct any
at-risk/unsafe behavior or unsafe condition.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

Proper implementation of the START process by all personnel provides an effective


method of preventing injuries, safeguarding equipment and avoiding operational
exposures by all personnel.

4.1 GENERAL

4.1.1 START PROCESS

SEE with total focus and observe for safe and at-risk/unsafe behavior and
conditions. Recognize safe behavior and reinforce it with effective feedback, treating
each person on an individual basis. Correct at-risk/unsafe behavior and conditions
immediately, in a constructive manner. Understand the colors of the person you are
relating to and treat them as THEY NEED to be treated.

THINK about what you see. Think "what if?" to anticipate and recognize change.
What can happen as a result of the change, condition or inaction you are observing?
Think what to say. The success of your message is determined by how it is spoken.

ACT to monitor and observe safe and at-risk/unsafe behavior as well as unsafe
conditions. Anticipate and recognize change and immediately interrupt the task to
evaluate the change to either correct the condition/behavior or revise the plan. If a
person is working in an at-risk/unsafe manner, immediately interrupt the task and
correct the behavior. Failing to take action means that you condone the unsafe
condition or at-risk/unsafe behavior.

REINFORCE safe behavior with specific effective feedback to encourage continued


safe behavior and raise awareness of at-risk/unsafe behavior and unsafe conditions.
Communicate corrective and improvement opportunities with effective feedback to
encourage change. Remember, when giving feedback, be specific.

TRACK results of observations through active participation by all personnel.


Tracking is sharing and communicating observations with people on a daily basis to
reinforce a safe workplace and raise people’s awareness of where to focus their
efforts and proactive measures.

4.1.2 THE START PROCESS IS USED TO PERFORM OBSERVATIONS AND


FEEDBACK.

Observations can be performed on an individual (or individuals engaged in


performing the same task) or conditions. Performing an observation on an individual
does not necessarily require specific knowledge and responsibility of the task being
performed. The individual performing the observation makes the commitment to
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

identify safe conditions and safe behavior and/or interrupt the operation to act on an
unsafe condition or at-risk/unsafe behavior.

For people to provide effective feedback to one another requires they actively care
about each other’s safety. Effective feedback requires that people recognize and re-
enforce safe behavior at every opportunity and interrupt/correct at-risk/unsafe
behavior immediately.

4.1.3 THE START PROCESS IS USED TO MONITOR THINK PLANS.

Monitoring a THINK plan is when an individual or group has knowledge and


understanding of a plan, and makes the commitment to continually assess the plan
in progress. The purpose of monitoring plans is to recognize any change or deviation
from the plan. The resulting consequences of not recognizing a change or deviation
from the plan can be one or more of the following:
• An unsafe condition
• An at-risk/unsafe behavior
• A missed opportunity to interrupt
• An incident (Near Hit, Serious Near Hit, Personnel Injury, Environmental
Damage, Property Damage)

All personnel must continually monitor their THINK plans and work conditions using
the START Process.

4.2 START OBSERVATION TRAINING

All Company personnel must be trained in the performance of START observations.


Training is available on the “Transocean Safety Leadership Training” DVD Module 7.
Supervisors must actively participate in their employees’ START training utilizing the
information from the DVD. Effective understanding of the process cannot be
accomplished from employee-computer interface. Supervisors must utilize the
information from the DVD to coach, mentor and monitor the effectiveness of their
employees’ observation and monitoring techniques. (See Section 4 Subsection
1.3)

The quality of START observations is enhanced by performing them daily using the
START Card.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

Supervisors should perform joint observations with non-supervisory personnel or


subcontractor personnel to assist their development and understanding of the proper
START observation and feedback techniques.

4.3 START CARD

Supervisors must ensure that they and their personnel perform START observations
and record them on START Cards.

4.4 START OBSERVATION TRACKING

The OIM must ensure an effective system is in place to:


• provide personal oversight of START participation by personnel,
• track, communicate, trend START observations and,
• act upon the results of observations as needed.

Effective START Observation tracking consists of the following:


1. Review and communication of observations by personnel, supervisors and
onboard management. (Review in pre-tour, pre-task, departmental and
morning meetings.)
2. Establish trends of observations for safe behavior, at-risk/unsafe behavior,
and safe and unsafe conditions in the workplace (what, where, when).

The Management of Change process must be used for improvement or corrective


opportunities created from trending results (see Section 1 Subsection 4). Refer to
FOCUS Improvement Process (Section 4 Subsection 6.2) to determine if utilization
of the FOCUS tracking software is necessary.

4.5 START MONITORING

START monitoring is an essential part of the execution of any THINK Plan. It must
be continuously performed. START monitoring is performed by an individual on their
Individual THINK Plan, or performed by a group of individuals on the group’s THINK
plan. START monitoring the execution of a plan is another method of tracking.

Anticipation and recognition of change is accomplished by continuous START


monitoring of the plan using personal experience and knowledge of the plan to
evaluate what could potentially change or cause deviation from the plan.

START monitoring can only be performed by individuals that have a thorough


understanding of the plan. To monitor effectively, continuous evaluation of a plan
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

must be performed to compare what is actually seen, heard and experienced versus
what is planned to be seen, heard or experienced.

START monitoring provides the opportunity to recognize change or deviation from


the plan that has occurred or could occur. Anticipation or recognition of a change
provides the opportunity to interrupt the task and assess the change to control any
new risks.

Effective START monitoring must be performed during the execution of a THINK


plan and includes continuously asking yourself:
• Is the plan still good for the task at hand?
• Are the tools and PPE still suitable for the task at hand?
• Are the risks still the same as identified in the plan?
• Are more or fewer people involved in the task?
• Are all people involved or affected by the plan informed?
• Do I know what will happen next?

4.6 START TOURS

Supervisors must perform periodic dedicated START observation tours. This is


accomplished by making rounds for the specific purpose of conducting observations.
START tours may also be conducted with non-supervisory personnel or
subcontractor personnel for training purposes.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Participate by personally performing START observations daily.
• Are responsible to help achieve an incident-free workplace by interrupting any
unsafe operation and correcting any unsafe behavior or conditions.
• Immediately report any observed unsafe condition to a supervisor if it cannot
be made safe.
• Continually monitor THINK plans and work conditions using the START
Process.
• Develop and improve observation skills through practice and participation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Actively participate in START observations and monitoring.
• Review trends to identify potential proactive efforts.
• Ensure their personnel are trained to perform START observations and
monitoring.
• Review START Cards submitted by their personnel daily.
• Conduct periodic dedicated START observation tours.
• Participate with their people to ensure they are performing START
Observations correctly.
• Make clear their expectations regarding safe behavior and safe conditions.
• Not to tolerate repetitive at-risk/unsafe behaviors by people and always take
the appropriate action to correct.
• Actively participate in employee START training utilizing Module 7 of the
“Transocean Safety Leadership Training” DVD as a tool to ensure effective
understanding of the process.

5.3 OIM:
• Ensure an effective system is in place for tracking, communicating and
trending START observations.
• Review observation trends and ensure appropriate proactive measures are
implemented if necessary.
• Lead interdepartmental START observations.
• Lead clients, subcontractors and client subcontractors to actively participate
in START observations and monitoring.
• Ensure systems are in place to review and communicate observations by
personnel, supervisors and onboard management.
• Hold supervisors accountable for their participation, and that of their people,
in START observations and monitoring.
• Actively recognize personnel’s proactive efforts in START observations and
monitoring (quality cards, participation, consistency of observations).
• Make clear their expectations regarding safe behavior and safe conditions.
• Ensure that at risk/unsafe behavior by people is not tolerated and always take
the appropriate action to correct.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

5.4 RIG MANAGER


• Ensure active participation in the START Process by all personnel.
• Personally lead START observations.
1. Conduct dedicated START observations tours during installation visits.
2. Carry out START observations with supervisors during installation visits to
evaluate the supervisor’s effectiveness in START observations and
monitoring.
• Review observation trends, ensure appropriate proactive measures are
implemented, and suitable resources are provided.

5.5 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT AND OPERATIONS MANAGER


• Personally lead START observations.
1. Conduct dedicated START observations tours during installation visits.
2. Carry out START observations with supervisors during installation visits to
evaluate the supervisor’s effectiveness in START observations and
monitoring.
• Ensure suitable resources are provided to implement proactive measures.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The form indicated below is included in the manual and is not to be modified from its
original format. The form has been developed by Corporate HSE Services and is a
requirement of this policy. The form must be reproduced and made available to all
installations/facilities by their Division/Business Unit offices. Forward any suggested
improvements to the START Card using the HSE Feedback form.
• START Card (Figure A)
(Must be retained until the information is entered into the tracking system.)

The START Card can be used to facilitate individual and verbal THINK Plan
development at the worksite. The card can be used as a checklist for identifying
potential hazards during the job planning stages.

The START Card provides a convenient method to capture the initial details of a
Near Hit by using the categories on the card that are relevant to the event. These
details are transferred to the Incident Report for formal reporting.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process

Figure A, START Card

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel

1 POLICY

Effective means for the safe transport of personnel to and from Company
installations or facilities must be in place.

When traveling in Company vehicles, personnel are responsible for driving or


riding safely.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to reduce the risk of injury to any person and prevent
other incidents while traveling.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 TRAVEL SAFETY BRIEFING

All personnel should be given a travel safety briefing within 24 hours before traveling
to any installation.

All personnel must be given a travel safety briefing within 24 hours prior to departing
from any installation, covering all safety requirements specific to the mode of
transportation.

A Company person designated by the OIM must coordinate the movement of


personnel arriving or departing the installation.

Rules and instructions issued by the helicopter/boat contractor or operator must be


followed.

4.2 HELICOPTER TRAVEL

During helicopter flights over water, life jackets must be worn unless specific
circumstances dictate otherwise (for example, injury or local legislation).

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel

During all helicopter flights, seat belts and hearing protection must be worn and
smoking instructions adhered to. Passengers and helideck crew must wear hearing
protection when approaching or departing helicopters if helicopter engines are
running.

Passengers must exit the helicopter before refueling unless otherwise authorized by
the pilot.

Lightweight or loose articles must be held firmly to prevent them from being sucked
into engine intakes or rotor blades.

When transporting long items in the area of a helicopter, they must be carried
horizontally to prevent contact with rotor blades.

4.3 HELICOPTER OPERATIONS

All Company personnel who travel to or from Company offshore installations by


helicopter must be briefed before each flight. They must also view the Emergency
Helicopter Abandonment Video. Business Unit management is responsible for
determining the interval frequency for viewing the video based on local
environmental and operational conditions. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

A Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) must be trained by a Company approved


instructor and designated by the OIM.

All activities on the helicopter deck, including loading or unloading of passengers


and baggage, must be directed by the HLO.

The HLO must ensure that a fireman dressed in full protective gear is positioned at a
safe distance from the helideck but close enough to man firefighting equipment and
perform entry rescue if necessary. The fireman must maintain a safe distance until
the helicopter makes its landing.

The HLO must ensure the fireman has no other duties while so assigned

During helicopter operations, crane booms must be positioned so that there is no


possibility of interference with the helicopter, and the crane operator must not be in
the crane cab. If simultaneous crane and helicopter operations are planned,
permission must be received from the helicopter pilot to allow the crane operations
to continue.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel

The standby boat, if available, must be notified in advance of arrival or departure of


a helicopter and must be in close attendance to the installation until the helicopter
operation is complete.

In all cases, the helicopter company or client must inform the installation of the
helicopter’s arrival with sufficient notice to allow mobilization and readiness of the
standby boat and helideck crew.

The HLO must ensure the helideck is ready for helicopter operations prior to arrival,
including the following minimum aspects:
• Helideck equipment is verified as operational.
• Helideck is cleared of all loose material.
• Helideck crew wears suitable and secure PPE.

Personnel must only disembark or approach the helicopter under the direction of the
HLO after clearance from the pilot.

Under no circumstance can personnel approach the tail rotor.

Only designated helideck crewmembers are permitted to load and unload baggage
to and from the helicopter.

The installation radio operator and pilot must establish and maintain communication
with the helicopter throughout the operation.

Helicopter manifests must contain the following information at minimum:


• Number of passengers
• Names of passengers
• Weight of passengers, baggage and cargo
• Helicopter identification number

During refueling, the helicopter must be grounded to the installation and fire-fighting
equipment on the helideck manned.

4.4 BOAT OPERATIONS/USE OF PERSONNEL TRANSFER BASKET

Life jackets must be available for all Company personnel traveling by boat.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel

Transfer of personnel between installations and boats must be done only with an
approved personnel transfer device (for example, personnel basket or Frog). The
OIM or designee must approve transfers only after considering natural light
conditions, the wind, sea condition, motion of the installation relative to the boat,
available landing area on the boat deck, experience of the crane operator and
crewmembers being transferred.

The number of personnel on the basket at any time must not exceed the
manufacturer’s specified maximum.

Personnel must wear life jackets or other personal flotation devices during transfer.

Landing areas at both ends of the transfer must be adequately sized and illuminated.

Radio communications must be established and maintained between the installation


crane operator and the banksman on the boat or quayside.

A tag line must be used on the personnel basket.

Any person sick, suffering vertigo or injured must not be allowed to ride the basket,
unless placed inside and escorted by an experienced crewmember.

No cargo except personal luggage may be transferred with the personnel basket.
Luggage must be placed in the middle of the basket and cannot be held by
personnel during transfer.

The basket must be kept over water as much as possible during the transfer.

One transfer basket must be available for use at all times. The basket must be
regularly inspected, certified and recorded in the lifting gear register, in addition to
being visually inspected immediately prior to each use.

The standby boat, if available, must be in close proximity to the installation until the
transfer operation is complete.

Prior to boarding a personnel basket, personnel must receive instruction in the


proper use of the basket from a person authorized by the OIM.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel

4.5 COMPANY VEHICLES

Company vehicles are described as those owned by the Company or on long-term


lease (over one month) for use on public roads.

Company vehicles must only be driven by approved persons holding a valid driving
license for the class of vehicle recognized by the local authority, and operated
according to local traffic laws.

Driving Company vehicles while impaired by any means is prohibited. This includes
driving a personal vehicle while on Company business, as well as a short-term lease
(less than one month) or Company vehicle. For impairment see Section 4
Subsection 5.8. For drugs and alcohol see Section 4 Subsection 1.2.

Company vehicles must be inspected and properly maintained in a road-worthy


condition. Any unsafe condition found during inspection must be rectified as soon as
possible.

The driver and all occupants in Company vehicles must wear seat belts.

Each Division must make available defensive driver training appropriate for the local
conditions. This should be supported with a “hands-on” driving assessment for all
new drivers. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

All personnel driving Company vehicles must receive defensive driver training
appropriate for the local conditions.

The use of an in vehicle monitoring system or vehicle data recorder should be


considered for all long-term contract or company owned multi-passenger vehicles
used for the purpose of transporting company personnel. Consideration must be
given to appropriate route, appropriate time of day to travel, and number of round
trips required.

Company personnel, as well as Company contractor personnel, transporting


Company personnel are responsible for safe driving practices. If passengers
observe unsafe driving practices, they have the obligation to request the driver to
stop the vehicle.

The use of cellular phones while driving any vehicle on Company business is
prohibited unless the phone is used with a “hands free” device, providing this does
not violate local law. Persons should pull over and park the vehicle safely before
holding telephone conversations.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel

Company personnel must use the THINK planning process prior to driving in
Company vehicles.

The following should be considered:


• Is the trip necessary right now?
• Is the journey too long to finish safely without stopping?
• Is the driver suffering from fatigue?
• Is public transportation a viable option?
• Is weather a factor?
• Is the vehicle equipped with area-appropriate emergency supplies?
• Is car-pooling possible?

The number of passengers must not exceed the manufacturer’s design/specification


for the vehicle.

All loads must be secure and not exceed the manufacturer’s design/specification for
the vehicle.

The combination of passengers and load or cargo must be safe even if they do not
exceed the manufacturer’s design/specifications for the vehicle.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Receive instruction in the proper use of a personnel basket prior to utilizing it.
• Manage all aspects of the transportation process within their control to identify
hazards, reduce risk and eliminate unnecessary exposure.
• Wear a seatbelt while in Company vehicles.
• Receive driver training appropriate for local conditions prior to driving
Company vehicles.
• Report all unsafe acts of pilots/drivers/captain while transporting Company
personnel.
• Report poorly maintained, company, client or contractor supplied modes of
transport.
• Receive briefing appropriate to mode of travel prior to travel to/from Company
installations.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel

• View Helicopter Safety DVD-ROM at required intervals.

5.2 HLO:
• Be certified as HLO by Company approved instructor prior to performing as
HLO.
• Direct all activities on the helicopter deck, including loading or unloading of
passengers and baggage.
• Ensure a fireman dressed in full protective gear is positioned safely near the
helideck to man firefighting equipment or perform entry rescue if necessary.
• Ensure fireman has no other duties while assigned to the helideck duties.
• Ensure the helideck is ready for helicopter operations prior to arrival.

5.3 OIM:
• Ensure Helicopter Safety DVD-ROM is watched at intervals determined by
the Business Unit Vice President.
• Designate a Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) to coordinate the movement of
personnel arriving or departing the installation.
• Approve boat transfers of personnel only after considering the relevant safety
factors described in the procedure.
• Ensure all personnel are given a travel safety briefing within 24 hours prior to
departing from any installation, covering all safety requirements specific to the
mode of transportation.
• Authorize personnel to give instruction in the proper use of the basket.

5.4 DIVISION/SECTOR HSE MANAGER


• Approve content of Helicopter/Travel safety briefing.
• Make available defensive driver training appropriate for the local conditions.

5.5 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT:


• Determine the interval frequency for viewing Helicopter Safety DVD-ROM
based on local environmental and operational conditions.

6 DOCUMENTATION

There is currently no documentation associated with this Policy or Procedure.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

1 POLICY

Company personnel and Company subcontractors must behave safely to


prevent injury, environmental and property damage and must interrupt the
work to avoid a risk of injury, or damage to the environment or property.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to enforce safe work practices to prevent injuries or
damage to the environment.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency at any
Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

Understanding risk and acknowledging that not everyone perceives risk at the same
level creates the need for effective communication at all times. All Company
personnel are responsible for their own safety and behavior. They are also obligated
to interrupt any unsafe operation and take necessary steps to correct any unsafe
behavior or conditions.

The procedure below does not capture all basic safe work practices but is meant to
give examples to encourage personnel to THINK about basic safe work practices
when planning or carrying out a task. Typically, many injuries occur when basic safe
practices are not followed, causing slips, trips, falls and crush points. Proactively
using the THINK planning and START monitoring processes and incorporating basic
safe practices will prevent such injuries from occurring.

4.1 HOUSEKEEPING

Good housekeeping is a sign of a well-run installation or facility.

All Company installations and facilities must be maintained with the highest regard
for good housekeeping practices in the areas of cleanliness and appearance.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 1 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

A system for designating areas of responsibility for housekeeping must be put in


place for each installation and facility.

All work areas on the installation or at the facility must be maintained in a way that
provides a safe and organized working environment.

Floors, steps, stairs and walkways must be kept clean and free from slippery
substances, tripping hazards or other obstructions to the best extent possible.

All stairs outside the accommodations area must be fitted with a non-slip surface
such as SCOTGRIP SSN Premier or equivalent. This includes all indoor machinery
spaces.

Non-slip surfaces must be maintained in good condition and free of oil and mud to
the best extent possible.

Adequate measures to prevent spills and leaks from becoming hazards must be put
in place (for example, drip trays, splash guards, sight glass isolations, drain plugs,
and so forth).

Special attention must be paid to drill-floor housekeeping during periods of high


activity, such as tripping tubulars and casing operations.

Slips, protectors, tools, and so on should be promptly and properly stored and not
allowed to accumulate around the work area.

Soiled cleaning materials, scrap and waste must be placed in designated containers
for proper disposal.

4.2 LIGHTING

Lighting systems shall provide a sufficient level of illumination in all work areas. All
light lenses must be kept clean and maintained.

All escape routes, embarkation areas and any emergency control panels shall have
the ability to be supplied by an emergency power source in the event of loss of
normal power.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 2 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

4.3 DECK MANAGEMENT

Escape routes and access to safety equipment must be clearly identified and must
not be restricted in any way, unless alternative plans are in place.

Cargo handling material such as slings, shackles, and so on must be stored in


designated areas.

All deck cargo must be stored in a manner to prevent movement caused by adverse
weather conditions and/or vessel motion.

All loose items of deck cargo must be located in areas where deck loading
limitations are not exceeded.

“Lever” or “Breakover” style chain binders must not be used by Company personnel
or used to secure Company owned equipment. If these type binders are used to
secure subcontractor equipment they must be fitted or removed by a representative
of the company that is responsible for the equipment. If it is not possible for a
subcontractor representative to fit/remove the binder, a supervisor such as a Crane
Operator or Deck Foreman must perform the task.

If a binding device is needed, ratchet style load binders, turnbuckles, or ratchet style
tie down straps must be used by Company personnel to secure Company owned
equipment.

4.4 SAFE BEHAVIOR

Horseplay is not permitted at any installation, facility, or office at any time.

Recreational swimming and diving from installations is prohibited.

Recreational fishing is not permitted from any installation or facility.

Handrails must be used when ascending or descending stairs.

4.5 SAFE WORKING LIMITS

The manufacturer's stated safe working limit for any piece of equipment or system
must not be exceeded. Safeguards or procedures must be present to prevent
exceeding these limits. The equipment must be maintained in such a manner to
allow operation up to the safe working limit. When exceptional circumstances

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 3 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

prevent equipment from being maintained in a manner that allows operation up to


the safe working limit, temporary controls must be put in place, such as removing the
equipment from service or reducing limit levels.

When continuous operation of equipment approaching the stated safe working limit
is required, consideration must be given to additional safety measures to be taken in
case of equipment failure. This could include guards, barriers or restrictions to
personnel being put in place, or simply ensuring that all personnel are aware of the
increased hazard of equipment approaching its operational limit.

4.6 SAFE TRIPPING OF TUBULARS

The derrick racking board and the rotary table must be visible to the driller either by
direct line of sight or by remote camera.

The derrick racking board must be equipped with mechanical means to assist in
moving tubulars.

Tubulars must be secured at the derrick racking board level immediately after being
racked.

An effective procedure for drifting tubulars in the mast/derrick must be used to


ensure that drifting operations are conducted safely.

Dumbbell type safety handles must be fitted on all manual tongs including extension
jaws for casing and BHAs, as well as spares held onboard.

Industry recognized pinch points will be painted yellow and black, safe handholds
will be painted green.

Web handles should be used to maneuver power tongs on and off tubulars.

Personnel must stay clear of tong lines and chains while tension is being applied for
makeup or break out of tubulars.

BHA components must not be allowed to fall over after being removed from the drill
string.

Formation accumulation and safety clamps must be removed from tool joints and/or
BHA components before being hoisted into the mast/derrick.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 4 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

Hands or feet must not be placed below the core barrel opening while recovering
cores.

4.7 MANUAL TONG SNUB LINES

Snub lines must be:


• Ordered for the specific application for which they are to be used (fit for
purpose).
• Marked with length of line and SWL.
• Spares maintained in a secure environment to preserve condition with
suitable controls in place for issuance, use, and re-ordering.

4.8 WIRELINE OPERATIONS

During wireline operations, the drill floor, wireline unit and any areas between the
two where the wireline is in tension must be designated as restricted areas.

Prior to start of wireline operations, a THINK plan meeting must be held with
relevant installation and subcontractor personnel.

Public address announcements must be made at the start, as necessary during and
at the completion of wireline operations.

Fluid levels in the well bore must be monitored throughout the wireline operation.

Communications must be established, tested, and maintained between the wireline


unit and the drill floor.

4.9 DROPPED OBJECTS

Derricks, masts, crane booms and any area where there is a potential of dropped
objects must be inspected at regular intervals to ensure that objects are adequately
secured with safety lines or that a secondary means of securing is in place to
prevent any objects from falling. Surplus or redundant equipment must be removed.

Storage shelves must be designed to prevent objects from falling.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 5 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

4.9.1 DROPPED OBJECTS PREVENTION SCHEME (DROPS)

The Company required dropped objects prevention program is “Dropped Objects


Prevention Scheme” (DROPS). The Dropped Objects Prevention Scheme (DROPS)
is available via the internet at www.dropsworkpack.com.

The Dropped Objects Prevention Scheme contains the following criteria:


• Dropped objects awareness campaign
• Dropped objects inventory register
• Removal of redundant and non-essential equipment identified in the “Dropped
Objects Inventory Register”
• Risk Assessment of equipment in areas listed in “Dropped Objects Inventory
Register”
• Record of risk-reducing controls (preventive and mitigating)
• Inspection routine
• The inspection procedures and routine must be included in the installation’s
planned maintenance system

The Dropped Objects Inventory Register must include but is not limited to the
following areas and related equipment:
• Derrick and Substructure
− Crown and water table
− Monkey board
− Traveling equipment
− Drill floor and mezzanine deck
− Lower substructure and BOP area
• BOP and Tubular Handling Equipment
− Pipe racking system (PRS)
− Pipe handling system
− Top drive
− Pick Up/Lay down machines
− BOP Crane
− Drill floor hoists
− Iron roughneck
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 6 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

DROPS assessments must be completed every three years by an independent


assessor. The medium and high priority action items identified by DROPS
assessments must be entered into FOCUS.

Medium and high priority deficiencies from regular DROPS maintenance tasks must
be entered into FOCUS.

4.9.2 WORKING WITH TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT AT HEIGHT

The following must be adhered to when working with tools at height:


• During the THINK planning stage preventative and mitigating controls for
dropped objects must be developed.
• All tools and equipment used at height must be adequately secured to either
the user or the workplace.
• Tools must provide a lanyard attachment point that still enables the tool to be
used effectively.
• Sockets and extensions must be “locked-on” to ratchets.
• Tools taken aloft must be secured in a tool bag or on tool belt with the bag or
belt attached to the user and the tools attached to the bag or belt.
• Items must not be loosely carried in pockets where there is the possibility of
them falling out (for example; tally books, pens, keys, tape measures, and so
on).
• Where work at height is taking place, the area below shall be equipped with
suitable barriers/warning signs to prevent unauthorized entry.

All tools, equipment and other loose items taken into the derrick must be entered
into the Derrick Log Book (See Section 4 Subsection 5.5)

4.10 KNIVES

The use of knives is prohibited except for food preparation and dining. Alternative
cutting tools must be used.

4.11 HAND TOOLS

Crewmembers must be made aware of safe working practices associated with hand
tools, including but not limited to:

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 7 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

• The proper tool for the job and its correct use
• Inspection of tools prior to use to verify fit for purpose.
• Proper securing of tools when working at heights.
• Tracking of tools taken up the mast/derrick.
• Requirement to not modify the design of a tool.
• Procedures for cleaning and storing tools on completion of the task.

Hand tools must not be used beyond the manufacturer's operating limits or in ways
not recommended/approved by the manufacturer, specifically (as a minimum):
• Torque, air pressure and rated rpm
• Explosion protection for use in designated hazardous areas
• Shock proofing for use in wet conditions
• Size of tools to be used with equipment (drills, discs, and so forth)

The OIM must ensure that necessary tools are provided onboard and that training is
given to employees in their proper use. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

No personal tools may be used to perform work on any installation or at any facility.

Hand tools that are in an unsafe or questionable condition must be taken out of
service and repaired or replaced. To ensure tool integrity is not compromised,
repairs to hand tools may only be effected by the manufacturer or by someone with
the knowledge, skills and ability to safely complete the repair.

Only approved explosion protected extension cords may be used in areas defined as
hazardous areas and where there may be potential gaseous conditions.

Non-explosion protected hand tools must never be connected to explosion protected


cords in a hazardous area without the OIM's approval and a valid Permit to Work in
effect.

4.12 PORTABLE LADDERS AND STEPS

Before using portable ladders or steps, Company personnel must be trained in their
correct use and the procedures to be followed in order to identify and control the
hazards associated with their use. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 8 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

Portable ladders and steps may be used for work at a height only under
circumstances in which the use of safer access equipment is not justified in view of
the short duration of use and low level of risk.

Never overreach when working from a ladder or steps.

Portable ladders and steps must be positioned to ensure their stability during use. It
is essential that they rest on a stable, strong, immobile and horizontal footing.

Portable ladders must be secured to prevent slipping before they are used. Ladders
with several sections must be correctly used and secured to ensure that the sections
are prevented from moving relative to each other.

Portable ladders and steps should be stored undercover with adequate ventilation.
They should be kept away from excessive heat or dampness and not be left
exposed to the weather.

All portable ladders and steps must be inspected before use. Portable ladders and
steps found to be unsafe must be removed from service.

A ladder register and inspection routine must be included in the planned


maintenance system.

4.13 POWERED (LOCAL OR REMOTE CONTROLLED) WATERTIGHT DOORS


AND HATCHES

Before passing through any powered (local or remote controlled) watertight door or
hatch opening, the door or hatch must be in the full open position and not in motion.
Persons having access to remote control switches for powered doors or hatches
must be assured the area is clear of personnel before activating remote control
switches.

All powered (local- or remote controlled) watertight doors and hatches must have an
audible and visual warning system at both sides of the door or hatch that warns
personnel of the hazard of the door or hatch opening or closing.

All powered (local controlled) watertight doors must have signs posted adjacent to
and on both sides of the door indicating: "Warning - Open Door Fully Before Passing
Through."

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 9 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

All powered (remote controlled) watertight doors must have signs posted adjacent to
and on both sides of the door indicating: "Warning - Open Door Fully Before Passing
Through. This Door May Close Automatically."

4.14 REMOTE CONTROLLED MACHINERY

All remote controlled machinery with exposed moving parts (such as anchor
winches, jacking gears, wireline units, hose reels, and so forth), must be clearly
marked with warning signs stating "Warning - this machinery may be remotely
operated at any time" or a similar statement.

4.15 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS

4.15.1 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION

All installations must be equipped with fixed hands-free communication systems, (for
example, talkback, clearcall, and so on) between the driller’s stations and the derrick
racking board, as well as between the driller’s stations and the BOP working area.

4.15.2 PORTABLE COMMUNICATION

Installations should utilize radio communications (transmit and receive) equipment to


provide an effective method of verbal communication during tasks for all personnel
who are directly involved in:
• Drilling operations,
• Lifting operations, and
• Other operations where the THINK Planning Process has determined that
radio use will reduce the likelihood and/or consequences of an incident.

4.16 NON-METALLIC PIPES

Due to inherent conductivity, all non-metallic pipes must be grounded.

Use of non-metallic piping must be in accordance with IMO Resolution A.753(18)


and installation classification society guidelines (ABS, DNV, and so on).

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 10 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Conduct themselves in a manner to protect themselves and others who may
be affected by their actions, the environment and property.
• Have the obligation to interrupt the operation if someone's safety is
jeopardized or if damage to the environment or property is likely.

5.2 OIM:
• Ensure that necessary tools and equipment associated with this policy and
procedure are provided onboard and that training is given to employees in
their proper use.
• Approve the connection of non-explosion protected hand tools to explosion
protected cords in a hazardous area and ensure a valid Permit to Work is in
effect.
• Ensure the installation is maintained with the highest regard for good
housekeeping and deck management.
• Ensure a system for designating areas of responsibility is put in place.

5.3 BUSINESS UNIT QHSE MANAGER:


• Facilitate implementation of DROPS program.

5.4 DIVISION MANAGER:


• Ensure implementation of DROPS program.
• Provide adequate resources necessary to implement a DROPS program or
equivalent.
• Ensure that installations are provided with the necessary tools and equipment
associated with this policy and procedure.
• Ensure that training is available to employees in the proper use of tools and
equipment associated with this policy and procedure.

5.5 BUSINES UNIT VICE PRESIDENT:


• Approve type of portable radio equipment to be utilized in the Business Unit.

6 DOCUMENTATION

There is currently no documentation associated with this Policy or Procedure.


Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 11 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

1 POLICY

Any energy-containing system or component must be effectively managed


and controlled in normal operation, maintenance or during testing.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to heighten the awareness of personnel regarding


energy sources and ensure that equipment is rendered safe by releasing any
trapped energy from it and that the equipment cannot be energized at either local or
remote locations.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all personnel that work at Company installations and facilities.

4 PROCEDURE

Equipment or systems containing energy (including electrical, mechanical, hydraulic,


pneumatic, thermal and kinetic) must be clearly marked to allow identification.

Energy isolation must be considered prior to maintaining or repairing any system or


equipment containing energy.

Worm drive securing devices (jubilee clips, radiator hose clamps, and so on) must
not be used on pressurized connections.

4.1 TRAINING

Training for compressed gases may be found in the Safety OJT Module.

The OIM must:


• Ensure only competent personnel perform maintenance or repairs to any
system or component containing energy.
• Authorize personnel as responsible for that system or component.
• Ensure personnel who perform maintenance or repairs to systems or
components that contain or may contain energy have been trained in the
requirements of energy isolation. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3).

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

Only personnel authorized by the OIM or designee may perform isolations. These
personnel must be competent in their knowledge and understanding of hazards, the
equipment to be worked on, and the procedures and skills necessary to effect and
remove the following categories of isolations:
• Electrical
• Mechanical
• Hydraulic
• Pneumatic
• Thermal
• Kinetic
• Chemical
• Stored

4.2 ENERGY SOURCES

4.2.1 ELECTRICAL ENERGY

Aspects concerning the control of the hazards associated with electricity are detailed
within the Electrical Safety policy. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.9)

4.2.2 MECHANICAL ENERGY

Appropriate guards or shields must be installed on all equipment to adequately


protect personnel from moving parts (such as grinding wheels, belts, chains, and so
on).

Grinding/abrasive wheels and their working RPM must match that of the grinder.

Manufacturer’s recommended working pressure must not be exceeded on


pneumatic or hydraulic tools.

Lathes, drilling machines, pedestal drills and band saws must be fitted with an
instantaneous shut down device (for example, DC injection braking). If
instantaneous shutdown devices cannot be fitted, guards must be installed that
enclose all moving parts and prevent the machine from operating when they are
removed.

All shop appliances not fitted with instantaneous shutdown devices must be fitted
with a “deadman” switch.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

Power hand tools must not have the ability to be locked in the “On” position.

Attachments to power tools (for example, sockets to impact wrenches) must be


properly secured.

The hazards of other forms of mechanical energy (including springs, levers, and
equipment falling due to failed hydraulic systems) must be controlled.

4.2.3 PRESSURE ENERGY

Pressure is defined as any substance (air, hydraulic, water, well bore fluids, and so
forth) under pressure, for test purposes or for normal use, that can cause severe
injury to personnel or damage to property if a sudden rupture or burst occurs.

All connections on pressurized lines must be snubbed with adequate means to


prevent them from swinging or kicking in case of sudden release of pressure or
rupture of the line, and must be suitable for the pressure intended.

Pressurized lines and hoses must be adequately secured to prevent mechanical


damage.

Pressure relief lines must be secured against movement when pressure is released.

Isolation valves cannot be installed in pressure relief lines.

A Permit to Work must be completed before any testing or maintenance on


equipment that contains or may contain residual pressure.

For maintenance isolations, there must be a positive means to confirm all pressure
is relieved and system is made safe by proper lockouts of control valves. This may
mean locking valves open or closed.

All personnel on board must be made aware of pressure testing and the area
involved must be appropriately marked and/or barricaded.

A means must be provided to ensure that the intended maximum pressure is not
exceeded. To avoid exceeding the intended maximum pressure, use test pressure
only during testing operations. Safe working pressure must be adhered to for normal
use.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

Components under pressure must not be subjected to any form of shock loading,
used as a lifting gear securing point, hammered on or used as support for other
equipment.

All personnel involved in the operation must be made aware of the possibility of
trapped pressure in any pressurized system. A means of safely bleeding off
pressure must be an integral part of the system. Special precautions should be
taken when troubleshooting any problem with pressurized systems.

All fixed-pressure vessels must have the maximum safe working pressure clearly
indicated and a means of indicating current pressure. Pressure relief mechanisms
must be installed to prevent exceeding the safe working pressure, and must be
tested as per the Company Standard PM Task for EMPAC asset 00959 - Relief
Valves.

A system must be in place to ensure that the downstream side of pressure relief
mechanisms remains clear of obstructions.

Each accumulator bank will be fitted with an isolation valve and a vent valve, as well
as a pressure gauge that is fitted with an isolation valve and a vent valve. There
must be provision provided to lock these valves in the open or closed position.

The following procedure is included as one example of a means to isolate a


pressurized energy source (referenced from HQS-OPS-ST-01):
• Check that the pressure gauge is operational before proceeding with
maintenance.
• When any maintenance is to be performed on any accumulator bank, the
accumulator isolation valve will be closed and the accumulator vent valve will
be opened, the pressure gauge isolation valve will be in the open position and
the gauge will be reading zero.
• There will be provision provided to lock the accumulator isolation valve in the
closed position and to lock the accumulator vent valve and the pressure
gauge isolation valve in the open position.
• These valves are to remain in the isolation and vent position until all
maintenance work is completed.

Portable hoses and fittings must be suitable for the intended use (pressure, volume,
contents, and so forth), inspected prior to use, properly installed and secured (for
example: whipchecks, “R” clips, etc.) in case of connection failure.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

4.2.4 COMPRESSED GASES AND CYLINDERS

All gas cylinders must be checked for general condition, leaks and hydrostatic test
date upon arrival at the Installation or facility. Cylinders must be marked with the
date these checks were performed and indicate that they meet the preceding
criteria.

Nitrogen cylinder contents must be checked with a gas detector (oxygen analyzer) to
confirm whether the contents are inert or flammable. However, in developed areas
where an established infrastructure provides reliable and consistent quality control
supported by regulatory legislation, this check may be performed prior to delivery to
the installation/facility. The cylinder must be accompanied with documentation to
confirm the contents. The gas/cylinder provider should have a system in place to
manage and track the inspection and filling of the gas cylinders.

In locations where an established infrastructure does not provide reliable and


consistent quality control, cylinder contents must be verified at the installation/facility
for inert or flammable gases, prior to use.

Cylinders must be stored in an upright position at all times. Caps must be removed
only when the cylinders are in use. If cylinders are designed for caps, they must be
secured on both full and empty cylinders while they are being moved or transported.

When cylinders are in transit, they must be secured, preferably in racks.

Cylinder trolleys should be used to transport cylinders from one place to another.

Portable transfer racks for working sets of oxygen/acetylene bottles must be


constructed to ensure a steel plate separates the bottles, and bottles are adequately
secured to protect gauges, regulators and valves.

Portable transfer racks and cylinder trolleys subject to being hoisted must be
included in the lifting gear register.

Cylinders should not be subjected to temperatures above 54°C (129°F) and should
be stored in a shaded area. Cylinders must also be protected from the radiant heat
of flares.

The cylinders should be stored in a designated area.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

Empty cylinders should be separated from full ones and must be marked
accordingly.

Closed storage areas must be ventilated to atmosphere or cylinders must be stored


in the open air.

Oxygen and acetylene cylinders must not be stored alongside one another. They
must be separated by a distance of at least six meters or with a non-flammable
barrier.

Cylinders must not be used as rollers or support even if they are believed to be
empty.

Valves on all compressed gas cylinders must be closed when not in use.

An efficient backpressure valve (in-line check valve) and a flash/flame arrestor must
be provided near the cylinder in the acetylene and oxygen supply lines.

The pressure of oxygen should always be high enough to prevent acetylene flowing
back into the oxygen line.

Acetylene pressure should not exceed 1-bar (14.7psi) due to risk of explosion.

When oxygen or acetylene cylinders are coupled (banked), flame/flash arrestors


should be used between the cylinders and the coupler block or between the coupler
block and the regulator. Only oxygen or acetylene cylinders of approximately equal
pressure should be coupled.

Manifold hose connections, including inlet and outlet connections, should be such
that the hose cannot be interchanged between fuel gases and oxygen manifolds and
headers.

Grease or oil must not be used on any oxygen/acetylene system threaded


connections.

Only approved pressure gauges may be attached to oxygen and acetylene


bottles. These gauges must be dry gauges and crossovers should not be used.

No liquid filled gauges may be used on any compressed gas bottles unless it is filled
with Halocarbon liquid.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

Only those hoses specifically designed for welding and cutting operations should be
used to connect an oxygen/acetylene cutting torch to gas outlets.

Accumulators and pulsation dampeners must be pre-charged with only inert gases,
such as nitrogen.

Oxygen must not be used in place of compressed air for tools, air starters, cleaning
purposes or other uses.

4.2.5 COMPRESSED AIR

Compressed air must not be used as a means of removing dust, dirt, and so forth,
from a person’s body or clothing.

Air used for cleaning or drying purposes must only be done using adequate tools,
and the pressure must be limited to 30psi.

Compressed air must not be used for blowing a drift through tubulars.

Compressed air must not be used for clearing a blocked line or pipe, except during
the routine operation of the bulk system.

The main rig air system or any rig air compressor must not be connected to the flare
boom. Connection to the flare boom via portable air compressor(s) stored on an
open deck is allowed.

Isolation valves cannot be installed in relief lines either before or after the pressure
relief mechanism.

4.2.6 OTHER FORMS OF ENERGY

Other forms of potential energy must be considered during the hazard identification
step of the THINK Planning Process, including:
• Thermal Energy, such as heat or cold radiating from hot or cold surfaces;
heat generated by friction or chemical reaction, steam lines, steam lances,
and so forth; or cold generated by flowing gas, and so forth.
• Kinetic energy, such as unsecured hanging items swinging due to vessel
motion, movement due to sudden impact from another item, dropped objects,
and so forth.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

• Chemical energy, which can be the result of a chemical reaction between two
or more substances. Review the manufacturer's instructions and Material
Safety Data Sheets before mixing chemical substances (for example, two-part
paints, two-part resins, use of acid or alkaline batteries, and so forth).
• Nuclear energy (which results in a radioactive hazard) and explosives are
covered in the Hazardous Material Policy. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.7)
• Stored energy (such as compressed springs and electrical capacitance)
which may not be as obvious or as easily isolated.

4.3 ENERGY ISOLATION

4.3.1 PERSONS INVOLVED IN ISOLATIONS

A. RESPONSIBLE PERSON

The person who authorizes isolations within an area of operation or for a particular
system. The OIM must authorize Responsible Persons for defined areas of
operation and systems.

B. COMPETENT PERSON

The person who is deemed “Competent” to isolate a given piece of equipment or


system. The OIM must authorize individuals as competent persons for each type of
energy isolation.

C. PERSON IN CHARGE OF CARRYING OUT THE WORK

The person who is in charge of carrying out the work on the isolated equipment and
is the person who requests permission for the isolation from the Responsible
Person.

D. OIM

The OIM determines if a Permit to Work is an additional requirement when an


isolation certificate is issued for maintenance or repair of a system or component
containing energy. In some cases the work is only hazardous because of the energy.
When effective isolation is achieved, the work may no longer be hazardous and
hence the isolation process controls the risks associated with the energy.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

4.3.2 OBJECTIVES OF THE ISOLATION SYSTEM

The overall objective is to always use the highest level of isolation that is reasonably
practicable.
• The adequacy of the isolation must reflect any reasonably foreseeable
hazards and the consequences should those hazards be realized.
• Isolations must be in place throughout the duration of the operation.
• Isolations must be “tried” to prove effectiveness.
• Isolated equipment and remote operating stations must be correctly and
clearly identified with energy isolation tags.
• Isolations must be recorded in the documentation system.

4.3.3 STANDARD ISOLATION PROCESS

A standard isolation is one that is in place for equipment or systems for work
performed during a period less than 24 hours (see paragraph 4.3.5 for Long Term
Isolation).

The following is the standard process for a person in charge of carrying out the work
to request an electrical, mechanical, pneumatic, thermal and/or hydraulic isolation:
• Contact the relevant departmental responsible person.
• The responsible person authorizes the isolation and ensures the person in
charge of carrying out the work fully understands all relevant isolations
required.
• The person in charge of carrying out the work contacts the competent person
who then performs the isolation.
• The competent person must ensure that all stored energy is discharged prior
to performing the isolation.
• The competent person isolates and tags the equipment or system with the
required warning tags. Locks, hasps or other special arrangements to
positively isolate the energy source may be required.
• The competent person and person in charge of carrying out the work must
physically conduct a test to ensure that the isolation is effective before work
on the equipment or system begins. This can be achieved by either
attempting to operate (if equipment) or (if a system) by other physical means
(mechanical, electrical, bleed off of pressure, etc.) to confirm positive
isolation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

• The person in charge must periodically monitor the effectiveness of the


isolation. Any work handed over must be entered on the isolation certificate.
• When work is handed over, the person in charge must verify that the isolation
of equipment or system and discharge of stored energy remains effective.

The competent person and person in charge of carrying out the work (who may be
the same person) must enter the isolation details on the isolation certificate. One
copy of the isolation certificate is retained at the isolation co-ordination point and the
person in charge of carrying out the work retains a copy.

There must be a system in place for each person performing work on an isolated
piece of equipment to maintain control (individually lock or secure) of the mechanism
maintaining the isolation.

4.3.4 STANDARD DE-ISOLATION PROCESS

The following is the standard de-isolation process for the person in charge of
carrying out the work to request an electrical, mechanical, pneumatic, thermal and/or
hydraulic de-isolation:

• When a job is complete, the person in charge of carrying out the work must
complete the relevant section of the isolation certificate. When de-isolating
from a long-term isolation, the isolation must also be closed out in the long-
term isolation logbook and removed from the notification board.
• The person in charge of carrying out the work requests the responsible
person to confirm that the equipment is safe to be de-isolated.
• The competent person ensures that it is safe to restore energy, removes all
isolation tags (locks, etc., if used) and signs off on the isolation certificate.
• The responsible person or designee can now test the equipment. They must
be satisfied that the equipment is operating correctly and that the relevant
people have been informed before the equipment is returned to service.

4.3.5 LONG-TERM ISOLATIONS

An isolation is considered long-term if it has been active for more than 24 hours and
the equipment is no longer actually being worked on (for example, awaiting spare
parts) but is not ready for de-isolation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

When a change of status from standard to long-term isolation is required, the person
in charge of carrying out the work notifies the responsible person and all parties
involved in the standard isolation.

During any long-term isolation, the following additional points must be addressed:
• The OIM must be informed by responsible person.
• The method of securing the long-term isolation (for example, locking of
electrical isolators, locking of valve handles, removal of valve handles, use of
blind flanges, and so forth) must be confirmed.
• All copies of the isolation certificate must be marked “LONG-TERM
ISOLATION.”
• One copy of the isolation certificate must be retained at the isolation
coordination point.
• Long-term isolations must have a copy of the isolation certificate at the
isolation points and may also have a copy on the equipment itself.
• A long-term isolation logbook or notification board must be maintained at an
appropriate central location.

When the work recommences on equipment covered by a long-term isolation, the


responsible person informs the OIM or designee and ensures that:
• The competent person and the person in charge of the work review the long-
term isolation certificate. The person in charge of the work must sign the long-
term isolation certificate.
• Operation of the equipment is physically tried to confirm positive isolation
before work on the system or equipment begins.
• The work proceeds according to standard isolation procedure previously
detailed.

4.3.6 LONG TERM DE-ISOLATION PROCESS

Proceeds according to standard de-isolation process.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 RESPONSIBLE PERSON:


• Ensure the person in charge of carrying out the work fully understands all
relevant isolations required.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

• Visit the work site and ensure THINK Plans and Isolations are appropriate.
• Test the equipment and must be satisfied that the equipment is operating
correctly and that the relevant people have been informed before the
equipment is returned to service.
• Notify the OIM when any standard isolation becomes long-term.

5.2 COMPETENT PERSON:


• Isolate and tag the equipment or system with the required warning tags,
locks, hasps and special equipment.
• Enter the isolation details on the isolation certificate.
• Physically try to operate the equipment to confirm positive isolation before
work begins on the system or equipment.
• Ensure it is safe to re-instate energy, remove all isolation tags (locks, and so
forth, if used) and sign off on the isolation certificate.

5.3 PERSON IN CHARGE OF CARRYING OUT THE WORK:


• Request permission for the isolation from the Responsible Person.
• Contact the Competent Person who will perform the isolation.
• Enter the isolation details on the isolation certificate.
• Request the Responsible Person to confirm that the equipment is safe to be
de-isolated.
• Notify the Responsible Person and all parties involved in the standard
isolation if the isolation becomes long-term.
• Physically try to operate the equipment to confirm positive isolation before
work begins on the system or equipment.
• Personally ensure the isolation is individually secured and maintain control of
the isolation for the entire time they are actively performing work on the
equipment.

5.4 OIM:
• Ensure a system is in place to meet the requirements outlined in this
procedure.
• Ensure all Company personnel who perform maintenance or repairs have
been trained in the requirements of energy isolation (rendering
equipment/system safe from an energy source or sources) as per Company
training.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

• The OIM must determine if a Permit to Work is an additional requirement


when an isolation certificate is issued for maintenance or repair of a system or
component containing energy.
• Define responsible person for areas of operation.
• Authorize individuals as competent persons for each type of energy isolation.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Cylinder Status Tag (Figure A)
(Must remain on cylinders from the time they arrive to the time they depart the
installation or facility.)
• Energy Isolation Certificate (Figure B)
(Must be retained in the installation or facility files for a period of one year.)

An isolation logbook may be used at the discretion of the Business Unit Vice
President. The purpose of the logbook is to provide an efficient method for tracking
and auditing isolation certificates.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

Figure A, Cylinder Status Tag

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation

Figure B, Energy Isolation Certificate

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

1 POLICY

All installations and facilities must adequately protect personnel from the risk
of falling from heights.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that the risk of falling is assessed and
personnel are protected from falling and the injuries associated with falling.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

Fall protection is a system of support that prevents or arrests an individual's fall. A


method of fall protection must be utilized when working at an elevated position that
is more than 6 feet, 7 inches (2 meters) above normal working surfaces and where
any fall hazard exists.

4.1 TRAINING

All employees must be trained to recognize the hazards of falling and the
procedures to be followed in order to minimize any associated risk. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3) The training must include a practical demonstration using
equipment utilized on the installation. The training must be given in an organized
manner and must be fully documented.

There must be one person trained as a Competent Person in fall protection by a


Company approved instructor on the installation at all times. Each Business Unit is
responsible for approving fall protection training providers. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)

There must be one person trained by a Company-approved instructor as a


Competent Person in confined space rescue and rescue from heights on the
installation at all times. Each Business Unit is responsible for approving the training
provider(s). (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

4.2 METHODS OF FALL PROTECTION

The following methods of fall protection must be used, in order of preference:


• Fall hazard elimination (for example, repositioning valves down to deck level).
• Traditional fall protection (for example, handrails, guardrails).
• A fall restraint system, such as restraint lines that prevent personnel from
reaching the fall hazard (for example, derrickman's harness).
• A fall arrest system, such as lanyards with personal shock absorbers, self-
retracting lifelines (inertia reels), or ladder climbing systems that "catch"
personnel when the possibility of a fall cannot be prevented.

Fall protection procedures (for example, personnel basket, man-riding operations)


must be used only when it is clearly impractical to provide complete fall protection
using any of the preceding methods. Personnel using such procedures must be
trained to recognize the fall hazards involved and to fully understand their roles and
responsibilities.

4.3 TRADITIONAL FALL PROTECTION

All stairways and permanently elevated walking and working areas must be
equipped with handrails.

All deck openings must be covered or adequately guarded.

Handrails, including temporary and removable types, must be of sufficient strength.

All handrails, barriers, stairways, gratings, elevated walkways and elevated working
areas must be maintained. A procedure for verifying the integrity of these structures
must be included in the planned maintenance system.

4.4 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS AND PPE

Units or Divisions must define and approve specific fall protection equipment to meet
the minimum standards outlined in this procedure and comply with local legislation.
(See HQS-OPS-EST-708-02 Equipment standard for Fall Protection Devices)

Fall protection systems and equipment must be inspected before each use and
included in the planned maintenance system.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

Fall protection equipment inspection criteria and regime must meet the
manufacturer’s recommendations for each.

The rescue of personnel working at elevated levels must be discussed and planned
for during the THINK planning process for the relevant task. As a minimum, the
following must be considered during discussion and planning:
• Equipment required to perform rescue operations.
• Length of time required to perform rescue operations.
• Forces exerted on personnel from being suspended for that period of time.
• Availability of alternative methods to perform rescue operations.

Equipment designed for rescue from heights must be stored, maintained and
inspected as per the manufacturer recommendations and included in the
installation’s planned maintenance system.

All fall protection PPE must be properly stowed in dedicated boxes or lockers when
not in use.

4.5 FIXED VERTICAL LADDERS

A dedicated fixed-ladder climbing system is a system fitted to fixed ladders to


provide personal fall protection during ascent or descent.

Only Company approved ladder-climbing systems, fall arrest devices and full body
harnesses may be used for ladder climbing.

Back scratchers or ladder cages are not considered suitable or sufficient fall
protection equipment.

All derrick ladders must be fitted with a dedicated fixed-ladder climbing system.

Personnel on ladders must maintain a minimum of three points of contact at all


times.

All ladders designated “For Emergency Escape Only” must be clearly identified (for
example, painted red) in a manner to avoid confusion with other ladders and
maintained so it is accessible and kept clear of obstruction.

Any ladder used as a platform to perform work must be fitted with fall protection
suitable for the work performed.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

4.5.1 LADDERS OVER 10 FEET (3.05 METERS)

All fixed vertical ladders over 10 feet (3.05 meters), except those used solely for
emergency escape, require one of the following during ascent or descent:
1) A dedicated fixed ladder climbing system OR
2) The use of a permanent or temporary fall arrest device OR
3) Fall prevention providing 100% tie off at all times.

All fixed vertical ladders over 10 feet (3.05 meters), except those used solely for
emergency escape, must be assessed to determine a suitable means of fall
protection. This assessment must include as a minimum:
• Necessity of ladder
• Feasibility of replacement with stairway
• Location of ladder
• Frequency and duration of use (rarely/often used)
• Existing, normal condition of ladder (slippery, damaged, clean, dry, and so
forth)
• A procedure for installation of a temporary or permanent fall arrest device
prior to use or procedure for use of fall prevention that provides 100% tie off
at all times (if determined a fixed ladder system is not practical)

Risk assessments must be approved by the Rig Manager or Facility Manager,


reviewed by the Division Manager and filed on the installation or at the facility.

All ladders assessed as unnecessary must be removed.

4.5.2 LADDERS 10 FEET (3.05 METERS) AND UNDER

Ladders not exceeding the height of 10 feet (3.05 meters) do not require the use of
fall protection provided a formal risk assessment determines the appropriate answer
is “no” to each of the following questions:

• Is there a potential for falling a distance greater than 10 feet? (for example:
into an open hole, overboard, or to a lower level landing, and so on)
• Is the ladder used daily AND there is a danger of landing on sharp objects or
moving machinery parts?

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

• Is the normal condition of the ladder considered to be of poor traction AND


the frequency of use is at least weekly?

NOTE: A “yes” answer to any of the above questions will require the use of fall
protection and the assessment outlined in paragraph 4.5.1 (above) for ladders
over 10 feet must be used.

When a formal risk assessment concludes that the fitting of a fall arrest system or
device would likely encumber or restrict the user or increase the potential of the fall
hazard, such a system or device does not need to be installed if appropriate
alternative control measures are put in place.

Risk assessments must be approved by the Rig Manager or Facility Manager,


reviewed by the Division Manager and filed on the installation or at the facility.

4.6 FALL ARREST SYSTEMS

All fall arrest systems must limit the arrest force to 1,800 lbs. (818 kg), use a
Company approved full body harness, be connected to an acceptable anchor point
and have compatible connectors throughout.

All materials and equipment used in fall arrest systems must be purpose bought for
the use intended. Any equipment having potential to be confused with lifting gear
must be identifiable as fall protection only.

An acceptable anchor point for a personal fall arrest system is a secure point of
attachment (for example, a beam, girder, column, floor, or other fixed structural
member capable of withstanding a minimum force of 5,000 lbs. (2273 kg) for each
person attached to that anchor point). The anchor point must be located above
personnel to minimize free-fall distance and swing-fall potential, which must not
exceed the manufacturer's recommendations, or 30 degrees from vertical
(whichever is less).

Compatible connectors (for example, D-rings, O-rings and eye bolts) are sized to
reduce the possibility of rollout or side loading on the safety gate of the connecting
snaphook or carabiner connector.

Snaphooks must not be connected to snaphooks and carabiner connectors must not
be connected to carabiner connectors.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

Fall arrest lanyards must be connected to an acceptable anchor point as high as


reasonably practicable and adjusted to minimize free-fall distance.

Fall arrest systems, with the exception of ladder climbing systems and SRL’s, must
include a shock-absorbing device and must be attached to the rear D-ring (dorsal
attachment) of the full-body harness.

Manufacturer's recommendations of minimum working height must be followed when


using shock-absorbing devices.

Fall arrest systems, in conjunction with a personal flotation device, must be utilized
when there is a possibility of falling into the water.

Fall arrest systems must be used in workbaskets whenever practical.

Any component of a fall arrest system that is used to arrest a fall must be returned to
a manufacturer authorized service center for re-certification.

4.7 LIFTING OF PERSONNEL

(See Section 4 Subsection 5.6, paragraph 4.4 Manriding)

4.8 SELF RETRACTING LIFELINES (SRLs)

Self retracting lifelines (inertia reels) must be retracted when not in use to prevent
alteration of the spring memory or corrosion of the cable.

Additional shock absorbing devices must not be used in conjunction with inertia
reels.

Connectors of self retracting lifelines to anchor points must be of a positive locking


type. If shackles are to be used, they must be a four part shackle and controlled in a
manner to ensure they will only be utilized with fall protection equipment.

Cargo type slings may be used to secure the SRL to the anchor point. Only sling
type adaptors manufactured for this purpose and with compatible connectors may be
utilized with fall protection equipment. (See HQS-OPS-EST-708-02 Equipment
Standard for Fall Protection Devices)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

4.9 HORIZONTAL LIFELINES

(See HQS-OPS-EST-708-02 Equipment Standard for Fall Protection Devices)

4.10 DERRICK ACCESS

Access to the derrick is only with the driller's permission. A Derrick Log Book must
be used to record personnel movement, tools taken into the derrick and any unsafe
observations.

All derricks must be equipped with an emergency escape device or alternative


escape route. If a device is used, it must be installed to allow escape of personnel
from the derrick to a dedicated landing area free of hazards and obstructions.

4.11 DERRICKMAN CHANGEOUT PROCEDURE - MANUAL DERRICKS

The derrickman's safety harness must be stowed at the entrance of the monkey
board to allow the derrickman to put it on prior to walking onto the work platform and
to remove it after leaving the platform.

The derrickman must wear a fall arrest system in addition to a fall restraint system.
The anchor point for the fall arrest system must be capable of withstanding a
minimum force of 5,000 lbs. (2273 kg), and must be located above the monkey
board to minimize free-fall distance and swing-fall potential.

The traveling block must remain near the rig floor while derrickmen are changing out
until the new derrickman confirms that he has donned and secured the safety
harness.

New derrickmen must be accompanied by experienced derrickmen or an Assistant


Driller until they are considered capable of safely working on the monkey board by
themselves.

4.12 CASING STABBING BOARD/BASKET

Casing stabbing boards must include the following safety devices:


• Primary locking device
This device must operate when the lifting mechanism is not operating
(command in neutral position). This locking device is an automatic fail-safe
brake included by design in the winch.
• Secondary locking device: Fall arrestor
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

This device must operate if the hoisting mechanism fails or if the wire breaks,
and must prevent the traveling carriage assembly from free falling. This anti-
fall device consists of a separate safety wire rope connected to the derrick,
which passes through a slack rope safety lock connected to the traveling
carriage assembly, which automatically operates in the event mentioned
above. The safety lock is actuated by loss of tension in the main winch cable,
which initiates an immediate stop of downward travel by the carriage. The
safety rope runs between side rails for protection.
• Tertiary locking device: Parking brake
A mechanically operated safety lock latch mechanism must be fitted to the
carriage assembly framework with pawls which engage with the latch rails on
the stabbing board when the carriage is stationary. Alternately, where
restraints preclude using a mechanical lock latch system, a pneumatic fail
safe lock can be used, operating on the same safety cable as the slack rope
safety lock.
• Extension platform position warning device
A safety indicator must be provided to warn the driller that the board is in the
path of the traveling block assembly (the casing stabbing board is in the
extended position/extension platform out). An example of a warning device is
a limit switch that activates a red light in the driller’s house whenever the
platform is extended.
• Safety harness and fall arrestor at the casing stabbing board/basket.
A safety harness connected to a fall arrestor must be available at the casing
stabbing board. The fall arrestor must be secured to the derrick/mast. It is
forbidden to install the harness to the traveling part of the platform. The fall
arrestor must be of an inertia reel type to accommodate the traveling up or
down of the casing operator and platform.

The fall arrest system for personnel working from the stabbing board/basket must
include:
• An anchor point located on the derrick structure (not on the stabbing
board/basket or stabbing board structure).
• A self retracting lifeline to allow vertical movement of the stabbing
board/basket.

The casing stabbing board/basket must be labeled:


• “SUITABLE FOR CARRYING PEOPLE”
• To indicate the number of personnel it is rated to hold/carry

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

4.13 SCAFFOLDING

Company personnel that erect, maintain or inspect must successfully complete a


training course appropriate for the type of scaffolding erected, maintained or
inspected.

All scaffold training must be approved by the Division Manager. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)

All scaffolding erected, dismantled, maintained or inspected by Company personnel


must be approved by the Division Manager.

The OIM must designate a competent person to perform scaffold inspections aboard
the installation.

Scaffold must be clearly marked by the competent person who inspected it to


indicate that it is safe/unsafe for use, and the loading it can support.
• Light Duty – 25lbs/sq ft
• Medium Duty – 50 lbs/sq ft
• Heavy Duty – 75 lbs/sq ft

Inspection of scaffold must take place:


• At the start of each tour when it is to be utilized
• Following any alterations
• After any adverse weather or vessel motion
• Every 7 days whether used or not

Note: The inspection criteria applies to all scaffold which has been erected on
the installation.

All scaffolding erected aboard the installation must have the following specifications
as a minimum:
• Handrails
• Ladders (to enable easy entrance and exit)
• Toe boards (to eliminate loose items or tools from falling)
• Clean walkways that are clear of loose objects and debris

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Utilize a Company approved method of fall protection when working at an
elevated position that is more than 6 feet, 7 inches (2 meters) above normal
working surfaces and where any fall hazard exists.

5.2 SCAFFOLD COMPETANT PERSON


• Complete the Division approved training for the erection and inspection of
scaffolding
• Inspect all scaffold erected on the installation as required
• Determine if scaffolding is safe or unsafe for use
• Clearly mark scaffolding and identify the safe working load

5.3 OIM:
• Only permit Company personnel who have completed the Division approved
training to erect scaffolding.
• Designate a Competent Person to inspect the type of scaffold that is erected
on the installation.
• Ensure all employees are trained to recognize the hazards of falling and the
procedures to be followed in order to minimize any associated risk.
• Ensure there is one person on the installation at all times, trained as a
Competent Person by a Company approved instructor in the following:
1. Fall protection
2. Confined space rescue
3. Rescue from heights
• Ensure an integrity verification procedure for handrails, barriers, stairways,
gratings, elevated walkways and elevated working areas is included in the
installation’s planned maintenance system.
• Ensure rescue from heights equipment is included in the installation’s planned
maintenance system.

5.4 RIG MANAGER:


• Approve risk assessments for ladders up to 10 feet (3.05 meters) not
requiring installation of a fall protection system.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

5.5 DIVISION MANAGER/UNIT OPERATIONS MANAGER:


• Review risk assessments for ladders up to 10 feet (3.05 meters) not requiring
installation of a fall protection system.
• Approve scaffold material that Company personnel may erect, dismantle,
maintain or inspect within their area of responsibility.
• Approve scaffold training providers within their area of responsibility.

5.6 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT:


• Approve fall protection training providers within their Unit.
• Approve specific fall protection equipment used within their Unit to meet the
minimum standards outlined in this procedure, and ensure equipment
selected complies with local legislation.

6 DOCUMENTATION

The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as it is included, the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Unit Vice President.
• Derrick Log Book (Figure A)
(Must be retained in installation or facility files for a period of one year after
the last entry date.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection

Figure A, Derrick Log Book

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

1 POLICY

Mechanical lifting devices must only be operated by competent personnel or


trainees while under direct supervision of competent personnel.

All lifting equipment in service must have current certification or have been
successfully load tested within the last year.

All lifting equipment must be suitable for the lift and visually inspected for
condition prior to each use.

Padeyes or lifting lugs must be properly designed, manufactured, installed


and tested prior to use.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to prevent injury or incidents during mechanical lifting
operations.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

Lifting equipment includes lifting gear and lifting appliances as described below.

Lifting Gear - Any device that is used or designed to be used directly or indirectly to
connect a load to a lifting appliance and does not form part of the load. Examples of
lifting gear are: slings, wire rope, hook, plate clamp, scissor clamp, shackle, eyebolt,
lifting beam, bushing puller, lifting caps and so on.

Lifting Appliances - Any mechanical device capable of raising or lowering a load (for
example, crane, chain block, pull lift, winch, drawworks, and so on).

Cargo Carrying Unit – any equipment used to contain or transfer a load. Examples
are: containers, baskets, gas bottle racks, personnel transfer baskets, waste skips,
and so on.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Padeye - An engineered load bearing attachment point designed to be used with a


shackle. It is either integrated or welded into a structure, piece of equipment or lifting
appliance and used to transfer a dynamic load or secure a static load.

4.1 MAINTENANCE AND USE OF LIFTING EQUIPMENT

Any person using lifting equipment must be trained in the rigging practices and load
handling methods used for that equipment. They must also have working knowledge
of its capabilities and any defects likely to arise in service. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)

Equipment found to have a defect affecting the safe operation must be removed
from service and repaired, load tested and authorized for use or destroyed.

A register of all lifting equipment must be maintained at each installation and facility.
This register must be able to trace any piece of lifting equipment back to a current
load test certificate. Every effort must be made to retain the original manufacturer
certificate aboard the installation. All lifting appliances must be included in a planned
maintenance system.

A system that uniquely identifies the Safe Working Load (SWL), inspection
frequency and individual identification of each piece of lifting equipment and each
padeye must be maintained at each installation and facility.

A competent person must inspect all lifting equipment and padeyes at least every 12
months. A record of that inspection must be kept at the installation or facility. All
recommendations made within the report must be acted upon and, if necessary,
inserted in the FOCUS Planning and Tracking software.

Color coding must be used to clearly identify the last inspection date of all lifting
equipment. The table below describes the Company color coding system to be
utilized at installations and facilities.

Inspection Frequency Even Year Odd Year


6 Monthly Yellow White Green Blue
Annual Yellow Green

In the event the color code for a specific year conflicts with an external source, such
as client requirements, the color scheme may be reversed.

All new lifting equipment placed in service shall be marked with the current color
code.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Lifting equipment must be used only for the specific purpose for which it was
designed. Before a lifting operation commences the following checks must be made:
• A SWL must be clearly marked on the lifting appliance
• The weight of the load must be within the SWL rating of the lifting appliance
• The lifting gear and appliance has been inspected and marked with the
current color code
• The lifting gear and appliance do not display any visual signs of damage

Any item of lifting equipment subjected to repair or alteration in the design must be
re-certified and authorized for use before being reinstated. For example, a padeye
welded on at the wrong load-pull angle should not be used until it is welded on at the
correct pull angle, to avoid side loading. The padeye must be re-certified following
the repair.

Natural or manmade fiber rope must not be used for lifting purposes. Recommended
rope usage includes tag lines for moving cargo, tailing casing, and securing items.
Tag lines must be used to assist with the control of loads handled by the crane
within the installation. Sufficient taglines should be used whenever practicable for
the transfer of loads to and from the installation.

Chains must not be used for lifting purposes with the exception of:
• Bushing pullers
• Manual and powered chain hoists (for example: stabbing board and BOP
handling hoists).
• Specialized sea fastenings
• Tail chain equipped to monkey board pullback tugger

Crane wires must be changed out at the following intervals:


• Whip line, main block and boom hoist – every two years
• Boom pendant lines – every 5 years

4.2 PADEYES

All existing padeyes must be machine fabricated. This may include padeyes with a
drilled bore, plasma cut bore, or forged bore design. Plasma cut bores should
represent a finish and tolerance standard equal to a drilled bore.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Padeyes with flame-cut (hand-held torch) bores are not permitted.

The existing structure to which a padeye is to be installed or attached must be


suitable for design requirements. Design calculations are required if there is any
doubt regarding the adequacy of the support structure.

Surface preparation prior to a padeye welding attachment must be appropriate to the


weld specification. Welding must only be performed by an appropriately certified
(coded) welder.

Special use or seldom used padeyes are exempt from annual inspection and color
coding provided they are clearly identifiable by red paint and physically locked out of
service. These padeyes must be inspected and load tested prior to return to service.
A log of locked out padeyes must be maintained aboard the installation.

Frequently used padeyes must be examined as per the required criteria.

4.2.1 PADEYE DESIGN

For padeyes with rated loads exceeding 6 short tons, the padeye must be designed
and engineered by Transocean Engineering Department.

4.2.2 NEW PADEYE INSTALLATION AND TESTING

The fabrication of padeyes at Company facilities or onboard installations is


dependent upon the ability to achieve the Company approved padeye design. (Ref.
Drawing no. 8100-393 S-PZ 1000, ALT.0)

Pre-fabricated padeyes should be obtained and made available for new installation
and use. All padeyes must be provided with supporting design calculations, material
specifications and approved welding procedures.

After installation, all welds must be thoroughly inspected to locate defects such as
surface cracks, surface porosity, incomplete root penetration and undercut.

After the installation of a padeye, proof load test with load at 150% of the rated load
must be performed. The load test must include the side load conditions that the
padeye is designed to handle. Items in the test assembly must be inspected and
their SWL at least that of the proof load being applied to the item being proof loaded.

After the proof load test, the padeye, welds, and all lifting gear used to perform the
test must be inspected to observe whether any part has been damaged or
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

permanently deformed by the test, and whether any crack in the welds has been
initiated. This will be confirmed by both visual inspection and non-destructive tests,
either Liquid (Dye) Penetrate Examination conforming to ASTM E165 or wet
Magnetic Particle Examination conforming to ASTM E709.

Padeyes to be installed onto the following structures, for the purpose of supporting
loads, require prior Engineering approval:
• Derrick
• Crown Block
• Piping
• Side shell
• Jackup legs
• Diagonal and horizontal braces of semi-submersible’s hull
• Any other structure where high strength steel alloys are believed to have
been used

4.3 TUGGER WINCHES - GENERAL USE

All tugger winches must be maintained in good working order and ready for
immediate use. Any defects must be reported immediately.

A ball valve must be fitted on the supply line adjacent to each tugger winch to allow
rapid shutdown.

A manual or automatic spooling guide must be fitted to all tugger winches.

The working end of a tugger wire must be color-coded the same as the tugger. This
is to provide a means for the tugger operator to visually monitor which wire he is
controlling. This must be verified during pre-use inspection.

The working end of tugger winch wires must not be wrapped around equipment for
hoisting or pulling. Slings and snatch blocks must be correctly used to avoid
damaging the tugger wires.

Rig floor tugger lines used for picking up and laying down tubulars must be equipped
with a shackle and ball bearing swivel of adequate SWL.

Hooks must not be used on tuggers for lifting purposes with the exception of:
• Diverter packer element
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

• Riser handling tool


• Tow bridle tuggers
• Specific instances as authorized by the OIM under control of the Permit to
Work system

4.3.1 TUGGER WINCH LIFTING OPERATION - BEFORE USE

The following checks should be made before using any tugger winch:
• There is enough wire on the drum. (Always leave a minimum of five wraps on
the winch drum.)
• The wire is evenly and tightly spooled with no apparent defects or damage.
• Winch drum guards are in place.
• Control levers are clearly marked “Up” and “Down.”
• Tugger brake is operational and hoist controls return to neutral when released
• Load weight is within the SWL of the tugger

4.3.2 TUGGER WINCH LIFTING OPERATION - DURING USE

Only trained and authorized personnel may operate tugger winches. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3) and must ensure the following is adhered to:
• Personnel are standing clear of all wire, ropes and moving equipment.
• Direct full attention to the lifting operation .
• Maintain clear visual contact with the lifting operation. If this is not practicable,
a banksman must be deployed.
• Stand on the correct side of the tugger when operating the controls.
• Never leave the winch running unattended.
• Never exceed the SWL of the wire/winch in use.
• Never touch the wire by hand.

4.4 MANRIDING

Due to the relatively high risk of personal injury during manriding operations, ALL
alternative methods of accomplishing the job must be considered prior to manriding
operations being authorized.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

A written THINK plan must be led by the Toolpusher or OIM before beginning any
manriding operations. Depending on the planned operation, a Permit to Work may
be required. The START process must be used to monitor the work, and if any
changes occur, the work should be interrupted and the written THINK plan revised.
As a minimum, the THINK plan must include:
• consideration of a contingency rescue/recovery plan in the event of possible
equipment failure or power loss
• weather and lighting conditions
• counter balancing effects of the winch wire

Work that might interfere with the manriding operation must be assessed, and if
necessary, suspended.

The Toolpusher or OIM must be present during all manriding operations.

Except in extenuating circumstances, the Toolpusher or OIM must ensure the


drawworks brake is adequately secured or in the parked position.

The person in charge of the manriding area may only select trained personnel to
perform the manriding operations. Everyone involved in winch/tugger operations
must have successfully completed Company approved manriding awareness
training and a practical exercise using installation specific equipment. (See Section
4 Subsection 1.3)

All winches used for manriding must be designed for manriding and be inherently
safe (that is, no clutch mechanism and no possibility for the winch to go into
freewheeling mode).

General-use winches may not be used for hoisting personnel unless also designed
and approved by manufacturer for manriding.

All winches used for manriding (both dedicated and general use/manrider approved)
must have the following features, as a minimum:
• Manufacturer label indicating operational parameters and approval for
manriding.
• A sign affixed to winch clearly indicating suitability for manriding (for example,
“SUITABLE FOR MANRIDING”).
• The winch operating lever must automatically return to neutral when released

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

• An automatic brake that will engage upon returning the operating lever to
neutral or on loss of power.
• A secondary braking system for the wire drum that functions in the event the
automatic brake fails or does not engage. This brake may be automated or
manual.
• A guide (manual or automatic) for spooling the wire rope onto the drum.
• Have an OEM approved procedure, or be supplied from an air pressure
vessel or hydraulic accumulator bank with sufficient reserve capacity
available, to lower rider in a controlled manner in the event of the loss of main
rig power.
• An emergency shut off valve to isolate air or hydraulic power to the winch
located within the winch operator's reach.
• Air or hydraulic supply to hoist must be regulated to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure.
• Non-rotating wire must be used on dedicated manrider winches.

Personnel being lifted must wear a Company approved full-body harness that is in
good condition. A triple action carabiner must be used to attach the safety harness
directly to the hoist wire.

During manriding operations, care must be exercised to ensure that the person
being lifted is not put at risk of being jammed under any obstructions.

The Company does not mandate the use of secondary fall protection during
manriding operations. However, all client and regulatory requirements must be
complied with.

Hand signals must be used as the primary means of communication for all manriding
operations. If, at any time, hand signals cannot be used as the primary means of
communication, the written THINK Plan for manriding must be reviewed and further
risk assessment performed. Following this review the department supervisor must
re-approve the written THINK Plan.

Manriding operations require a minimum of three trained and competent personnel:


a winch operator, a person suspended in the manriding harness, and a dedicated
person whose sole duties are to watch the person in the riding harness and signal
the winch operator using appropriate hand signals. Radios may be used only as a
means of communication for conveying information concerning the task, not for
signaling the winch operator.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Manriding underneath the drill floor in the moonpool or cellar deck area using a
winch from the drill floor is prohibited.

Controls must be in place to prevent the risk of any objects being dropped. All tools
and equipment carried aloft must be tied off at all times.

No other equipment may be lifted, simultaneously, utilizing the same hoist.

All air tuggers must be operated according to the manufacturer's instructions and
fitted with drum guards and control levers that are clearly marked "Up" and "Down."

Wire rope clips or grips must not be used on manriding equipment.

The winch operator must not leave the controls at any time during a manriding
operation.

Personnel must not ride on a crane's hook, sling or load.

A person other than the one being lifted must visually inspect the harness for proper
fitting and safe attachment to the lifting wire before manriding.

4.5 LIFTING EQUIPMENT USED FOR LIFTING PERSONS

Due to the risk of personal injury during lifting of personnel, lifting equipment used
for lifting personnel must be certified for the purpose.

During the THINK Planning stage of all tasks where the lifting of personnel is
required, controls must be utilized to reduce the likelihood of an incident occurring
from people from being crushed, trapped, struck by or falling from the equipment.
“Rescue from Heights” must be part of the THINK plan when lifting of personnel is
involved.

Personnel being lifted must utilize fall protection when working inboard the
installation or from a Spider basket. The use of fall protection equipment is not a
requirement when utilizing a totally enclosed elevator in the derrick, column,
accommodation, and so on.

If access doors are fitted to the carrier they should not open outwards and should be
fitted with a device to prevent inadvertent opening. A means of rescue must be
available on the installation in the event of loss of power or malfunction of the lifting
equipment.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

4.5.1 STABBING BOARD

See Fall Protection, Section 4 Subsection 5.5, paragraph 4.12.

4.5.2 SCISSOR LIFTS / BOOM SUPPORTED WORK BASKETS

Personnel utilizing scissor lifts and boom supported work baskets must be trained in
their safe operation. There must be a standby man at the worksite to monitor
operations and they must be in constant verbal and visual contact of the personnel
operating the equipment.

Controls must be utilized to prevent the Scissor Lift or Boom Supported Work Basket
from being struck by other lifting equipment or load.

Scissor lifts and Boom Supported Work Baskets must be fitted with an emergency
stop at the control points. These stops must be easily reached and actuated.

Scissor lifts must not be moved while in the elevated position.

Scissor lifts must be stabilized and located on a solid, level foundation to prevent
them from rocking or moving due to weather conditions and/or vessel motion.

Risks to assess as part of the THINK planning process before and while monitoring
the task include but are not limited to the following:
• Electric shock – contact between lifting equipment and electrical wiring
• Caught between – piping, beams, overhead walkways, cables, and so on
• Tipover – inadequate stabilzation, equipment failure, struck by external force,
exceeding rated capacity of equipment
• Falls – thrown from basket by lift striking against fixed structure or struck by,
personnel overreaching from basket
• Struck by – dropped objects

4.5.3 PERSONNEL ELEVATORS

All personnel elevators must be included in the planned maintenance system and
the lifting gear register. These must be inspected by specialized third party
personnel.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

4.5.4 TUGGER AND CRANE HOISTED WORK BASKETS

When utilizing a work basket, the total weight of the basket, equipment and
personnel must be determined to ensure the safe working load of the lifting
appliance is not exceeded. Grab rails must be fitted inside the basket to prevent
personnel exposing their hands to caught between/crush points.

Personnel riding in the basket must use fall protection unless working over the
water. Consideration should be given to utilizing a tie off point independent of the
basket.

4.5.5 SPIDER BASKETS

When utilizing a spider basket, the total weight of the basket, equipment and
personnel must be determined to ensure the safe working load of the lifting
appliance is not exceeded. Grab rails must be fitted inside the basket to prevent
personnel exposing their hands to caught between/crush points.

Personnel riding in the basket must use fall protection.

4.6 DRILL LINE

A drilling line record containing the line certificate or origin, service date, slipping and
cutting details, as well as record of inspections must be kept on all installations.

After slipping and cutting, the crown-o-matic must be reset and tested.

The line pull reading must be available at all times by a maintained and calibrated
weight indicator.

No part of the drilling line must be in contact with the metal components of the
installation that may damage the cable.

A visual inspection must be carried out by a competent person after an operation


involving work that may have caused extra wear and tear on the drilling line (jarring,
fishing, running heavy casing, and so on).

During slip and cut operations the travelling equipment (blocks and hook) must be
properly secured so that inadvertent movement is not possible. (For example, with
hang-off pendants)

Use of the weight of the drill string to facilitate slipping is prohibited.


Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

4.7 PORTABLE LIFTING GEAR AND APPLIANCES

Hand-spliced wires and slings are not permitted.

4.7.1 WIRE SLINGS

The following applies to wire sling certificates:


• Wire slings delivered onboard must be provided with a certificate.
• The certificates of scrapped wire slings must be destroyed.

The following applies to wire sling usage:


• Slings in daily use must be inspected regularly for damage or overload.
• Damaged slings must be destroyed and removed from the working area.
• Slings must be protected against sharp edges, and so on.
• Wire slings must be clearly identified with the SWL.
• When slings are not in use, they must be stored in an appropriate place,
protected against weathering.
• No hammering or other use of force may be used on the ferrule.
• Slings not recorded in the lifting equipment register must be kept separate
from those tracked in the register (that is, client or transit slings that do not
belong to the installation).

4.7.2 WIRE

The following must be followed when using wire:


• Wire must be maintained according to vendor specifications, following the
supplier's recommended safety factor.
• Business Unit Management must establish inspection programs and discard
criteria for all wire rope uses including anchor lines and standing rigging.
• Wire drums must be inspected by a competent person before use. During
operation, the wire must be regularly inspected by a competent person and
replaced if damage or wear and tear makes further use unsafe.
• When wire is removed due to damage or wear and tear, it must be clearly
marked and removed from the installation.
• Kinks and turns on wire must be avoided. Wire with a kink or turn must be
replaced or re-terminated.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

• Wire must always be secured to the winch drum with at least five wire wraps
on the drum when in use.

(See Technical Information Bulletin: HQS-OPS-TIB-905-01 Crane Wire Rope –


Maintenance, Inspection and Rejection Criteria for further guidance)

4.7.3 WEB SLINGS

Slings made of synthetic fiber may be used in special cases, for example lifting of
chromium pipes, special drill pipe, engine cylinder heads, and so on. A Permit to
Work must be issued for their use.

The storage and handling of webbing slings must be strictly controlled to conserve
condition and prevent contamination.

Exposing webbing slings to sharp edges and chemicals must be avoided.

All web slings must be discarded after one year in service with the exception of
special application slings.

4.7.4 EYE BOLTS

Loose eyebolts screwed into holes provided in the equipment to be lifted, must have
sufficient strength and be screwed entirely in and correctly oriented.

Perform the lifting on the eye as vertically as possible in order to prevent bending
and eventually breaking the eyebolt.

4.7.5 BARREL SLINGS

Barrel slings must be certified and marked with their SWL.

For lifting barrels made of plastic or PVC, do not use the conventional barrel slings
of chain and hooks. Using a net, basket or specialized device is recommended.

4.7.6 HOOKS

The use of open-ended pipe hooks is prohibited.

Slings or positive locking pipe hooks must be used when lifting casing by the box
and pin ends with a crane within the confines of the installation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Pipe hooks may not be used for loading/off loading of tubulars to or from a supply
boat. All tubulars must be pre-slung.

4.7.7 RE-TERMINATING WIRES ONBOARD

Any wires that have been re-terminated onboard must be load tested, documented
and authorized for use.

The re-termination of wires onboard using composite resin is permissible provided


the person carrying out the operation is competent and follows the correct
procedures detailed by the manufacturer.

4.7.8 ALL OTHER LIFTING GEAR AND APPLIANCES (CHAIN BLOCKS, SNATCH
BLOCKS, TROLLEYS, SHACKLES, AND SO ON.)

Must be marked with SWL.

Chain Blocks must be included in the planned maintenance system of the


installation.

Any damage detected must be reported and appliances taken out of service for
repair.

4.8 CRANE AND LIFTING OPERATIONS

When planning all crane and lifting operations the hazards must be identified and the
risk reduced. The factors that must be considered include:
• The type of load being lifted, its weight, and shape (wind effect).
• The preventive controls to reduce the likelihood of a load falling or striking a
person or object and the mitigating controls to reduce the consequences.
• The preventive controls to reduce the likelihood of the lifting equipment falling,
striking a person or some other object and the mitigating controls to reduce
the consequences.
• The selection of the lifting equipment to reduce ergonomic risk.
• Operating limits of lifting equipment (static and dynamic loading).
• Inspection of lifting gear for defects prior to use:
− Special straps – damaged, cut, abraded or stretched;
− Chains – deformed or stretched links, cracks; and
− Wire ropes – broken wires or kinks.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

A Lift Plan or checklist should be considered to ensure all hazards have been
identified and risks reduced. For more information on Lift Plans see HQS-HSE-HB-
01 Lifting Operations Handbook.

4.8.1 CRANE OPERATORS

Crane Operators must verify correct rigging arrangements prior to all crane lifts.

Crane Operators must individually demonstrate their knowledge by answering


questions given to them by the OIM or designee. The subjects must include but are
not limited to the following:
• Hand signals
• Appropriate use of a radio during lifting operations
• Handling of the load
• Attaching the load
• Moving the load
• Holding the load
• Operating practices
• Daily, weekly, or monthly crane maintenance
• Personnel transfer
• Demonstrating the proper use of load charts at different angles

Each Crane Operator must be certified for the type of crane to be operated, by a
Company approved instructor meeting Company specified criteria.

Each Crane Operator must complete the ‘OJT’ Module for Crane Operator prior to
demonstrating their knowledge to the OIM.

The OIM must authorize Crane Operators to operate cranes on the installation. A list
of authorized crane operators must be available at the worksite.

Only competent Crane Operators are authorized to operate cranes on Company


installations or facilities. Exceptions, however, are made for the training of new
Crane Operators or in connection with maintenance work.

Only Crane Operators authorized by the OIM can train or instruct trainees.
Trainee(s) must not operate the crane without an authorized operator present.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

It is the responsibility of the Crane Operator to verify the weight of each load before
proceeding with offload and backload to supply vessels by:
• Reviewing Cargo Manifest to identify weight of loads,
• Communicate with supply vessel or supervisor on deck to verify the load
being lifted is the correct item listed on the manifest and,
• When initially lifting the load monitor weight indicator to verify weight of load is
as expected, if not load is to be lowered and landed immediately.

Crane Operators must be able to clearly communicate with the handling crew, only
one of which may be designated as the banksman. If the crane operator receives
instructions or signals from more than one person at a time, the crane operator must
interrupt the operation. If the Crane Operator cannot see the banksman at any time
when the load is being moved, he must immediately interrupt the operation and only
resume when he has re-established visual contact with the banksman.

4.8.2 BANKSMAN

The Banksman will have no other duties while so assigned. Banksmen may not
participate in simultaneous operations (for example, supervising the lift while
supervising boat operations alongside the installation). For boat operations it may be
necessary to assign a banksman for the boat as well as a banksman on the
installation.

The designated banksman must be easily identified as such (for example, wearing a
special color vest).

The designated banksman shall not be both banksman and rigger.

It is the banksman’s responsibility to:


• Check the area around the load to be lifted to ensure it is clear and the load is
not attached to the deck, transportation cradle, or adjacent equipment.
• Continuously monitor lifting operations to retain an overview at all times.
• Be aware of any obstructions within the crane’s radius and working area.
• Be aware of potential snagging points in the vicinity of the load while hoisting
and lowering loads by checking above to ensure that the crane’s hoist wire
rope, boom tip, and hook block assembly attachments have a clear
unobstructed passage.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

• Ensure prior to lifting the load that it is not secured to the deck, transportation
cradle, or could become entangled in adjacent equipment.
• Ensure that tag lines in use are not secured or tied off to adjacent equipment
or structures.

The banksman must not become involved in physically handling lifts. The Crane
Operator must interrupt the operation immediately if this occurs.

Only personnel that have successfully completed a Company approved rigging


practices course may be assigned as a banksman.

4.8.3 CRANE OPERATIONS

Hand signals must be used as the primary means of communication for all crane
signaling. Radios may be used in conjunction with hand signals, but they are
considered secondary. Boom cameras may not be used as a means of
communication.

Hand signals used on all installations must be available and must be understood by
every person involved in crane and lifting operations.

Conditions that may require exclusive reliance on a secondary means of


communication (handheld radios) are:
• Environmental conditions that impact the effectiveness of hand signals.
• Blind lifts associated with rig design. (See HQS-OPS-TIB-461-01 Technical
Information Bulletin for Deck Crane Boom Cameras)
(A crane boom camera can be used as a tool to view the proximity of the lift to
personnel and the surrounding area. Use of the camera for the purpose of
maintaining visual contact with the banksman’s signals or in lieu of a
banksman is prohibited.)

If a secondary means of communication (handheld radios) is used in lieu of hand


signals, a written THINK plan must be conducted by the supervisor responsible for
the operation.

The crane must not be used for operations where the angle indicates that damage
may occur to wires or sheaves.

The crane boom must not be used as a ladder or gangway. Personnel performing
work on the crane boom must always address the hazard of falling.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

All hooks on the travelling blocks, whip line and safety slings must have positive
locking safety latches that are in good working order.

When a crane is shut down, all controls must be left in the neutral position and the
brakes locked. Where applicable, the rotation lock must be engaged at all times
when the crane is unattended.

4.8.4 CRANE EQUIPMENT AND MAINTENANCE

Cranes must be fitted with a minimum of:


• Communication systems that must allow:
1. Attracting of personnel's attention (for example, with a horn)
2. Verbal communication to personnel (for example, loudspeaker system)
3. Two-way radio communication (for example, VHF radio communication
to communicate with deck crew, supply boats and control room)
• Load and radius charts
• Radius indicator
• An over-boom limit switch
• An under-boom limit switch
• Anti-two-block limit on the main line and fast line
• A load watcher giving a continuous indication of the hook load and rated load
for each radius (The indicator must give a clear and continuous warning when
approaching the rated capacity of the crane)
• A portable fire extinguisher suitable for class A, B, and C fires
• Operating controls clearly labeled as to function (in English and the
predominant local language) and the label visible to the operator during all
hours, day or night
• Emergency stop device (ESD)

Routine maintenance of cranes must be performed in accordance with a planned


maintenance system. A crane log book must be maintained and include as a
minimum:
• Record of maintenance performed
• Wire rope installation dates
• Safety device inspection dates
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

• Certificate and reel number of wire currently in use

Depending on the crane design and manufacturer's recommendations, crane wires


may need to be replaced annually. (See Technical Information Bulletin: HQS-
OPS-TIB-905-02 Inspection and rejection criteria for crane wire ropes).

4.8.5 BOP CRANES, BOP HANDLERS, PIPE HANDLING CRANES, GANTRY


CRANES AND OVERHEAD TROLLEY/BEAM MOUNTED CRANES

Only competent operators are authorized to operate BOP cranes, BOP handlers,
pipe handling cranes, gantry cranes, and overhead trolley/beam mounted cranes at
Company installations and facilities. Exceptions are made for the training of new
operators, or in connection with maintenance work.

Cranes which operate on rails located at deck level (main deck or elevated level)
must be provided with audible and visual warnings which alert everyone in the area
when the crane is traveling.

All overhead crane operations must have a designated operator. The operator will
not be involved in material handling/ positioning of loads while operating the crane.

All overhead crane operations will have, in addition to the designated crane
operator, one employee designated for monitoring/positioning the crane load.

If material handling/positioning is required, tag lines must be used, (for example, If


you anticipate you will have to put a hand on the load during the operation – Use a
tag line).

All cranes must be fitted with an emergency stop device (ESD) at the level of the
rails accessible by personnel in the area.

4.8.6 ISO LIFTING BLOCKS

Any cargo carrying unit fitted with ISO lifting blocks must not be modified without
engineering approval.

All lifting gear used in conjunction with ISO lifting blocks must be fit for purpose. For
additional information on sling configuration and ISO containers see HQS-HSE-HB-
01 Lifting Operations Handbook.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

4.9 FORKLIFTS

All installations and facilities must carry out training unique and specific to the
forklift(s) found there. The training must cover both theory and practical
demonstration. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3) A record must be kept of this
training.

The OIM must approve the content and instructors for all forklift training given
onboard.

Only competent forklift operators who have completed Company approved training
are authorized to operate forklifts. A list of competent forklift operators must be
available at the work site.

Forklifts must be maintained and rated to meet the zone classifications of the area in
which they are to operate.

4.9.1 FORKLIFT EQUIPMENT

Forklifts must be fitted with a minimum of:


• A permanently fitted means to prevent the load falling from the forks/mast
onto the operator or controls.
• An overhead guard to protect the driver from falling objects.
• An audible warning for reversing.
• A visual warning in noisy areas.
• A reversing mirror
• A means to prevent forks from going over height.
• A portable fire extinguisher.
• Operating controls clearly labeled as to function (in English and the
predominant local language) and the label visible to the operator during all
hours, day or night.

4.9.2 FORKLIFT OPERATIONS

The forks must be lowered to the lowest practical position to provide maximum view
and stability. The mast must be tilted backwards to increase load stability.

Forklifts may not be used for the transport of personnel.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 20 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Forklifts should only be used on flat, level surfaces and must carry loads within their
rated capacity.

Drivers must pause before doorways then proceed slowly through.

Forklifts should be driven in reverse when high loads restrict forward vision.

Drivers must not drive over unprotected cables, pipes, and so on.

When left unattended, forklifts must be in neutral with the parking brake on, the forks
lowered and the power switched off.

Forklifts should not be parked in an enclosed area with the engine running.

If a forklift was manufactured with a seat belt, one must be fitted and worn by the
operator while the forklift is in use.

A basket engineered and manufactured for the purpose of lifting personnel may be
used to lift personnel to perform routine maintenance work. This may take place
when other means of access are considered impractical, and only after a
documented risk assessment (Written THINK Plan as a minimum) has been
performed and signed by the OIM or designee. This basket must be treated as a
piece of lifting equipment and inspected as such.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:

5.1.1 LIFTING EQUIPMENT:


• Prior to using equipment, be trained in the rigging practices and load handling
methods used for that equipment.
• Have working knowledge of its capabilities and any defects likely to arise in
service.

5.1.2 TUGGER OPERATIONS:


• Stand clear of all wires, ropes and moving equipment.
• Direct full attention to the operation at hand.
• Maintain clear visual contact with the operation. If this is not possible, a
banksman must be deployed.
• Stand in a safe position that is easily visible, but will not affect the operation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 21 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

• Always keep the equipment under observation.


• Stand on the correct side of the tugger when operating the controls.
• Never leave the winch running unattended.
• Never stand on the machinery to get a better view.
• Never exceed the SWL of the wire/winch in use.
• Never touch the wire by hand.

5.1.3 MANRIDING OPERATIONS


• The person in charge of the manriding area must nominate only trained
personnel to perform the manriding operations. In the case of manriding in the
derrick, a permit to work must be issued prior to the operation commencing
• Everyone involved in winch/tugger operations must have successfully
completed the manriding awareness training.
• Personnel being lifted must wear a Company approved full body harness that
is in good condition.

5.2 FORKLIFT OPERATOR:


• Complete the Company approved awareness training course (RSTC toolbox).
If additional training is required to meet regulatory requirements then this
must be taken prior to operating a forklift.
• Complete installation/facility forklift training, both practical and theory, that is
unique to the equipment on the installation or at the facility.

5.3 BANKSMAN:
• Do not perform other duties while so assigned.
• Do not participate in simultaneous operations.
• Successfully complete a course in rigging practices prior to being assigned as
a banksman.

5.4 CRANE OPERATOR:


• Know the weight of cargo before proceeding with the lift.
• Clearly communicate with the handling crew.
• Must be able to clearly communicate with the handling crew, only one of
which may be designated as the banksman.
• Must interrupt the operation if he receives instructions or signals from more
than one person at a time.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 22 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

• Must immediately interrupt the operation if he cannot see the banksman at


any time when the load is being moved.
• Must only use the crane boom camera as a tool to view the proximity of the lift
to personnel and the surrounding area and not for the purpose of maintaining
visual contact with the banksman’s signals.
• Perform maintenance tasks required in the installation’s planned maintenance
system.

5.5 MAINTENANCE SUPERVISOR


• Ensure maintenance tasks are carried out on cranes, hoists and so on.

5.6 OIM:
• Authorize Crane Operators to train or instruct trainees.
• Approve risk assessments in the event that hand signals cannot be used as
the primary means of communication during any manriding operation.
• Approve risk assessments for any operations involving any purpose-made
lifting basket to lift personnel in connection with routine maintenance work.
• Ensure a list of authorized crane operators is available at the work site.
• Ensure a list of authorized forklift operators is available at the work site.
• Approve the content and instructors for all forklift training given onboard the
installation.
• Ensure that a Lifting Equipment Register is maintained on the installation.

5.7 BUSINESS UNIT/DIVISION TRAINING MANAGER:


• Ensure that Company approved training meets the requirements of local
regulatory bodies. If conflicts exist, training must be made available to
personnel which satisfies both Company and regulatory requirements.
• Where there is conflict between Company approved training and regulatory
requirements then this must be brought to the attention of Business Unit
management.

5.8 DIVISION MANAGER / BUSINESS UNIT OPERATIONS MANAGER:


• Ensure that a Lifting Equipment Register is maintained at the facility.
• Approve all non Company required training (Regulatory, Client).
• Ensure all installations and facilities have established forklift training that is
unique to the equipment found there.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 23 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

6 DOCUMENTATION
• The Crane Signals (Figure A) is included in the manual to illustrate the type of
hand signals which all personnel involved in Crane operations must be aware
of for their primary means of communication. It is included in the manual as
an example only and is intended to allow operations to take advantage of a
preset informative poster. It is not mandatory that these actual signals are
used on an installation/facility It is mandatory that “hand signals to be used”
are approved by Business Unit Management and that these are clearly
understood and posted at the installation/facility. The signals approved by
Business Unit Management must include key elements of the Crane Signals
(Figure A) included in the example shown.
• The Manriding Signals (Figure B) included in this manual are mandatory and
are not to be modified from the original format. Personnel involved in
manriding operations must be aware of them, utilize them and they must be
clearly posted in appropriate areas.
• A register of all lifting equipment must be maintained and documented for the
installation/facility (normally supplied by lifting equipment inspectors following
annual inspections).

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 24 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Figure A, Crane Signals

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 25 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting

Figure B, Manriding Signals

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 26 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

1 POLICY

All hazardous materials must be identified, labeled and effectively controlled


at any installation or facility. Hazardous Material Identification System (HMIS)
information concerning this material must be available at the installation or
facility.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to heighten the awareness of personnel and reduce
exposure to harmful effects associated with hazardous materials onshore and
offshore.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

Great care must be exercised to protect personnel when being exposed to


hazardous materials, which includes substances that may have an adverse effect on
health or the environment.

Personnel who are required to handle hazardous materials must be made aware of
the hazards, the nature of the material, risks created by exposure, safe handling
instructions, precautions to be taken, use of PPE, emergency procedures and proper
storage instructions for the materials.

4.1 TRAINING

All personnel must be given Company approved hazardous materials awareness


training. This training must be given in an organized manner and fully documented.
(See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

At least one materials person that has attended a Unit approved course in the
handling/shipping of hazardous materials must be onboard at all times. (See
Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

4.2 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)

A MSDS must be available for use in the THINK plan prior to offloading any
hazardous materials onto an installation or at a facility.

A system that ensures up to date MSDS are available for all hazardous materials
being used or stored at the installation or facility must be in place and maintained by
the Installation Medical Person.

4.3 MARKING AND STORAGE

Hazardous materials must be labeled to indicate the name or trade name of the
material, and the Hazardous Materials Identification System (HMIS) information.
This information must be in English and the predominant local language.

Hazardous materials must be stored in dedicated areas that have adequate


containment facilities. Products that may react with one another must be separated.
(See Section 5.1)

During storage, all hazardous material must be arranged so HMIS markings are
clearly visible.

Food goods must be stored away from any chemicals or other hazardous materials.

Oxidizing agents, such as nitric acid, must be stored away from combustible
materials.

When products covered by this procedure are packaged for shipment, the trained
materials person must supervise the work and the following must be observed:
• Products that may react with one another must be separated.
• All material must be properly secured.
• If a container is used to ship more than one material, it must be marked with
the symbol for the most hazardous material stored within the container.
• The cargo manifests must indicate the following in sequential order:
(proper/scientific) shipping name, hazard class, identification number UN #,
package group (S.H.I.P.).
• Hazardous materials/waste must appear first on the manifest, or be clearly
identified by use of a box or “Hazardous” column. Additionally, the S.H.I.P.
must be the only entry on the first line. Additional lines below the S.H.I.P. may
be used to describe the product for internal or third party ease.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

Figures C and D are examples of HMIS information.

Figure C, HMIS Poster

Figure D, HMIS Label

4.4 INVENTORY CONTROL

A system must be developed and maintained to ensure that the OIM or designee is
aware of the location of all types and quantities of all hazardous materials that are
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

onboard the installation or at any facility. The inventory of hazardous materials must
be regularly checked.

The Hazardous Material Identification System (HMIS) must be used to ensure that
relevant information from MSDS concerning the handling and use of hazardous
material is readily available in the storage and handling areas and MSDS referred to
as required for additional information.

The inventory of hazardous materials by location and type must be made available
to the Emergency Response Teams.

4.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS/WASTE

Basic principles covering the handling of hazardous materials/waste include the


following:
• Hazardous materials/waste must always be identified as such and must be
labeled or placarded.
• Hazardous materials/waste that may react dangerously when mixed must be
stored/handled separately.
• Hazardous materials/waste must only be stored in clearly marked specific
containers, which must be sent ashore for disposal.

4.6 WORKING WITH HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

Before using any material, personnel must:


• Refer to the HMIS for storage and handling information.
• Read the labels on the containers.
• Be aware of the relevant information from MSDS.
• Check for warning signs or special instructions posted in the area.

The PPE stated on the HMIS placard must be used as a minimum requirement.

A THINK plan must be conducted before hazardous materials are unloaded from
supply vessels and the relevant information from MSDS or HMIS specific to the
chemicals must be discussed and understood by all personnel involved in the
operation.

Containers and sacks should be inspected for leaks, rips or tears prior to use.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

Sacks should be set down easily to prevent tearing. Sacked material should be
placed with the mouth of the sack toward the inside of the pile when stacking.

Empty sacks must be disposed of properly and excess chemicals cleaned up. On
completion of the work, residue on gloves, boots, aprons and other protective
clothing should be appropriately cleaned. When necessary, personnel involved
should take showers as soon as possible after completion of the work.

Emergency eyewash stations and emergency showers must be strategically


positioned in areas where personnel are likely to be exposed to hazardous
materials.

Proper safety precautions must be followed when working with flammable solvents.
There must be adequate ventilation in enclosed spaces.

The use of solvents to clean hands or skin is not permitted. If clothes become
soaked with solvent, they must be removed and a shower must be taken.

Personnel must not eat, drink, or touch eyes, nose or mouth after handling
hazardous materials without first washing hands with soap and water.

4.7 RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS, EXPLOSIVES, DANGEROUS LIQUIDS AND


GASES

The handling of explosives, radioactive materials, dangerous liquids or gases must


be controlled by the Permit to Work system and only done by approved personnel.

The OIM/Facility Manager must be responsible for the placement and security of any
such materials brought onboard an installation or to a facility.

All such materials must be stored in an approved and secured area away from
passageways, living quarters or areas that are usually manned. Storage containers
must be closed and locked at all times and clearly identified with appropriate labels.

All such storage areas must be clearly marked and designated as an approved
storage area.

Amounts of the previously mentioned materials stored onboard an installation or at a facility


at any given time must be kept to the minimum required to carry out operations. Amounts
must be known by the OIM/Facility Manager, and an inventory maintained.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

4.8 WORKING WITH DANGEROUS LIQUIDS

All work involved in the transfer of concentrated acid and other such dangerous
liquid requires a Permit to Work.

Sufficient personnel and equipment must be assigned to the operation to effectively


contain a significant leak.

All assigned personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing, such as resistant
suits, rubber boots, gloves and face visors.

All transfer equipment must be pressure tested before introducing dangerous liquid
into the system.

All areas where pumping equipment is located (including flow lines) must have a
barrier, and warning notices must be posted prohibiting unauthorized access.

Flow lines must be secured before introducing dangerous liquid.

An isolation valve must be located near, but not underneath, the holding tank and a
member of the work party stationed nearby. The valve must be closed if a leak
develops in the system.

Water hoses must be run to appropriate work locations before pumping the
dangerous liquid, and the water supply must be checked.

Spill trays must be provided at all critical points within the work area.

Storage containers should have suitable means for safely extracting the contents.

Dangerous liquids must only be used in open or well-ventilated areas.

4.9 FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS

Flammable liquids such as gasoline, diesel or helicopter fuel must not be used for
cleaning purposes. Non-flammable products must be used, preferably non-toxic and
biodegradable.

Storage areas must have containment facilities to prevent spillage and minimize fire
hazards.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

4.10 CONTAINERS

All bottles, drums or other such vessels must be clearly labeled with contents and
appropriate warning notices. This information must be in English and the
predominant local language.

Empty drums must be kept in a secure area until they can be shipped ashore.

45/55 gallon drums must not be modified in any way or used other than originally
intended; they must not be used for trash, work platforms, storage of protectors, and
so on.

Hot work must never be performed on or near any drum or other container that
contains or previously contained hazardous materials.

4.11 PAINT

All paint products and thinners must be stored in closed containers and stored in
designated paint lockers.

Paint lockers must be in designated areas and marked with appropriate safety signs
and warnings.

The paint locker must be an enclosed space with:


• A fire detection system.
• A fixed fire extinguishing system.
• An explosion-proof fan.
• Firefighting instructions clearly posted in English and the predominant local
language.

Painting in an unventilated area is not permitted without the use of air-supplied


respirators.

When using spray equipment, painters must wear filter masks, goggles and further
appropriate PPE. Exposed skin must be coated with barrier cream as a minimum.

4.12 ASBESTOS

A survey must be conducted to determine the extent of asbestos at any installation


or facility. The results must be documented and retained, and made available upon
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

request. Steps must be taken to identify and clearly mark any asbestos or Asbestos
Containing Materials (ACM) at Company installations and facilities.

All personnel must be made aware of the hazards of asbestos exposure. (See
Section 4 Subsection 1.3) Personnel must be made aware of the extent of
asbestos if there is any at the installation or facility.

Only certified qualified subcontracted personnel can perform the removal of


asbestos or remedial work that may disturb otherwise encapsulated or non-friable
asbestos.

Disturbance or removal of materials that contain the unique material properties of


asbestos or ACM, must only be done, if:
• The Company employee performing the work has a valid training certificate
qualifying the employee in asbestos removal.(See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
• All the regulatory mandated safety equipment is available.
• The work area is completely isolated and warning signs posted.
• A Permit to Work is complete.

4.13 RADIO SILENCE

Radio silence must be required when there is a risk of accidental activation of


explosive materials from radio/electrical transmissions.

Radio silence normally occurs in conjunction with an operation that requires a Permit
to Work (for example, use of explosives).

The OIM or designee must coordinate the preparations and the monitoring of the
period of radio silence.

Radio Silence is not required if specific devices are used. These devices are
detailed in HQS-OPS-TIB-093-001.

The following must be adhered to whenever an installation is required to enter a


period of radio silence:
• The person requiring radio silence (for example, wireline operator) must
inform the radio room well in advance that radio silence is required. This is to
ensure that all potential hazards associated with radio silence can be
addressed.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

• When radio silence has been requested, the Radio Operator must inform the
OIM so an assessment can be made of the safety implications associated
with suspending the installation communications at that time (for example,
supply vessel alongside, divers in the water, helicopter due, and so on.)
• Suspend all hot work, work over the side, or any other work covered by the
Permit to Work system that may affect or be affected by a safe period of radio
silence.
• Isolation performed, tags posted and reporting of the following must be
completed:
1. Welding plants
2. Crane radios
3. Lifeboat radios
4. Top drive
5. Impressed current systems (this does not include anti-fouling/corrosion
reduction systems for internal pipe work)
6. Radar
7. Portable gas detectors (if not intrinsically safe)

All portable VHF and UHF sets to be returned and checked (subcontractors, such as
divers, must ensure all their portable and fixed radios are accounted for and
immobilized).

Ensure all cellular telephones are switched off.

Inform standby vessel to proceed outside the 500m zone and act as a guard ship
while maintaining radio watch on VHF Channel 16 and any additional frequencies
which may be in use in the field such as, company radios and helicopter air band
radios.

All data communications (including wireless) must be suspended. (Microwave link


may be maintained.)

Supply vessel operations to be suspended.

Dependent upon the location, all installations in the vicinity are to be informed. This
is of vital importance if the installation is involved in combined operations with
another installation.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

Radio Operator must send via telex, fax, email, or phone a notice advising of radio
silence, giving the approximate length of time the installation must be in radio
silence, to the following parties:
• Division or base office
• Client
• Helicopter company

NOTE: If a helicopter is in the air and inbound for the installation, radio silence
must not commence until the helicopter has departed the installation.

A second telex, fax, email or phone call must be sent when the installation is out of
radio silence.

Radio Operator must make a general broadcast on:


• Appropriate local frequencies.
• Channel 16 VHF.
• The installation’s working channels.

All radio equipment (including satellite communications) in the radio room/control


room must be isolated.

Before entering radio silence, a PA announcement must be made advising all


personnel that the installation is entering radio silence, stating that use of all radios
and welding equipment is prohibited until further notice.

On completion of radio silence, a PA announcement must be made advising all


personnel that the installation is out of radio silence.

All periods of radio silence must be recorded in the installation's radio and marine
log.

A Radio Silence THINK Checklist should be used to ensure radio silence is


achieved.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Receive Company approved hazardous materials awareness training.
• Before using any hazardous material, personnel must:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

1. Refer to the HMIS for storage and handling information.


2. Read the labels on the containers.
3. Be aware of the relevant information from MSDS.
4. Check for warning signs or special instructions posted in the area.
5. Use the PPE stated on the HMIS placard as a minimum requirement.

5.2 RADIO OPERATOR:


• Inform the OIM that radio silence has been requested, so an assessment can
be made of the safety implications associated with suspending the installation
communications.
• Send via telex, fax, email, or phone a notice advising of radio silence, giving
the approximate length of time the installation must be in radio silence, to the
following parties:
1. Division or base office
2. Client
3. Helicopter company
• Send a second telex, fax, email or phone call when the installation is out of
radio silence.
• Make a general broadcast on:
1. Appropriate local frequencies.
2. Channel 16 VHF.
3. The installation’s working channels.
• Isolate all radio equipment (including satellite communications) in the radio
room/control room.
• Ensure all cellular telephones and wireless data communications equipment
are switched off.
• Before entering radio silence, make a PA announcement advising all
personnel that the installation is entering radio silence, stating that use of all
radios and welding equipment is prohibited until further notice.
• On completion of radio silence, make a PA announcement advising all
personnel that the installation is out of radio silence.

5.3 MATERIALS PERSON:


• Attend a Company approved course in the handling/shipping of hazardous
materials.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

• Ensure the packaging and manifesting for shipment of all hazardous material
meets both company and regulatory requirements.
• Ensure that an applicable MSDS is received with all hazardous materials
received at the location.
• Ensure MSDSs for received Hazardous materials are forwarded to the
Installation Medical Person.

5.4 INSTALLATION MEDICAL PERSON:


• Maintain the system at the installation that ensures up-to-date MSDS are
available.

5.5 OIM:
• Ensure a THINK plan is conducted before hazardous materials are unloaded
from supply vessels and the relevant information from MSDS or HMIS specific
to the chemicals is discussed and understood.
• Ensure subcontractor personnel handling hazardous materials have
applicable training and documentation to handle explosives, radioactive
materials, dangerous liquids and gasses and approve those personnel to
handle these materials at the installation or facility. (See Section 4
Subsection 2.3)
• Be responsible for the placement and security of any explosives, radioactive
materials, dangerous liquids or gases brought onboard an installation or to a
facility.
• Ensure a survey is conducted to determine the extent of asbestos, the results
are documented and retained, and made available upon request.
• Coordinate the preparations and the monitoring of the period of radio silence.
• Ensure all periods of radio silence are recorded in the installation's radio and
marine log.

5.6 BUSINESS UNIT TRAINING MANAGER


• Ensure Company approved training for shipping of hazardous materials
meets the requirements of local regulatory bodies. If conflicts exist, training
must be made available to personnel which satisfies both Company and
regulatory requirements.
• Approve the selection of asbestos awareness training and ensure the training
includes an installation/facility specific briefing on the extent of asbestos, if
there is any, at the installation or facility.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

6 DOCUMENTATION

The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples
are not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of
the examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Radio Silence THINK Checklist (Figure A)
(Must be retained in the installation files for a period of one year.)
• S.H.I.P. Manifest (Figure B)
(Must be retained in the installation files for a period of one year.)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

Figure A, Radio Silence THINK Checklist

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials

Figure B, S.H.I.P. Manifest

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.8
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Personal Impairment

1 POLICY

When physical, mental or emotional impairment is recognized, it must be


managed.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to reduce the risk of incidents caused by an individual’s
impairment.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel.

4 PROCEDURE

Ineffective communication can lead to impairment. It is of utmost importance that


effective understanding is established by treating people as THEY need to be
treated.

4.1 DETERMINING IMPAIRMENT

Efforts must be made to ensure that personnel are not allowed to work while
impaired physically, emotionally or mentally.

Some forms of impairment can be difficult to recognize by people other than the
person affected. Personnel must be actively encouraged to alert their supervisor or
co-workers if they feel they are unable to perform their duties at full capacity.

Any person who suspects a co-worker to be impaired in any way must bring the
situation to the attention of the supervisor in charge.

Should any form of impairment be identified or suspected, the person affected must
be assessed and given immediate appropriate care. The person must not return to
normal duties until the impairment has been dealt with and no longer adversely
affects or puts at risk the individual, others, the environment or Company property.

4.2 PHYSICAL IMPAIRMENT

Physical impairment could be caused by an unknown or unreported injury, illness or


fatigue, returning to active duty too quickly after an injury, illness, exposure to

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.8
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Personal Impairment

extreme temperatures, excessive working hours or numerous other issues which


can effect a person’s physical capabilities.

All working hours must be monitored. Work should be planned and resources
allocated to ensure additional working hours are not required. If this is not possible,
any requirement for personnel to work additional hours must be approved by the
OIM/Facility Manager/Office Department Head.

0 – 12 Hours No additional authorization required


12 – 16 Hours Agreement of supervisor, authorization by OIM/Facility
Manager/Office Department Head
Over 16 hours Abnormal Circumstances - Agreement of supervisor,
authorization by OIM/Facility Manager/Office Department
Head.

For any person to work in excess of a 16 hour continuous period the following
factors must be considered:
• The nature of the demands (physical and mental) during both the previous 16
hours.
• The nature of the demands (physical and mental) for the extended work
period.
• The working environment – noise, temperature, and weather conditions.
• Type of work – supervisory, administrative, or manual.
• Self supervision or working alone.
• Is the task HSE critical?

Personnel must have a minimum 6 hour rest period after any extended work period.

4.3 EMOTIONAL IMPAIRMENT

Emotional impairment could be caused by severe rage, upsetting news from home
or the work place, depression, excitement, or other emotions.

Each Business Unit must have a system in place to identify when grief counseling
may be needed. If a need for grief counseling is identified, it should be provided for
personnel as soon as practicable.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.8
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Personal Impairment

4.4 MENTAL IMPAIRMENT

Mental impairment could be caused by improper managing of any physical or


emotional issues, fatigue, stress, phobias, obsessions, medicines, and mind altering
substances such as alcohol, drugs, vapors, caffeine, nicotine, etc.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Immediately bring any recognized impairment to the attention of the
supervisor in charge.

5.2 ALL SUPERVISORS:


• Immediately notify the OIM/Office Department Head when anyone is
recognized as impaired in any way.
• Monitor working hours of personnel under their supervision and ensure any
additional working hours are assesses and approved.

5.3 OIM/FACILITY MANAGER/OFFICE DEPARTMENT HEAD:


• Assess and approve all requirements for additional working hours.
• Manage impaired individual(s) with all available resources.
• Notify the Installation Medical Person for evaluation of all suspected
impairment cases.

5.4 BUSINESS UNIT OPERATIONS MANAGER


• Ensure a system is in place to identify the need for grief counseling and
initiate when identified.

6 DOCUMENTATION

There is currently no documentation associated with this Policy or Procedure.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

1 POLICY

Only competent personnel authorized by the OIM may perform electrical work.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to protect personnel and equipment from the hazards
associated with electricity.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations and facilities.

This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.

4 PROCEDURE

For the purpose of this policy and procedure electrical systems and equipment
includes electronic systems and equipment.

4.1 ELECTRICAL SAFETY

The OIM must designate a specific person as the electrical responsible person for
the installation. Only personnel authorized by the electrical responsible person who
have undergone approved electrical safety training and those under training may
perform any work on electrical equipment. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)

All electrical faults must be reported as soon as possible to the electrical responsible
person or designee.

All electrical systems and equipment must be installed, operated and maintained in a
safe manner.

4.2 TOOLS AND PORTABLE APPARATUS

Ladders and steps used for working on electrical equipment must be constructed
from non-conductive materials. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.3).

Hand held tools and portable apparatus may be subject to extreme abuse of
insulation, which could allow the casing to become live. It is essential to use
equipment that withstands the particularly adverse conditions found on an
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

installation; in addition, the importance of correct protection and grounding cannot be


over emphasized.

All portable electrical equipment, including flexible cables and cords, must be
permanently numbered and clearly identified with the last inspection date and
regularly maintained through the planned maintenance system. Flexible cables and
cords must be in a sound condition and not kinked or damaged in any way. All
defective cables must be withdrawn from service.

All portable cables/cords, electrically powered portable equipment (drills, hand


lamps, and so on) and portable receptacles must be used in conjunction with a
ground fault circuit interrupter. The GFCI protection must be installed as close to the
power source as practicable.

All test and calibration equipment must be maintained and checked for accuracy
against independently certified calibration equipment.

The electrical responsible person must check all portable electrical apparatus or
electrically driven equipment brought onto an installation for general condition and
verification of “fitness for purpose.” (See Section 4 Subsection 2.3)

A system must be in place to ensure the safe use of personal electrical apparatus,
for example, TV’s, video players, electric shavers, and so on.

All portable electrical apparatus (tools, leads, flexible cables, cords and crossovers,
and so on) intended for use in hazardous areas must be of a type certified by an
approved body for use in hazardous areas.

Approved air driven portable tools must be used in hazardous areas when portable
electrical apparatus, tools, cross-overs, GFCIs, and so on, are not of the type
certified by an approved body for use in hazardous areas.

When not in use, portable apparatus must be left switched off and disconnected
from the supply. Portable equipment and flexible cables must be removed from the
work area and suitably stored so they are not likely to cause or be damaged.

Portable electrical hand tools must not have the capability to be locked in the “On”
position.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

4.3 GENERAL

Metal watchstraps and conductive bracelets must not be worn when working on or
near electrical components due to the hazards of electrical shock.

All entryways to switchgear rooms must have posted notices stating “Danger-High
Voltage.”

Any instructions to make apparatus “live” or “dead” must be given verbally or written
at the time and not by a pre-arranged signal.

No circuit breaker may be reset after a fault trip until the cause of tripping has been
definitely ascertained, except at the discretion of the electrical responsible person.

Washing down electrical equipment using water is strictly prohibited. Extreme


caution must be taken when washing down with power washers in the vicinity of
electrical equipment.

All electrical motors must have an effective safety ground.

Switchgear rooms, transformer rooms and bays may not be used for general
storage. The switchgear and floors of these rooms must be kept clear of all materials
and obstructions.

Materials and equipment may be stored in switchgear and transformer rooms


provided they are in purpose made containers and stored in cabinets or on shelving.

Access to electrical switchgear and transformer areas must be restricted to


authorized personnel only.

Appropriate non-conductive mats must be placed in front of switchboards and


transformers. These mats must be maintained in a clean and dry condition.

At least one pair of electrically non-conducting (dielectric) gloves must be available


in each switchgear/ transformer room. These gloves must be inspected per the
manufacturer recommendations and included in the installation’s planned
maintenance system.

Switchgear installed in various spaces must be kept clear of obstructions and


nothing may be stored on top of switchgear.

Flammable materials must not be stored or left in switchgear rooms.


Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

Only authorized persons may perform the testing and adjustments of safety devices.

All electrical panels and enclosures containing electrical switchgear must have their
integrity fully intact, e.g. all securing bolts in place, redundant openings and glands
sealed.

Redundant or spare cables must be properly terminated and marked for


identification on both ends, or removed.

All cableways through bulkheads must be properly sealed.

Cable trays must be maintained to fully support the cable installation.

Outlets must be marked to indicate voltage.

4.4 HIGH VOLTAGE

All personnel performing electrical work must be made aware of the special
considerations involved with testing or performing work on high voltage.

High voltage is defined as voltage exceeding 1000VAC or 1500VDC.

No repair work on live high voltage equipment may be performed.

To ensure high voltage systems are dead, testing may only be performed with use of
a live line tester. A suitable risk assessment must be performed prior to this task.

All personnel performing work on high voltage systems must receive training by a
Company approved instructor.

There must be two electrical personnel present while maintenance, testing or repair
work is being performed on high voltage equipment.

When testing of live high voltage equipment must be performed, appropriately rated
equipment with fused leads and probes must be used. High Voltage test equipment
must be inspected prior to use.

To ensure that the risk to personnel is minimized all conductors should be grounded
using grounding devices or leads applied to all points where the circuit or equipment
is isolated from the supply. Additional grounds at the point of work may also be
necessary if this is remote from the point of isolation. Additional grounds should be
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

applied ONLY after proving the circuit dead at the point of work. This procedure is
essential for high voltage and stored energy equipment (containing capacitors). All
grounding conductors and their connections must be rated for the potential circuit
energy in the event of a failure of precautions.

4.5 ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY RESPONSE

4.5.1 RESCUE

A special insulated tool (Shepherd’s Hook) must be available in all


switchgear/transformer rooms for the purpose of removing persons from live
conductors. All relevant personnel must be trained in its use. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)

When working on switchgear not located in a designated switchgear/transformer


room, a special insulated rescue tool and one pair of electrically non-conducting
(dielectric) gloves must be made available at the work site.

4.5.2 FIRST AID

The specific procedures for treating persons suffering from electric shock must be
displayed in all switchgear/transformer rooms. All persons engaged in electrical work
must familiarize themselves with these instructions.

If a person suffers an electric shock, carry out the following:


• Switch off current immediately; if not possible, do not waste time searching for
the switch.
• In High Voltage situations DO NOT approach the casualty until the power has
been switched off. Safeguard yourself when removing a casualty from
electrical contact. Stand on non-conducting material (rubber-mat, dry wood,
dry linoleum) considering the level of voltage involved. Use rubber gloves, dry
clothing and a special insulated tool to separate the casualty from contact.
• Call for assistance.
• Check for consciousness, breathing and pulse. If trained, start CPR as
indicated.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

4.5.3 FIRE FIGHTING

Fire fighting equipment using water or foam must not be used on electrical
apparatus. Extinguishing agents suitable for dealing with fires involving electrical
equipment and switchgear are, in order of preference:
• Carbon Dioxide
• Dry Powder
• Class D type fire extinguishers

Fire fighting appliances containing any one of these agents may be used in the
vicinity of live electrical apparatus provided that safe distances are kept between the
extinguishers and live parts. It is preferable to switch off the current if possible. Since
CO2 can prove toxic in confined spaces, everyone (including the person discharging
the extinguisher) should withdraw immediately.

Note: All nozzle outlets must be of non-conductive construction.

4.6 PERMIT TO WORK

All electrical work in any designated hazardous area or areas in which an explosive
gas mixture is likely to occur in normal operations, requires a Permit to Work.

If, for any particular reason, an electrical apparatus cannot be made dead and is
considered hazardous to life, relevant precautions must be taken and a Permit to
Work must cover the work.

4.7 ISOLATION (SEE SECTION 4 SUBSECTION 5.4)

Before work is carried out on remote or automatically controlled equipment (such as


circuit breakers, motor driven equipment and emergency generators), isolation of
fuses or disconnection of terminals must first render the automatic remote control
feature inoperative.

Before any cable is cut it must be made dead, positively identified and, where
practicable, grounded.

During failure of electrical supply, all apparatus, equipment and conductors must be
regarded as being “live” until isolated and tested.

Electrical apparatus and electrically driven equipment must be made safe from any
electrical source by the opening of the appropriate circuit breakers, fused isolators,
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

isolators, links or fuses and closing of earth switches or installation of approved


grounds before any work is carried out on it.

All possible back feeds from the low voltage sides of power transformers, voltage
transformers or auxiliary transformers must be isolated.

4.8 BATTERIES

Acid resistant protective clothing must be worn at all times when working with or
immediately near batteries, however minor the work may be. Acid resistant
protective clothing consists of suit, gloves and safety goggles in conjunction with a
face shield.

Only approved insulated tools may be used to connect or disconnect cells. The
insulation on these tools must be in good condition and checked before use. Non-
insulated tools and metal objects must not be used near batteries.

No person working on batteries should work alone.

Before cells can be disconnected, battery chargers must be isolated. Before being
disconnected, fully charged batteries should be allowed to stand at least 12 hours
(24 where possible) after charging has ceased.

When a battery is being charged the potential exists for emission of hydrogen and
oxygen gases. No naked lights should be used or any work done that may produce a
spark near batteries on charge.

All efforts must be made to ventilate battery cabinets before work commences.

Batteries must be disposed of properly (sent ashore for recycling when possible).

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ELECTRICAL RESPONSIBLE PERSON:


• Authorize personnel to perform work on electrical equipment.
• Check all portable electrical apparatus or electrically driven equipment
brought onto an installation for general condition and verification of “fitness for
purpose.”
• Ensure all electrical PPE is available where required and in a safe working
condition.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety

• Verify equipment is electrically dead and any stored energy sources have
been discharged.

5.2 PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED TO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK:


• Familiarize themselves with instructions for treating persons suffering from
electric shock.

5.3 OIM:
• Designate an electrical responsible person for the installation.
• Ensure all relevant personnel are trained in the use of a special insulated tool
for separation of persons from live conductors.

6 DOCUMENTATION

There is currently no documentation associated with this Policy or Procedure.

Refer to (Section 4 Subsection 5.4) for electrical isolations and Energy


Isolation Certificate.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
HSE Recognition

1 POLICY

Effective HSE performance will be recognized.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to motivate all personnel to take a proactive role in all
HSE efforts.

The Company recognizes that true HSE motivation lies in proactive leadership and a
person's continued well being. Awards are only a part of the recognition process.
The Company strongly supports the HSE efforts of the individuals and teams and
believes that proactive HSE performance should be recognized.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel.

4 PROCEDURE

The HSE Recognition Program must be based on a combination of proactive


involvement in the various processes and not just on HSE statistics.

4.1 CORPORATE HSE RECOGNITION

Units, Divisions and installations must be recognized for outstanding HSE


performance. The criteria must be based on the following:
• An effective Performance Monitoring Audit and Assessment process.
• A high degree of compliance to the HSE Management System.
• A proactive approach to apply Company HSE processes.
• An incident rate better than Corporate goal.
• Innovative HSE improvement and corrective ideas.

4.2 UNIT, DIVISION AND INSTALLATION HSE RECOGNITION PROGRAMS

Individuals and teams must be recognized and rewarded for achieving and
maintaining a high standard of HSE performance.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
HSE Recognition

Each Unit Vice President, Division Manager and Rig Manager must determine the
structure and approval process for the award and recognition system within their
area of responsibility.

The HSE award structure must be based on a combination of the processes by


which HSE results are achieved and not just by the end results themselves. Vice
Presidents and Managers must carefully consider the criteria by which HSE awards
are given, as rewarding individuals and teams on HSE results alone can be
counterproductive and encourages the non-reporting of incidents.

4.3 SUGGESTED HSE AWARD CRITERIA

An effective way to set and track Unit, Division, installation or facility specific
objectives would be to use key performance indicators that could be a combination
of some of the HSE improvement criteria listed below:
• Proactive promotion and use the Platinum Rule, “Treat people as THEY
NEED to be treated.”
• Effective use of leadership skills in the management of people.
• Effective mentoring of co-workers.
• Imparting a sense of HSE excellence in people and making positive
contributions to the HSE culture of the Company.
• Exhibiting a positive HSE attitude.
• Participation and use of THINK Planning Process.
• Participation and use of START Observation and Monitoring Process.
• Effective and timely close out of FOCUS, Corrective and Improvement
Actions.
• Individual or team participation to facilitate effective HSE meetings.
• Full compliance with the HSE Policies and Procedures.
• Accurate and timely reporting of incidents as defined by the HSE system.
• Holding effective discussions with personnel for the purpose of personal
development and HSE performance recognition as well as providing direction
for HSE improvement. (Mentoring)
• Establishment of installation, facility or personal HSE goals and plans.
• Achievement of installation, facility or personal HSE goals and established
plans (Annual, Quarterly, Monthly).

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
HSE Recognition

• Involvement in conducting audits and assessments to the Company HSE


System.
• Continuous improvement of audit and assessment results of the HSE system
• Emergency Response Drill Briefing, Practice and Debriefing.
• Training compliance.
• Client satisfaction/recognition.
• Use of effective incident analysis to determine the possible causes of
incidents and resolve any corrective action that may be necessary to prevent
recurrence.

5 RESPONSIBILITY

Corporate QHSE Services, Business Unit Vice Presidents, Division Managers and
Rig Managers are responsible for determining the structure and approval process for
the award and recognition system within their area of responsibility.

6 DOCUMENTATION

There is currently no documentation associated with this Policy or Procedure.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

1 POLICY

The FOCUS Improvement Process must be used to Formulate, Organize,


Communicate, Undertake and Summarize corrective and improvement action
points to improve Company performance and capture lessons learned.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to provide a consistent means of ensuring action points
that add value are completed, Company performance is improved, and lessons
learned made available.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers all Company personnel.

4 PROCEDURE

The FOCUS Improvement Process provides a consistent means to improve


Company performance by formulating an action plan, organizing resources to carry
out the plan, communicating the action plan, undertaking the action, summarizing
the results and capturing lessons learned.

See the FOCUS section of the Management System Manual, HQS-CMS-GOV


for a more detailed FOCUS procedure.

4.1 FOCUS IMPROVEMENT PROCESS

The FOCUS Improvement Process consists of steps to address improvement and


corrective opportunities.

FOCUS enhances the execution of THINK and START within the Management of
Change Process.

The FOCUS Improvement Process incorporates a planning and tracking tool


(FOCUS tool) located within the Global Reporting System (GRS) as a means to
efficiently manage the steps of formulating the plan, organizing the resources,
communicating the plan, undertaking the improvement/corrective opportunities and
summarizing the results.

The feedback from the FOCUS Improvement Process is lessons learned. Use of
GRS enables the Company to capture lessons learned and to make them available.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

The first step in the FOCUS Improvement Process is to determine if the opportunity
is “improvement” or “corrective,” as described in paragraph 4.2, “Sources of Outputs
and Results (Opportunities).”

After determining whether the opportunity is “improvement” or “corrective” the


FOCUS tool within GRS is used to develop the improvement and corrective
opportunity actions.

4.1.1 FORMULATE THE PLAN (THINK)


• Analyze the improvement or corrective opportunity actions required.
• If a corrective opportunity action is required, address the causal factors
(change, condition, action and inaction). Determine if any interim actions are
required as part of the corrective action.
• For corrective opportunity actions, develop plans, identifying effective
solutions and steps to implement the plan. Identify and assess any risks and
determine the necessary controls to safely and effectively support the steps of
the plan.
• For improvement plans, define the steps required to improve performance.
For executing plans, define the steps required to ensure that an expected
level of performance is maintained. Identify and assess any risks and
determine the necessary controls to safely and effectively support the steps of
the plan.
• Assign the priority (high, medium, low) to prioritize the planned actions.

4.1.2 ORGANIZE RESOURCES (THINK)


• Identify the resources required for the successful implementation of the
planned actions. This may involve requesting expertise (knowledge, practice,
skill and approval) and other resources from departments within the Company
such as engineering (REA), technical field support, QHSE, training,
operations, and so on, or outside parties such as clients, vendors, regulatory
agencies or others.
• Determine a target date for completion of the planned actions.

4.1.3 COMMUNICATE THE PLAN (THINK)


• Determine if other parties are affected by the planned actions.
• Identify the responsible person for communicating the planned actions to
parties that may be affected.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

• Define the method the responsible person uses to communicate the planned
actions.
• Responsible person communicates the planned actions to all parties involved
or affected by the proposed changes.
• Submit the plan for approval per established authority limits.

4.1.4 UNDERTAKE THE ACTIONS (START )


• Implement the actions. Monitor, track and recognize changes that may affect
the planned actions.
• Review any delays or alterations to or deviations from the planned actions
and formulate alternative actions as agreed by the affected parties.
• Inform all affected parties of any changes to the planned actions.
• Ensure the successful implementation of the planned actions and inform all
appropriate parties of their completion.
• Submit approval for any extension(s) of the target completion date of the
planned actions.

4.1.5 SUMMARIZE THE RESULTS


• Evaluate the effectiveness of the completed work. Address the original
improvement and/or corrective opportunity to determine if the planned actions
achieved what they were intended to achieve.
• Confirm the completed planned actions do not result in any unforeseen
adverse effects.
• Ensure lessons learned are clearly described based on the review of the
improvement or corrective opportunity actions completed.
• Responsible Person confirms planned actions were completed and
implemented prior to submitting for close out.
• Maintain availability of lessons learned from improvement and corrective
opportunity actions.
• Communicate lessons learned to the Company as required.
• Determine if Company’s performance was improved by the improvement or
corrective actions completed.

4.2 USE OF GRS FOR PLANNING AND TRACKING OPPORTUITIES

Every corrective or improvement opportunity requires an appropriate action. Actions


are carefully planned to ensure they are appropriately applied and effectively
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

managed. Actions are tracked to ensure they are monitored, followed through and
the results are communicated to those who may benefit from the lessons learned.

The decision to use the FOCUS tool is based on the complexity or criticality of the
actions taken and whether the source of opportunity is discretionary or non-
discretionary.

Sources of opportunity include both mandatory and discretionary (optional) sources.

4.2.1 MANDATORY SOURCES OF OPPORTUNITY

Mandatory sources of opportunity are sources that the Company has identified as
being important and/or critical to performance. They require the use of the FOCUS
tool to ensure corrective or improvement actions are effectively planned and tracked
to completion. The following list includes all mandatory sources that require using
the FOCUS tool:
• Company management system, SMART - Implementation Plans
• Performance Monitoring Audit and Assessment - Corrective and Improvement
Actions Plans
• ISM Code, ISPS Code, Client, Flag State and Regulatory Audits - Corrective
and Improvement Actions Plans.
• HSE Alerts, Corporate and Unit – Corrective and Preventive Actions
• HSE Incident Analysis Result – Corrective and Improvement Actions Plans
• Service Quality Appraisals - Corrective and Improvement Actions Plans
• HSE Meetings - Corrective and Improvement Actions Plans (See Note.)

NOTE: The use of the FOCUS planning and tracking tool is not required
in the case of action points originating from HSE Meetings where:
• the emphasis is on tracking actions rather than planning action
• a limited work scope is confined to the location
• the risk has been assessed to be minimal
• the simple approach to Management of Change is used

4.2.2 DISCRETIONARY SOURCES OF OPPORTUNITY

Discretionary sources of opportunity are sources that require managers and


supervisors to decide if the FOCUS tool should be used to ensure corrective or
improvement actions are effectively planned and tracked.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

It is recommended managers and supervisors use the FOCUS tool in the case of
discretionary sources when:
• A complex and/or critical situation or action has been identified.
• Managers and supervisors require a formal review and approval process.
• Significant lessons learned must be captured so they are available to users.
• Actions that require an extended period of time to complete (not related to
maintenance or procurement activities).

NOTE: Regardless of the source of opportunity, when the “enhanced”


approach to management of change is used, the FOCUS tool must be used.

The following list includes examples of discretionary sources where using the
FOCUS tool is optional (these sources are available for selection in the tool):
• Advisory – Operations, Safety
• Alerts – Client, Equipment, Regulatory
• Annual Installation HSE Plan
• Client/Industry Meeting
• Exemption Request
• Feedback Form
• Lesson Learned*
• Management Review
• Management Visit
• Operational Event Report (OER)
• Security Incident
• START – Monitoring, Observation
• Start-up Plan – Installation, Office/Facility
• Steering Committee Meeting - QHSE
• THINK Plan – HAZOP/HAZID, Individual, MAHRA, Operation Integrity Case,
Safety Case, Task Risk Assessment, Task Specific THINK Procedure,
Verbal, Written

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

Figure A, FOCUS Improvement Process


Improvement and Corrective Opportunities

SOURCE OF OPPORTUNITY
(RESULTS AND OUTPUTS)

Type of Opportunity

Corrective Opportunity Improvement Opportunity

FOCUS Planning and


Tracking Software
Corrective Opportunity Improvement Opportunity
Actions Actions

Preventive Improvement
Is an
Interim Action Action Action
Required?

YES

Interim
NO
Action

Corrective
Action

4.3 FOCUS AND MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

FOCUS enhances the execution of THINK and START within the Management of
Change Process when Company expertise is requested based on the knowledge,
experience, skills and approval available at the installation or within a work group.
(See Figure B, Management of Change Process)

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

Figure B, Management of Change Process

5 RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 ALL PERSONNEL:


• Improve Company performance through the effective use of the FOCUS
Improvement Process.
• Utilize FOCUS in the “enhanced” approach to Management of Change.
• Use FOCUS to plan, risk assess, monitor, track and complete planned
actions.

5.2 OIM / SUPERVISOR:


• Ensure corrective and/or improvement opportunities are planned and tracked
in the FOCUS tool when the source of opportunity is classified as
“mandatory.”
• Ensure corrective and/or improvement opportunities identified add value and
improve Company performance.
• For discretionary sources, determine if the FOCUS tool is necessary to
ensure actions are adequately planned and tracked to completion.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

• Approve corrective and improvement action plans per FOCUS Approval


Authority Limits.
• Monitor approved actions to ensure appropriate implementation is achieved
and lessons learned are captured.
• Ensure approved actions are completed and closed out within the approved
Target Completion Date.
• Review and approve requests for Target Date Extensions per FOCUS
Approval Authority Limits.

5.3 RIG MANAGER/DEPARTMENT HEAD


• Monitor the GRS tracking tool regularly to ensure timely implementation and
close out is achieved.
• Ensure corrective and/or improvement opportunities are planned and tracked
in the FOCUS tool when the source of opportunity is classified as
“mandatory.”
• Ensure corrective and improvement opportunities identified add value and
improve Company performance.
• For discretionary sources or opportunity, determine if the FOCUS tool is
required.
• When actions plans are referred by OIM, review action plans and determine if
additional expertise is required and/or other parties are affected, prior to
approving.
• Communicate requirements to the appropriate expertise (for example,
Engineering, Technical Field Support, Operations, and QHSE) using the
defined request processes.
• Approve corrective and improvement action plans per FOCUS Approval
Authority Limits.
• Monitor approved action plans to ensure appropriate implementation is
achieved and lessons learned are captured.
• Ensure approved actions are completed and closed out within the approved
Target Completion Date.
• Ensure actions plans utilize Company time and resources efficiently and
effectively.

5.4 BUSINESS UNIT QHSE MANAGER


• Ensure the FOCUS Approval Authority Limits have been established and
forwarded to Quality Services in Houston.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process

5.5 BUSINESS UNIT VICE PRESIDENT


• Establish Unit and Division criteria for FOCUS Approval Authority Limits.
• Define any Unit requirements for the use of the FOCUS tool in addition to
mandatory sources already identified in the Company Management system
(for example: SMART - Implementation Plans, PMAA, Management of
Change – Enhanced Approach).

6 DOCUMENTATION

See the GRS Help file (Online and Rig versions) for information on the use of the
GRS FOCUS planning and tracking tool.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

1 POLICY

All work related incidents must be reported and reviewed by the Rig Manager.

All non-work related incidents resulting in trauma and requiring care at the
Medical Treatment level must be reported and reviewed by the Rig Manager.

The Rig Manager must evaluate incidents, develop and implement appropriate
improvement opportunities and track performance to confirm effectiveness.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure a three-phase process is initiated following


the occurrence of an incident on a Company installation, facility or office:
1. Action must be taken to ensure the area is safe and medical attention
provided if required.
2. The incident must be reported internally and externally, as required.
3. The incident must be investigated.

3 SCOPE

This policy covers Company personnel, installations, facilities and offices.

This policy also covers employees and property of any Client, Subcontractor or
outside agency that work at any Company installation, facility, or office.

4 PROCEDURE

4.1 REPORTING PROCEDURE

Only through open and honest reporting can we improve our HSE performance.

All medical attention rendered on a Company installation or facility (including “work


related” or “non-work related” First Aid cases) must be accurately recorded as
defined in the Medical Documentation procedure. (See Section 3 Subsection 2.1)

Instructions for completion of an Incident Report can be found in the Medical


Protocols Manual. See HQS-HSE-PR-02, Section 8 Subsection 2.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

4.1.1 NON-WORK RELATED INCIDENTS

A. MEDICAL CARE PROVIDED OFFSHORE

For traumatic events (injuries) resulting in Medical Treatment, the initial factual
points must be reported and documented on an Incident Report form within the
Global Reporting System (GRS) and validated by the Rig Manager before the
conclusion of the next business day.

For illness, all medical treatment provided is documented as per Section 3


Subsection 2.1.

If the event affects the ability of an employee to perform his routine job functions, the
OIM and the employee’s immediate supervisor must be notified of the employee’s
inability to perform those functions.

B. MEDICAL CARE PROVIDED ONSHORE

Upon return to the installation, Company employees must provide the IMP with a
document signed by the treating physician if:
• a scheduled return crew change was missed as a result of any non-work
related injury or illness, or
• they departed the installation prior to scheduled crew change due to a need to
receive medical care onshore.

The document signed by the treating physician must detail the following:
• Any restrictions
• Any residual effects as a result of the injury or illness
• Any medications prescribed and duration of treatment
• Any follow up care or treatment required
• Physician contact information

Medical care onshore includes treatment of non-work related incidents that occur
while at work and incidents occurring while at home that affects the employee’s
ability to perform routine job functions.

For non-work related incidents, medical care provided onshore is defined as being
provided by the employee’s personal physician or Company authorized physician.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

If any event affects the ability of an employee to perform his routine job functions,
the OIM must be notified of the employee’s inability to perform those functions. This
includes events happening at home while on field break.

4.1.2 WORK RELATED INCIDENTS

A. WORK RELATED FIRST AID, MEDICAL TREATMENT, RESTRICTED


WORK, AND SERIOUS INJURY CASES

The initial factual points must be reported and documented on an Incident Report
form within the Global Reporting System (GRS) and validated by the Rig Manager
before the conclusion of the next business day.
• For work related incidents resulting in injury or illness to personnel, the
Incident Type is “Personnel”.
• Any work related incident resulting in injury or illness to personnel must be
reported on the daily operations report.

B. FATALITY

The Chief Executive Officer and Chief Operations Officer must be notified by the
fastest available means should a fatality occur at any installation, facility or office.

The initial factual points must be reported and documented on an Incident Report
form within the GRS and validated by the Rig Manager before the conclusion of the
next business day.

4.1.3 NON-PERSONAL INJURY REPORTING

A. UNSAFE OBSERVATIONS

Unsafe Observations that cannot be immediately corrected must be reported to the


supervisor by the person(s) conducting the observation and must be documented on
a START Card.

B. NEAR HITS AND SERIOUS NEAR HITS

The initial factual points of any Near Hit or Serious Near Hit must be reported and
documented on an Incident Report form within the GRS and reviewed by the Rig
Manager before the conclusion of the next business day.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

Near Hits must be reported verbally to their supervisor by the persons that witnessed
the event. The OIM must be notified of any Near Hit.

Serious Near Hits must be reported verbally to their supervisor and OIM by the
persons that witnessed the event.

Any Serious Near Hit must be reported on the daily operations report.

If an incident resulting in injury or loss of containment could also be a Serious Near


Hit, it may be reported as such. However, a second Incident Report must be
completed for the Serious Near Hit. The potential severity should only be captured
once, either on the original Incident Report or the Incident Report used to record the
Serious Near Hit.

4.1.4 LOSS OF CONTAINMENT REPORTING

See HQS-HSE-PP-02 Environmental Management Manual.

4.1.5 PROPERTY DAMAGE REPORTING

Property damage must be reported on an Operational Event Report (OER).

4.2 SEVERITY

The Rig Manager, upon review of the Incident Report, must determine the actual
and potential severity of all work-related incidents. The table below outlines the
parameters for assignment of severity.

Table 1: Personnel Incident Severity (consequence) Rating and Values


Personnel Environment Property
Severity Severity Severity
Severity Rating Severity Rating Severity Rating
Value Value Value

FAC 1 Contained Onboard 1 < $1k 1

MTC 3 <0.5 bbl (trace) 3 $1k - $20k 3

RWC 5 0.5–1 bbl 5 >$20k - $50k 5

>1 bbl – 5 bbl OR


SIC <6 mos. off 7 8 >$50k - $500k 8
<1t

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

Personnel Environment Property


>5 bbl – 100 bbl OR
SIC >6 mos. off 15 15 >$500k - $1M 13
1t – 20t

FAT 30 >100 bbl OR > 20t 25 >$1M 20

Personnel
Severity
Severity Rating
Value

FAC 1

MTC 3

RWC 5

SIC <6 mos. off 7

SIC >6 mos. off 15

FAT 30

4.2.1 DETERMINING SEVERITY OF NEAR HITS AND SERIOUS NEAR HITS

Near Hits and Serious Near Hits result in only potential severity and no actual
severity. Potential severity of a Serious Near Hit is represented in the shaded areas
of Table 1. Potential severity of a Near Hit is represented in the non-shaded areas of
Table 1.

The Potential Severity value does not determine the classification of Near Hit or
Serious Near Hit. The Severity rating determines classification of a Near Hit or
Serious Near Hit.

There is no relationship between Potential Severity value and the classification of


Near Hits or Serious Near Hits.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

4.2.2 SEVERITY RATE – SAFETY PERFORMANCE INDICATOR

Severity Rate is a leading and lagging safety performance indicator.

Severity Rate is derived from the cumulative severity values of a series of incidents
that represents relative changes in severity as a function of time.

There are two types of severity rates, actual and potential.

A. ACTUAL SEVERITY RATE - LAGGING SAFETY PERFORMANCE


INDICATOR

The Actual Severity Rate represents incident severity over a period of time. The
“Actual Severity Rate” represents the sum of all actual severity values assigned to
incidents occurring in the specified time frame. The “Working Hours” represents the
sum of all working man-hours in the specified time frame.

The Actual Severity Rate is calculated using the following equation:

Actual Severity Rate = Actual Severity value sum x 200,000


Working Hours

The Actual Severity Rate is comprised of actual severity values for all categories of
work related personnel injury or illness incidents.

B. POTENTIAL SEVERITY RATE - LEADING SAFETY PERFORMANCE


INDICATOR

The Potential Severity Rate is a representation of incident potential severity over a


period of time. The “Potential Severity Rate” represents the sum of all potential
severity values assigned to incidents occurring in the specified time frame. The
“Working Hours” represents the sum of all working man-hours in the specified time
frame.

The Potential Severity Rate is calculated using the following equation:

Potential Severity Rate = Potential Severity value sum x 200,000


Working Hours

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

• The Potential Severity Rate is comprised of potential severity values for work
related personnel injury or illness (all categories) and Near Hits and Serious
Near Hits involving potential personnel injury.

4.2.3 SEVERITY CALCULATOR

The severity calculator allows the Rig Manager to assign the severity ratings and
carry out on an ongoing basis the computations that result in the severity rate. The
Rig Manager must maintain the severity calculator within the GRS.

The Rig Manager must use the severity values to determine if an action needs to be
taken.

The Division Manager must ensure that the severity calculator is applied in a
consistent manner.

4.3 INCIDENT ANALYSIS

Incidents indicate where performance can be improved. Incident analysis uses


critical information to establish what happened but, more significantly, determines
how important it is for the Company to act on it. Incident analysis identifies corrective
and improvement opportunities that represent lessons learned which must be
reviewed against the Company Management System for change and/or
improvement.

Each Business Unit must have a specific procedure in place for incident analysis
which takes into account the following factors:
• Location of Business Unit and Division Management’s Incident Fact-Finding
Team
• Availability of specialized expertise
• Regulatory requirements
• Geographical locations
• Transportation infrastructure
• Local customs and cultures

Although the Business Unit Incident Analysis procedure is approved by the Business
Unit Vice President, Corporate QHSE Services (in conjunction with the Business
Unit and Division QHSE Manager) must also review the procedure to ensure it
adequately addresses the following:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

A. COMMUNICATION PLAN
• Establishing a Communication Plan - installations, Clients and Regulatory
Bodies
• Sharing Lessons Learned and Incident Follow up Plans

B. ORGANIZING FACT-FINDING
• Identifying and Collecting Facts - Who, What, Where, When
• Interviewing Witness(s)
• Maintaining a Log of Events
• Summarizing of Facts
• Preserving and Representing Evidence
• Managing Factual Statements
• Defining the Role of Witnesses

C. FACT FINDING DOCUMENT AND EVIDENCE CONTROL


• Source, Flow and Retention

D. MANAGEMENT REVIEW OF FACTS


• Analyzing Facts Effectively
• Determining Corrective Opportunities
• Managing Speculation in Incident Analysis Reporting
• Determining Corrective and Improvement Opportunities (as defined in the
FOCUS process)
• Determining Corrective, Preventive and Improvement Actions (as defined in
the FOCUS process )
• Summarizing conclusions effectively.

The four key steps required to complete an incident analysis are:


1. Fact-finding. This must take place at the site of the incident.
2. Management review of facts.
3. Communication of Corrective and Improvement Opportunities.
4. Development of Corrective and Improvement Action plans in the FOCUS
Planning and Tracking software.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

4.3.1 FACT-FINDING

Designation of the appropriate responsible person for managing the fact-finding step
is determined by the severity value initially assigned by the Rig Manager as it is
applied to the Fact-Finding Table of Responsibilities.

The decision of what resources and personnel are assigned to the fact-finding
process must be based on the areas of expertise required, the level of experience
available, the local environment and the level of direct management involvement
necessary to complete the fact-finding step.

The table below identifies the responsible person for ensuring adequate resources
and trained personnel are assigned to the fact-finding step.
• A – OIM
• B – Rig Manager or Division Manager/Unit Operations Manager

Fact-Finding Table of Responsibilities


Incident Type Personnel Environment Property
Total 61 + B B B B B B B B B
Potential 31–60 B B B A A B A A B
Severity 1–30 A B B A A B A A B
0–6 7–14 15 + 0–6 7–14 15 + 0–6 7–14 15 +
Actual Severity

Fact-Finding Table of Responsibilities


Incident Type Personnel
Total 61 + B B B
Potential 31–60 B B B
Severity 1–30 A B B
0–6 7–14 15 +
Actual Severity

Note: For Near Hits & Serious Near Hits, the potential severity value
determines the incident type.

The following persons may be asked to lead the fact-finding step of the investigation:
• Independent investigator
• Company legal representative

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting

• Business Unit Vice President


• Business Unit QHSE Manager
• Business Unit/Corporate OSA
• Division Manager/Operations Manager
• Division HSE Manager, where applicable
• Rig Manager
• OIM
• Crew supervisor
• Safety representative, where applicable
• Rig Safety Training Coordinator (RSTC), where applicable

Crewmembers may be asked to assist in the fact-finding component of the


investigation.

4.3.2 MANAGEMENT REVIEW OF FACTS

The Management Review of Facts should focus on how to prevent the incident from
happening again and what can be learned from the incident. The Management
Review determines whether corrective and improvement opportunities are needed to
improve safety. Responsibility for ensuring adequate resources for carrying out the
Management Review of Facts is determined by the Division Manager.

Corporate Operations Group conducts the Management Review of Facts for all
fatalities. Business Unit Management may be requested to assist in the fact-finding
step, but the overall responsibility for Management Review of Facts resides with
Corporate Operations Group.

4.3.3 COMMUNICATION OF CORRECTIVE AND IMPROVEMENT


OPPORTUNITIES

Upon completion of the Management Review of Facts, corrective and improvement


opportunities are communicated through line management and, when deemed
appropriate by QHSE Management (Corporate/Business Unit/Division), also by HSE
Alert, HSE Bulletin or HSE Advisory. All Incident Analysis Results are non-
discretionary sources of opportunities and must be entered into the FOCUS tracking
software.

Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING